;O
•CO
•^•IH^B^^HH
m^PPW-
illpi^
SHASTRI INDO-CANADIAN INSTITUTE
156 Golf Links, New Delhl-3, India
HO GRAMMAR
(WITH VOCABULARY)
BY
LIONEL BURROWS, B. A.
Bengal Provincial Civil Service.
Calcutta:
PRINTED AT CATHOLIC ORPHAN PRESS,
3 & 4, Portuguese Church Street. 1915.
Y/
printed by M. Apel for tlie Author,
At the Catholic Orphan Press,
3 Portuguese Church Street,
Calcutta.
1915.
t
PREFACE.
Sine-- I lirnan writing this (Jrammar, I have constantly encotnu the mistaken impression that tlrSre is no material difference he; . Mundari and IIo and that, inasmuch, as there are several grammars dealing with the former, it would he almosUi work of supererogation to compiles separate grammar on the latter It is certainly an accepted historical fact that the Santals, Hos and Mmvlas originally belonged to the same ahoriginal race, and it has been amply demonstrated that they still represent the same ethnic type with a strong linguistic affinity between the dialects they use. The language of the original ancient race was not, however, written so far as is known, and there is therefore no classical standard by which its various surviving forms can be measured and compared. Max Miiller has pointed out that "all savage tribes, with no letters to fix their tongues, alter their speech much more rapidly than civilized nations" and, in another place, he remarks that all unwritten languages are " in a state of continual com- bustion." The causes of this constant state of change are numerous, and some of them are curiously interesting. For instance, a missionary observer quoted by Max Miiller has reported that " when a chief or priest utters a witticism or invents a new phrase, it is at once caught up and passed current ; mispronunciations, imperfect articulations of words arising from loss of teeth in old men who, from their former rank or prowess, are entitled to respect, sometimes give rise to similar changes." Again, economic progress leads to the adoption of a new process or implement, the word for which may be coined differently by tribes speaking cognate dialects, but living apart, or may be borrowed by each from different adjoining races as " loan- words." Though, therefore, the three dialects — Santali, Mnndari and Ho — of the so-called Munda family of languages do contain marked features of comrnon descent, they have, by the action of time and separate environment, drifted apart on many points of usage, vocabulary and pronunciation. No one has ever questioned the necessity For separate grammars on*the Santali and Mundari dialects, and, as between Mundari and Ho, there are many differences, particularly in vocabulary, which though not perhaps sufficient, as in the case of French and Spanish, to exalt Ho to the dignity of a distinct language, are certainly sufficient to justify its separate treatment. The alterations and marginal notes I had to make in the Mundari Grammar which I used in learning Ho, made it look more like corrected proof-sheets originally set up by a mad compositor than the finally approved pages of a published volume.
2. It was in order to remove the heavy handicap on the acquisition of Ho from the Mundari text-books that the present work was undertaken. Since then, Babu Bhim Ram Salanki of the Singhbhum Deputy Commis- sioner's office has, I understand, published a Ho Grammar in English. T have not yet seen a copy of his book, but, as I had practically finished mine before I heard of his, I can only hope that there is room for another work on(tho same subject. My grammar doefe not pretend to be as scientific an exposition of the Ho dialect as the Rovd. J. Hoffman's book is of Mundari. It is merely a comparatively simple and popular manual based on a first- hand acquaintance with its subject acquired during three years of service as the officer in charge of the Kolhan, and it will have served its purpose if it is of practical use to fellow Government officials and other* who wish to study Ho.
L. B. B.
VlSHNUPOR,
1st September, 1914.
" \
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
1. Li<'iit.-( 'oloiii-l S. If. Tickdl's jiMjicr on the " Grammatical cou^t ruc- tion of the Ho language" in the Journal of th.- Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. IX. Part II, ot 1840, reprinted at Appendix G to Vol. XXXtt,
Part II of 1866.
i
'2. Mr. Justice Campbell's paper on, " The Ethnology of India," with
Appendices 15 and F, in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. XXXV, Part II, • , Supplementary Number, of 1866.
3., John Beames's "Outlines of Indian Philology" — Wyman Brothers,
Calcutta, 1867.
4. Sir W. W. Hunter's " Comparative Dictionary of the Non-Aryan
Languages of India and High Asia " — Trubner and Co. London, 1868.
5. Col. E. T. Dalton's " Descriptive Ethnology of Bengal," 1872,
6. Rev. J. C. Whitley's " A Mundari Primer" — Bengal Secretariat Press,
Calcutta, 1873.
7. Sir George Campbell's " Specimens of Languages of India" — Bengal
Secretariat Press, Calcutta, 1874.
8. Rev. J. De Smet's " Rudiments of a Mundari Grammar " — Catholic
Orphan Press, Calcutta, 1891.
9. F. Max Miiller's " The Science of Language " — Longmans, Green &
Co., London, 1899.
10. Rev. J. Hoffman's " Mundari Grammar " — Bengal Secretariat Press,
Calcutta, 1903.
11. Rev. A. Nottrott's "Grammar of the Kol Language" — G. E. L.
Mission Press, Ranchi, 3905.
»
12. Dr. G. A. Grierson's " Linguistic Survey of India," Vol. IV, Introduc-
tion, and Parti — Supdt., Govt. Printing, Calcutta, 1906.
13. Rev. J. Hoffman's '' A Mundari Grammar with Exercises " — Catholic
Orphan Press, Calcutta, 1909.
14. Mr. L. S. S. O'Malley's " ttinghbhum, Seraikela and Kharsawan
Gazetteer," Vol. XX, Bengal District Gazetteers, Bengal Secretariat Book Depot, Calcutta, 1910.
TABLE OP CONTENTS.
PARA.
Chapter I. ... Introduction ... ... 1 to ,4
Quantities of Vowels ... ... 5 „ 7
Quantities of Consonants ...* ... 8 &
Chocked Vowels ... ... 10
Chiipti-r PI. .. Gender ... ... ... 11 & 12
Number ... ... ... 13 to 15
' Case ... ... ... 16
Chapter ITT. ... Added Postpositions, Simple and
Compound ... ... 17
Chapter IV. ... Declension of Nouns ... ... 18 & 19
Chapter V. ... Adjectives and their Comparison ... 20 to 25«
Chapter VI. ... Personal Pronouns ... ... 26 „ 30
Neuter Pronouns ... ... 31
Demonstrative Pronouns ... 32 & 33
Interrogative Pronouns ... ... 34
Indefinite Pronouns ... ... 35
Possessive Pronouns ... ... 36 to 40
Other Pronouns ... ... 41 & 42
Chapter VII. ... Tense Suffixes ... ... 43 to 45
Pronominal Subject-Signs ... 46
Direct and Indirect Object-Signs. ... 47
Chapter VIII. ... Present Tense, Indicative Mood, of
Transitive Verbs ... ... 48 to 50
> Imperfect Tense, Indicative Mood, of
Transitive Verbs ... 51
Examples on the Present and
Imperfect Tenses ... '52
Future Tense with Examples ... 53 to 56
Chapter IX. ... Perfect Tense with Examples ... 57 „ 5<j
Past Tense with Examples ... 60 „ 6^
Pluperfect Tense with Examples ... 64 & 65
VI
PARA. Chapter X. ... Conjugation of Indicative Mood of
Intransitive Verbs ... 66
Difference between Transitive and
Intransitive Verbs ... 67 to 69
Use of the verb dai — to be able ... 70
Use of the Imperfect Auxiliary ... 71
Examples on Chapter X ... 72
'Chapter XL ... Subjunctive M(ood ... ... 73
Conditional Mood ... ... 74 to 76
Examples on Subjunctive and
Conditional Moods ,f. « 77
Chapter XII. ... Imperative Mood ... ... 78
Prohibitions... ... ... 79
Invitations ... ... ... 80
Negations ... ... ... 81
Interrogations ... ... 82
Examples on Chapter XII. ... 83
Chapter XIII. ... Participial Forms ... ... 84
Participial Adjectives ... ... 85 & 86
Participial Nouns ... ... 87 to 90
Conjunctive Participles ... ... 91
Chapter XIV. ... Passive Voice with Examples ... 92
Chapter XV. ... Reflexive Verbs ... ... 93 & 94
Reciprocal Verbs ... ... 95 & 9g
Chapter XVI. ... Irregular Verbs— A and Mend ... 97 to 99
Bano ... ... 100
Men and Metd ... 101
Holdo ... ... 102
Kd ... ... 103
t
Chapter XVII. ... Impersonal Verbs with Examples ... 10k to 106
Chapter XVIII. ... Compound Verbs with Examples ... 107,, 110
Chapter XIX. ... Cardinal Numerals ... ... Ill & 112
Ordinal Numerals ... ... 113
Proportional Numerals ... ... 114
Distributive Numerals ... ... 115
Fractional Numerals ... ... 116
Approximations ... •••
Vll
PARA.
('li:i|)t.-r XX. ... Chronology ... ... 118
Months of the Year ... ... 119 & 120
Days of the Week ... ... 121 <fc 122
Parts of the Day ... ... 123
Coins, Weights and Measures ... 124
Points of the Compass ... ... 125
•
Chapter XXI. ... Separate Postpositions ... ... 126
>
Chapter XXIT. ... Adverbs of Tim* and Place ... 127
Adverbs of Manner ... ... 128
Chapter X.XIII. ... Conjunctions ... ... 129
Interjections... ... ... 130
Miscellaneous Particles ... ... 131
Chapter XXIV. ... Terms of Relationship ... ... 133 to 135
Caste and Tribal Names ... ... 136
Short Pieces for Translation.
English — Ho Vocabulary •
Ho — English Vocabulary
Index.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTION AND QUANTITIES OF VOWULB AND CONSONANTS.
Arc.. riling to Hunter, many of the non-Aryan peoples of India take their tribal designations from their respective words for " man " and, aiming these. //<> is OIK- of the- oldest and most widely spread roots having that in. -aning. At the Census of 11)01, the number of people speaking the llo language \vas returned at 371,860. Five years later, Dr.* (iri'-r.-on estimated the number at' 383,120, and the Census of 1911 showed 420,000. Excluding about 12,000 who have emigrated to Assam and otlW parts as labourers, all these people live in the district of Singhbhnm and in the neighbouring Native States, of which Gangpur «fnd Mourbhanj contain the largest numbers. The habitat of the Hos is, however, the Kolhan Government Estate situated in the south-west of the district of Singhbhum. They are, together with the Mundas of the Hanchi district and the Santals of the Santal Parganas. the principal survivors of an originally compact race of aboriginals which, according to history and tradition, supplied the earliest settlers in the Gangetic« Valley. Compared with the prehistoric tenure of these Kols, as they are commonly called, the Aryan Hindus are intruders of last month, the Mahomedans of last week, and the British of yesterday. The word " Kol " is now a generic term applied to all the aboriginal tribes of Chota Nagpur, including the Uraons, whose language is Dravidian though they belong to the same ethnic stock, and it is impossible to say to which tribe or tribes it should properly be applied. Its origin has been variously derived from the root ho — the phonetic change from h to k being very common — and the generic suffix li seen in words like Santali and Bengali ; from the Santali hdr — a man ; from the Sanskrit kola — a pig; from the Kanarese kallar—o. thief ; and from the ordinary Hindi kuli — a bearer of burdens. Sir George Campbell had " little doubt " that the latter deri- vation was correct, but Ur. Grierson does not so much as mention it, and it would be idle to speculate between the several alternatives *when such an authority as the latter has said that " we do not know anything really certain about the original meaning of the word." The empire of this primitive race was broken up by the Aryan advance and traces of it may be found in Assam and even in Burma. The main body concentrated on the Chota Nagpur plateau, however, and there found a more or less secure asylum to which other aboriginal tribes subsequently resorted. A portion of the race then moved southward from the higher steppes of the plateau, and eventually established itself in what is now known as the Kolhan after driving out the Bhuias and Jains, who were the first settlers. This
« ( 2 )
offshoot has retained its hold on the same tract of country ever since and is the Ho tribe of to-day. At first, they were nominally subject to the Singh Rajas of Singhbhum and, though they were in fact independent, it was in connection with tho claims to suzerainty urged by these Rajas that the Hos first came into contact with the British. Three attempts to subjugate them had been made previously by various Hindu chiefs, but the Hos had not only repulsed these invasions, but had also pursued a vigorous policy of reprisal on all sides. British expeditions in 1819 and J.821 were more or less successful, but they could not bo followed up owing to more important concern? elsewhere, and the Hos openly dis- regarded their engagements to pay tribute to the Hindu chiefs. They were always in demand where fighting was to be done and we*e never backward in responding to such demands, thus«amply justifying The name of Larkd or fighting Kols which has apparently always been attached to them by foreigners. They naturally took a hand in the Munda insurrec- tion of 1831, and this led to their ultimate subjugation in 1836-37. It was recognised, however, that they could not be forced to submit to the Hindu Rajas and they were therefore brought under the immediate control . of British officers whose administration was based on the indigenous system of village communities under hereditary headmen. That system is still in force and the rules framed in 1837 for the administration of civil justice are still applied every day. The rebellion of the Raja of Porahat during the Mutiny affected a considerable section of the Hos living on the borders of his State — the last remnant of fidelity to a quondam suzerain — but they were easily subdued and have given no trouble since. The Raja did indeed attempt to tamper with the Hos in the Kolhan proper. When the mutinous sepoys looted the Treasury, it so happened that there was no British officer at Chaibassa. Pending the arrival of Capt. Birch, how- ever, certain loyal Mankis took charge of all Government property in Chaibassa, and it was one of these men who brought Capt. Birch the arrow that was being circulated amongst the Hos as a call to arms by the Raja's agents. Capt. Birch summoned all the Mankis and, by firm and tactful treatment of the situation, regained the waverers and prevented any general outbreak. Cut off from the surrounding Aryans by "radical differences in race, religion and habits of life, the Hos had, even before the advent of the British, always abstained as far as possible from any intercourse with them. Since they have come under British protection, the tide of Aryan aggression, whether mercantile or territorial, which has been responsible au fond for almost all aboriginal risings, has been kept 'back, and the natural inclinations of the Hos towards exclusiveness have been sedulously fostered. They have thus advanced from barbarism to comparative civilization under more favourable conditions than their
( 3 ) •
•intes of Chota Nagpur. Their progress has not linen retarded by the disturbing element of a prejudiced foreign domination in the most ordinary occupations of life, nor have they, a* a whole, come into close contact in other respects with the Aryan races. This, while it has probably resulted in the intellectual backwardness evidenced by an obtuseness that is often extremely irritating, has also preserved certain moral qualities, such as independence of character and a strong sense of sell'-iv^pect, which appeal peculiarly to the British imagination. As communications improve and mutual enlightenment progresses, this polic/ of isolation is, however, becoming not only more anachronistic, but also more difficult to enforce in practice. It must in all probability be aban- doned eventually, but it may be possible to maintain it long enough to enable education to perform For the Hos the same service as the hard hi-hool of experience has rendered to the Mundas and the Uraons of the Ranchi district who are now able to hold their own with the more advanced Aryan races. Meanwhile, as the Census figures show, the Hos are far from being a dying race and, as the number speaking Ho only falls short of the total number in the tribe by less than two thousand, it is evident that there is no immediate danger of their language, disappearing.
2. The language spoken by the Hos is a Munda or Kolarian dialect to which Mundari and Santali are nearly allied. The use of the word " Kolarian " in this connection is objected to by scientific writers, such as Miiller and Grierson, who prefer, and employ, the word " Munda." The former is perhaps too wide because the Dravidian Uraons are included among the Kols, but the latter is certainly too narrow because the Mundas are only one among several tribes using these dialects. The words in every language are made up of roots expressive of primary ideas, and inflections used with those roots to indicate various modifying rela- tionships. The degree of cohesion between these two components, known also as predicative and demonstrative roots or radical and formal elements, varies from mere juxtaposition to complete amalgamation, and is the basis on wlych languages are classified for the purposes of comparative philo- logy. In the earliest stage, known variously as the Radical or Isolating Stage, the inflections are themselves roots capable of being used as independent words, and undergoing no phonetic change when joined to other roots to effect modifications of the primary ideas expressed by such roots. The inflections are either prefixed or affixed to the root and may bear a different meaning from that which they have when used alone , although no alteration takes place in their form. The Chinese language is still in this stage and is, as Max Miiller puts it, language comme il faut.
. ( 4 )
The next step, known as the Agglutinative or Terminational Stage, occurs when the inflections have lost their meaning as separate words b*y a process which is known as ': phonetic decay." The roots are still complete words to which the inflections are agglutinated in order to express modifications of the primary ideas such as are signified, for example, by our declensions and conjugations. The root and its several inflections can, however, be readily distinguished and the whole word reduced to its component parts at a glance. The Turkish language te agglutinative, and so also are most of the Austro-Asiatic family of languages of which the Munda or rlolarian group is a member. The Organic or Inflectional Stage is reached when, by a further process of phonetic decay, inflections have not only lost their original forms as separate words, but have become so completely incorporated ^vith the root which they modify as to be no longer capable of identification and separa* tion into their original forms except by skilled philological analysis. In the more advanced languages of this stage, the laws governing phonetic changes in the interests of euphony are in full operation and affect both the primary root and the secondary inflection. All trace of the inflection .is gradually lost, and with it goes the modification of sense effected by it, until eventually additional roots have to be utilised to retain these modi- fications, the most advanced languages being thus made to resemble those
7 O O O
in the earliest stage of development. Examples of organic languages are Greek, Latin, Bengali, Hindi and English.
3. It would be beyond the scope of this work to attempt to catalogue the principal characteristics of each of the three morphological classes into which languages are divided. This would in fact be impracticable because there is no definite line of demarcation between one stage and another, and because the characteristics of two languages in the same stage may differ widely according as they approximate to an earlier or a later stage of development. The most that could be done in any case is to give the characteristics of the various language families in each stage, but, for present purposes, we need only consider the Munda or Kolarian group of the Austro-Asiatic family. As already stated, this group belongs tto the agglutinative stage, and it may be added that it is nearer the isolating than the organic stage. Its principal characteristics are : —
(I) Unchangeable primary roots, generally monosyllabic, which can be used as nouns, verbs or adjectives.
• (II) The modification of these roots by constant inflections or
secondary roots, many of which have lost the power of separate existence, the various relationships thus expressed
( 5 )
equivalent to those signified bv the declensions and conjugations of more advanced hin^ua-
(III) Three nuinhers — singular, dual and plural — and a distinction
between animate beings and inanimate objects correspond- ing to, hut not coinciding with, the gender of organic languages.
(IV) Two forms for personal pronouns — foil and shortened or
separate and snffixeoj — each of which is used in accordance with definite rules.
'(V) Two further forms for the first personal pronouns, one of which includes, while the other excludes, the person addressed.
(VI) Absence of relative pronouns, accompanied by extensive use of participial forms.
(VII) Expression of direct and indirect objects by pronominal signs which are infixed in the verb.
(VIII) Use of postpositions instead of prepositions to indicate rela- tions of time and space.
(IX) Comparative inaction of the laws of euphony which, in any case, only affect the inflections or secondary roots and leave the primary roots intact.
•4. As adults can seldom catch sounds by the ear alone, experts are agreed^that, in studying a living language, the initial step is to determine familiar phonetic signs which will represent accurately and invariably the different sounds of that language. In the case of an unwritten language such as Ho, it is not a question of finding Roman equivalents for existing characters, but literally one of representing sounds by familiar Roman letters. It does not really matter very much what system is adopted for this purpose, as long as it correctly represents the original sounds and is consistently used. All officials will approach Ho rid the departmental vernacular examinations, and to them the method of spelling adopted in this work will present no difficulties. As regards others, the following notes on the quantities of vowels and consonants will help them to pronounce, with a fair degree of accuracy, Ho words seen for the first time in Roman characters, and will also enable them to reduce to familiar letters similar words heard for the first time in conversation. It is, I am aware, dangerous to dogmatise about the quantities of vowels and consonants without some knowledge of
( 6 )
phonetics which teach one, not only how to pronounce, but also to Ifear accurately, and record correctly, what is spoken in an unknown language. Such knowledge cannot, however, be acquired readily, and I do not expect therefore to be able to give anything more than an imperfect practical guide to the sounds heard in the Ho language. It is besides evident that, in the matter of phonetic pronunciation, there is considerable latitude for personal opinion between, on the one hand, the extreme of over-elaboration involving possible confusion and unnecessary labour, and, on the other, that of excessive simplicity incurring a risk of inadequacy. The Ho language will not be studied for literary purposes and, so far as speaking is concerned, teaching by a Ho is so infinitely more effective tha^t there is nothing to be gained by a complicated system of notation in, a grammar.
5. There are six simple Vowel sounds in Ho which may be re- presented by the letters a, a, e, i, o, and u.
A is equivalent to the sound of " a " in " rural ", and occurs in ape — three, hambal — heavy, and tasad — grass.
• A equals the " a " in " father," and occurs in dji — elder sister,
Idndd — to laugh, and bd — a flower. This is the only vowel that need be inflected in representing the vowel sounds of the Ho language.
E equals the " e " in " grey ", and occurs in engd — mother, sen or seno — to go, and hende — black.
/ equals the " i " in ;: police ", and occurs in ir — to reap, lijd — cloth, and giti — to sleep. It is perhaps open to question whether a shorter sound equal to the " i " in u in " does not rfccur in some words such as iril — eight, and ginil — a wall, but I think that the longer one is the proper sound in all such words. The first " i " in ini — that person, and in ir — to rub, is certain- ly short, but this is exceptional and the sound is too rare to
justify the adoption of a separate sign to represent it,
i 0 equals the "o" in " no ", and occurs in ondo — and, lolo — hot,
and bo — the head.
V equals the " u " in " rule ", and occurs in ub — hair, sukuri — a pig, and busu — straw.
6. Besides these simple sounds, there are certain other vowel sounds which may be represented by combined Roman vowels or diphthongs. According to Hoffman, though any two vowels may stand side by side in Mundari, each retains its original sound, fusion of two vowels into a new
( 7 )
soun 1 never occurring. Such fusion doos occur in I ID, MI- rather, to jmt the matter in :i logical manner, there aro vowel sounds in the I ID language which cannot be represented \>y any of tlie six simple vowel equivalent! nor by any two of them pronounced separately.
,!/ eijtials the " ai " in "aisle", and occurs in ainl —evening, / lift
— to work, and sadai — common.
*
An equals the " ou " in " out ", and occurs in ami — not yet, Liulnin — to be in a hurry, and bauu — elder brother.
Oi equals the " oy " in " oyster", and occurs in oidr — to swim, hoio — the wind, and moi — to bud.
7. All other complex vowel sounds can be split up into single vowels and represented by the appropriate Roman equivalents. There is no necessity to employ a diaeresis to indicate that such equivalents are to be pronounced with separate efforts of the voice because all combinations other than ou, an, and oi must be so pronounced. Examples are der — to precede, aed — seven, 2(i — yes, oe — a bird, od — a house, tumid — six, did — a lamp, kuam — the chest, ked — to call, and meang — the day after tomorrow. It will thus be seen that the law of harmony of vowels, which operates so strongly in English, is not of any great importance in Ho. Euphonic elisions do occur occasionally, but, as already explained, the idiom of an agglutinative language requires that secondary roots acting, for example, the part of case and tense-suffixes shall not in any way affect the primary root; and when an agglutinative language is but little removed, as Ho is, from the isolating stage, the primary roots do not act phonetically on the secondary roots either to any extent.
8. Turning to the Consonants, the sounds ordinarily represented by the Roman letters c, f, q, v, w, x, y and z, either do not exist or are adequately represented by other consonants. Thus, s represents the sound of " c" in " cistern," and k that of " c " in " cold ". Ch — pronounced as in " chimney " — is, however, common, but the " ch " in " chord "'must be rendered by k. According to the ordinarily accepted system of translit- eration, " f " must always be rendered by ph. The sound does not, however, exist in proper Ho words, and, in such Hindi words as have been adopted into the language, the aspirate has been dropped, e. <i. pliaujddri — criminal, and phursat — leisure, become in Ho paujddri and pursat respectively. The nearest approach to the sound of " x " in " box " is represented by the ks in the Hindi loan-word mtksdn — to destroy. The sound does not exist in any indigenous word so far as I know, nor do those indicated by " v ", " w " and " z ". A sound similar to the familiar
( 8 )
"y " does undoubtedly oxist in many Ho words. Whitley uses it in. the spelling of all Mundari words where the sound can be traced, e. g. he writes dyub — evening, deyd — the back, diyd — a lamp, lioyo — the wind, and tuyu — a jackal. Hoffman says that " y " is rare, but adds that it is used instead of " e " where the latter occurs between two vowels. He cites loyonq (Mundari for ' a rice field ') as an example, but at page 34 of his «" Mundari Grammar with Exercises — Part I " he renders the same word loeony, and he spells all the examples given above without the " y".
* DeSmet has no rule on the subject, but generally omits the " y " except in the Mundari word for the numeral " one " which he spells both moiad and moyad. This example shows clearly that, if oi is pronounced as in para. 6 above, both renderings will be spoken alike. Tn the samo way, the "y" sound in other words may be represented by the conjunction of two vowels. For example, both Hoffman and DeSmet write tuiu (a jackal) and not tuyu. There is no Ho word beginning with the sound of " y " and this makes it certain that the sound is foreign to Ho except in so far as it is caused by the conjunction of two or more vowels. I have there- fore refrained from using the consonant " y " at all and experience will, I
' think, show the reader that perfectly correct pronunciations of the following examples are obtained by spelling them as I have done, and as both Hoffman and DeSmet do in several instances : — aiub — evening, did — a lamp, doed — the back, hoio — the wind, moid — five, maiom — blood, meang — the day after tomorrow, sded — to breathe, taiom — after, and tuiu — a jackal. This method of spelling results in vowels coming together in a manner which would be repugnant to organic languages, but which, as explained in para. 7, is natural in an agglutinative language.
9. All the other English consonants occur and do not call for any special mention except in the following cases : —
D and t without any diacritical marks are pure dentals, and occur in dub — to sit, idi — to take, teng — to weave, and giti — to
sleep.
•
J? and t are cerebrals, and occur in dudi — a bridge, hende — black, tote — to shoot, andjete — sunshine. This distinction should be carefully attended to from the beginning as it may sometimes make all the difference in the meaning of a sentence, e.g. med— -the eye, and med — iron, seta — a dog, and seta — morning.
G always represents the " g " in " gate ", and occurs in geled — ten, sengel — fire, and idang — dawn. The sound of " g " in " gem " is represented by ;' as in jodr — to greet.
( 9 )
// i< sounded ut the be^innin^ of Ho words, r. </. her (to sow) :md not , •/-. /il.sl (twenty) and not /.-•/', hut not in tho middle, ,-../. /'/ (u feather) and not /A/7. Such words as <///-///('/>///• (west; and MiiAorrf (to journey) are obviotu compounds, tin- element- of which must retain their original form. Similarly, loan-words taken from other vernaculars retain the initial " h ", Imt drop the one in the middle, e.<j. lu'ijir — to be present, and ImLinn — to order, but kdn'i — a story, and mdri<i—a. water-course, instead of the Hindi forms k<i/i<ini and nin/turid. This applies to the* aspirate standing by itselt. When compounded with another consonant, it is, with one exception, dropped in loan-words, e.;/. ij/Ktr becomes ijdr — to take evidence, phaujddri becomes IKinjddri — criminal, thik becomes tik — proper, and ndlisli becomes ndlis — to bring a case. The single exception is ch pronounced as in para. 8, the sound of which occurs both in indigenous and exotic words, e.g. chanab — the end, cJiauli — rice, kecho — tiles, and pichd — to follow.
N may be noticed in connection with a common diacritical sign, the effect of which is exactly the same as that of the Bengali chandrabindu, i.e., the preceding vowel is strongly nasalized. Thus, dyr — a yoke, pena'm — a weaver, and rdrisd — to rejoice.
l\ — the cerebral ' r ' does not occur in Ho and is elided from all Mundari words in their Ho form. Thus, horo becomes ho — a man, ord becomes od — a house, and a rand i becomes dandi — to marry. The ordinary ' r ' is retained, however, as in diri — a stone, herel — a husband, and uri — cattle.
10. The checked vowels common to all Kolarian languages are thus described by Hoffman : " The pronunciation of a vowel, commenced in the ordinary way, is suddenly checked by a rapid partial contraction of the muscles used in its formation, and then, by a relaxation of those muscles, the breath or sound is allowed to flow out without receiving any furthot modulation. This process gives to the vowel the soun^ of two vowels of which the first is very distinct, smart and short, whereas the second sounds somewhat like a slight short echo of the first." These checked vowels undoubtedly occur in Ho, and the question is whether a distinct diacritical mark should bo adopted to indicate them. Whitley, DeSmet and Hoffman each uses a different sign for this purpose, but they are not consistent in its application, and it seems to me that, in a usage of ' this sort, which is not regulated by ascertained rules, and which is in fact applied arbitrarily by the people themsolvo.s, it is bolter to do without any
• ( 10 )
diacritical sign. In words, such as huju (to come) and da (water), which are in every-day use, this peculiar pronunciation will be readily acquired by the student, but further progress can only be made very gradually, and the use of a diacritical sign will, if he pays any attention to it, only make the beginner's difficulties more acute without being of any real assistance to him. I may add that I never paid much attention to
these checked vowels, except in the commonest words, and that I had no
•
difficulty in making myself understood. Nor have I ever met anybody knowing either Mundari or Ho whose practice and experience were not the same. The only cases in which* the matter is really of practical importance occur in the spelling of words which differ entirely in meaning, but only slightly in sound, according as a checked vowel is used or not. For example, rd pronounced ordinarily means "to* untie", but pronounced with the vowel checked as described above, it means " tt> cry ". In all such cases, the difficulty may be circumvented by spelling the checked vowel phonetically, the word meaning " to cry " being rendered rda. Further examples are d (the mouth) and da (to release), bau (to mould) and bauu (elder brother), uru (a beetle) and uruu (to • remember).
CHAPTER II.
GENDER, NUMBER AND CASE.
11. In Ho, the ordinary grammatical distinction between Genders is replaced by the distinction between Animate and Inanimate Objects. The fact that any particular noun denotes a male or a female being does not affect the construction of a sentence, but the question whether it denotes an animate or inanimate object is of material importance in that connection. As a rule, the same word expresses both the masculine and the feminine, as, e.g. sddom meaning either a stallion or a mare, sim either a cock or a hen, and kuld either a tiger or a tigress ; but, if an explicit designation of sex is desired, this can be secured by prefixing the words sdndi and engd, as, e.g. sdndi sim (a cock) and engd sim (a fowl). Sometimes the feminine form is indicated by a separate word, as, e.g. Mrd (a bullock) and gundi (a cow). Again, the words ho and kod (masculine) and era and kui (feminine) are used sometimes to indicate the sex of animate beings, as, e.g. ddsi ho (a male servant) and ddsi era (a
( 11 )
servant), AW Aon (a son) and kuili»n (a daughter^. The masculine and feminine forms for the common animals are as follows : —
A dog A cat A goat
MASCULINE. sdndi seta sand i bil<ii (or) pusi
FBHININR. ... enyd Sftd.
. . . 1'ni/d I'i/'ii (or) putt.
A sheep ,
i
•
A buffalo
A buffalo calf., A cow calf A capon
A pig
baidd merom (castrated) ... paled merom (one that has
not had kids.)
bodd merom (uncastrated)... engd merom. rudd merom ( „ )...
baidd mindi (castrated) ... pated mindi (as above).
rudd mindi ) ., , . ,.
> (uncastrated) enya mindi.
yorrd mindi * sdndi kerd
sdndi kerd hon ddmkom miu yaid sim
baidd sukuri (castrated)
enyd kerd (or) bitkil. nauki kerd (one that has not calved). enyd kerd lion.
petan miu.
kdluti sim (one that has not laid eggs).
kdluti sukuri (one that has not farrowed). engd sukuri.
The 'only other words denoting sex are the various terms of rela- tionship which will be dealt with later (Vide Chap. XXIV).
12. The distinction between animate and inanimate objects regulates the use of Number in nouns, pronouns and verbs. " Animate" is not synonymous with " living " because it only covers animal and intellectual, and not natural, life. Thus trees, flowers and plants are treated as inani- mate. Nor does it exclude all " neuter " nouns, because celestial bodies, such as the sun, moon and stars, and natural phenomena, such as lightning, rain and wind, are classed as animate objects.
13. There are three Numbers in Ho — the Singular, the Dual and the Plural. The Singular is always the original root, to which the • suffixes kiny and ko are added to form the Dual and Plural respectively. This only takes place in the case of nouns denoting animate objects. E.y. ko — a man, liokiny — two men, lioko — three or more men ; ipd — a star,
( 12 )
ipilking — two stars, ipilko — three or more stars ; but ddru — one or more trees according to the context.
Note— Nouns denoting family relations insert te before the Dual and Plural suffixes, e.g. misi — a younger sister, misiteking — two younger sisters, misteko — younger sisters.
14. The dual and plural suffixes may only be used with inanimate * nouns when it is desired especially to emphasise the number of objects
indicated. This is, however, uncommon and the form of the verb is not in any event affected. In Mundari, the plural suffix is used in enumera- tions of inanimate objects, as, e.g. Bulungko tamdkuko ad chauliko kiringeme. — Buy salt, tobacco and rice. This usage is permissible in Ho, but is not usual, the common form for the same sentence being either Bulung, sukul ondo chauli kiringeme or Bulling, sukul, chauliko kiringeme.
15. Apart from the use implied by its meaning, the Dual Number is employed as a general sign of respect among the Hos. I believe that its use was originally confined to the father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, sister-in-law (husband's elder sister or younger brother's wife), and brother-in-law (husband's elder brother or younger sister's husband), but it is now used in addressing, in the presence of others, any relative to whom it is desired to show respect, e.g. a wife or a mother. Outside relatives, the dual is also employed, as an acquired usage, to express respect among the Hos themselves. A Ho will address any European of position in the second person singular with the addition of Gomke (master), but will usually, though not necessarily, address a clerk in the dual it' the latter is a Ho. If he is a Mahomedan or a Hindu, he will be addressed in the singular. The only Indians whom a Ho will address as Gomke are those whom he is actually serving.
16. The Case-suffixes of organic languages such as Latin do not exist in Ho, but the same relations between words are obtained bv the use oE compounds consisting of the root and an added postposition. The effect of these postpositions is to produce forms which are in all essentials' the equivalents of organic cases, and which can therefore be used in the declension of nouns.
( 13 ) CHAPTER III.
ADDED POSTPOSITIONS — SIMPLE AND COMPOUND.
17. Postpositions are for all practical purposes the same as preposi- tions, the only difference being, as is implied by their name, that they are phuvd after the word they are USIM! with. Tim [.resent chapter treaty only of those postpositions which are joined to the preceding word so as to form a new compound with a distinct moaning, i. e. which perform the * function of declensional inflections.
SIMPLE POSTPOSITIONS.
>
(i) A — is one of the Genitive Case signs and indicates either the Possessive or the Partitive Genitive, i. e. a relation either of ownership or of component parts. Pdtord hon — Pa tor's son. Kdnded od — Kande's house. Bdyx/id ti — Bagun's hand. Meromd ub — The goat's hair. Ddrud sakam — The leaves of the tree.
Note — The partitive relationship may also be expressed without the use of this postposition. Thus, in the last two examples, Merom ub and Ddru sakam would be equally correct, as would Ddrured sakam (see asii below) also.
(it) Re — is the Locative of Rest indicating primarily the place or time at which something occurs. Its meaning must not, however, be restricted to the equivalent of the English " in ".
Ne hdture Mundd tainde — The Munda lives in this village. , Ape chdndure Somd rudde — Soma will return In three
months. Sddomte komoro ememe — Put the blanket on the horse.
(6) Re is also used to signify price and is then equivalent to " for ".
Jdi tdkdre moi pati chaitlhn tidnied — For one rupee you will get ten seers (one pati equals two seers) of rice.
Bar fikire ne lijde klringkedd — He bought this cloth for eight annas (one siki equals four annas).
(tit) Td and Pd — are also Locatives of Rest indicating the place where something occurs, but are rarely found in their simple forms. Td denotes the exact spot, while pd indicates proxi- mity generally and is comparatively indefinite.
Ale bdndd baikedtd kuld gititande — The tiger is sleeping
where we made the bdndh.
i
Aivd od Dongolpd mend — My house is in the vicinity of Chaibassa.
Note — In both these sentences, the compound postpositions tare and pare (see below) would have beeii equally correct and would be more generally employed.
(iv) Te — is the Locative of Motion and indicates motion towards a particular point.
Aind lijdred-odte ne did idieme — Take this lamp to my tent.
Marang Gomke Chakdte holde senoeand — The Deputy Com- missioner (literally, " the big master ") went to Chakarda- pore yesterday.
(b) Te is also the Instrumental Case sign and indicates the agency or means by, with or through, which any act is done. When the agent is a human being, the separate postposition hordte is used. (Vide Chap. XXI).
Relte ondo dongdte kuliko Asdmteko senod — Coolies go to Assam by rail and by boat.
Tite Hoko mdndiko jomed — The Hos eat cooked rice with their hands.
Kdldte urue tegdgoekid — He crushed the beetle with his foot. « t
Urihote ne disumrenko sied — The inhabitants of this country
plough with cattle.
\ " Hdsutee rdatand — He is crying on account of the pain.
•
(c) Te is further used to signify price in the same way as re. It is really more logical to use te than re in this connec- tion because, if the relationship between the words is analysed, it will be found to be nothing more than the instrumental.
Moi tdkdtt Ddso ndmd mine kiringkid — Daso bought a new calf for five rupees.
( 15 )
(w) Lo — does not correspond to any caso sign. It denotes associa- tion or combination either at rest or in motion and is used with animate nouns only.
Mnktd Pdsingloe hujulend — Mukta came with Pasing. Ainglo netdre tainmd — Remain with mo in this place.
COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS.
(<•/) Ete — is the Ahlative Case sign and indicates motion away from
a definite place.
*
Tamdreteng hujuakand — I have come from Tamar.
» Kerdko pieteko adeand — The buffaloes strayed from the > maidan (pi — either an open plain or high-lying terraced o cultivation).
(6) Used in relation to time, ete may be translated by " since," « from the time of", " for ".
Jidtdtdete lloko bir aminkete oteko bated — From the time of their ancestors, the Hos have cleared the forest and made cultivated land.
Holdete kding jomtadd — I have not eaten since yesterday.
(c) Ete is also used to express comparison, but this will be dealt with in a subsequent chapter (Vide Chap. V).
(vie) Pdre — is the Locative of Rest like re, but is indefinite as compared with the latter.
Amd hdtu okonpdred — Whereabouts (in what direction) is your village ?
Dongolpdreng taind, mendo odtaing Chakdreo mend — I live somewhere near Ohaibassa, but I also have a house in Chakardapore.
(vm) Pdte — Bears the same relation to te as pdre does to re, i. e. it
, indicates the Indefinite Locative of Motion towards*.
>
Okonpdtee senoeand — In what direction did he go P Birpdtee nireand — He ran towards the forest. (i.«) Pdete — similarly indicates indefinitely motion away from.
Okonpdeteko hujulend — From whereabouts did they come ? -Kavchipdete — From somewhere near Ranchi.
Note — ^s mentioned in sub-head (m) above, td is the definite form of pd. Tdre, tdte and tdete are therefore equivalent
V 16 )
respectively to the simple forms re, te and ete as expressing rest in, motion towards or motion away from, a definite place ; and they are in fact so used occasionally, especially with participial clauses, e.g. Bdbdko iretantdte ainglo hujume — Come with me to the place where they are cutting paddy. Owing pro- ( bably to possible confusion with the forms mentioned
in sub-head (.?) below, tare, tdte and tdete are not, however, used in this sense with single nouns denot- ing space or place.
(#) Tare tdte and tdete — are ordinarily used with precisely Che same connotation as re, te and ete in connection only with nouns and pronouns denoting animate objects. The td seems to be equivalent to the Hindi pas.
Aletdre isu purd bdbd mend — With us there is very much paddy, i.e. We have a great deal of paddy.
Gomketdte ned entorsd idieme — Take this to the master at once.
i Gurucharan Penaintdete mindiking kumbukid. — The two men
* stole a sheep from Gurucharan Tanti.
(6) Tare and tdte are also used to indicate an animate indirect object when the latter is not expressed in the verb, tare being used when motion is not implied. (Vide rule in Note 4 to para. 47). For example, " He gave me medicine " may be translated Aingtdre rede emkedd or aing rede emadingd. This point will be better under- stood after the verb has been studied.
(xi) lien — is the Locative Genitive Case sign used only with nouns denoting animate objects. The relation is one of place so to speak, and the postposition is equivalent to " dwelling in ", t " belonging to ".
. . ' Hdturen ho or hdtureni — A man belonging to the village.
* Gardren hdkuko — Fishes dwelling in the river, i. e. river fish.
(6) Ren may also be rendered by " worth ", " aged ", " measuring ", in connection with animate nouns.
Hisi tdkdren gundi — A cow worth 20 Rs. Turui sirmdren sitid — A child six years old.
Upun mukdren kuld — A tiger measuring six feet (mukd equals half a yard roughly).
(<•) I'm is also equivalent to "the wife of". This is really only a variety of the Locative Genitive, the wife bein^ considered as belonging to the husband.
A/ J>«i-i<ir,n era or Boredreni — This is the wife of Bonn.
) /it -d — forms the Locative Genitive of inanimate nouns only. //.i/ in-, ii mi — Tin- houses of the village. ii,trdr,d (id — The water of the river.
(h) Jted signifies worth, age, dimension and material in relation to inanimate objects.
.]/«'/ tdkdrfd dndu — An anklet worth 5 Rs.
>
/.<n sinndrt-d jojo ddrn — A very old tamarind tree. Munngred hard — A day's journey. Kddsomred pin da — A dhoti made of cotton.
(<•) Red meaning "regarding", " concerning ", "about", is attached both to animate and inanimate nouns in the same form.
Sddomred kdji — A story regarding the horse. Paulusred kitdb — A book about Paulus. Otered darkds — A petition concerning land.
CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
18. With the help of the postpositions dealt with in the preceding chapter, we can now decline Ho nouns y> the manner familiar to those whose knowledge of grammar is based on the forms of organic languages. The number of cases is large, but against this may be set the fact that there is, so to speak, only one declension.
CASES. CASE-SUFFIXES. ANIMATE NOUNS. INANIMATE NOUNS.
Nominative root ... gomke, a (or the) mas- gard, a (or the)
ter ... river. '
Accusative root ... gomke, a master ... gard, a river.
Dative
t root ... gomke
\ fdre, tdte (with gomketdre
animate nouns gomketdte
where indirect
object is not
included in the
verb.)
to a master
GASES.
CASE-SUFFIXES. ANIMATE NOUNS. INANIMATE NOUNS.
Instrumen- te (with animate gomke hordte, by or gardte, by or
tal
nouns other than persons and with a 1 1 inanimate nouns)
through the agency of a master.
through means of a river.
f Definite ete, tdete gomketdete, f r o m a gardete, f r o m a
Ablative.,
master.
river.
* Indefinite pdete gontkepdete, from the gardpdete, from the vicinity of a master. vicinity of a
Genitive.
Possessive a
river.
» •
Partitive o
. gomked, of or belong-
. •
ing to a master. gardd, of or form-
. gomked, of or forming < ing part of a part of a master. river.
, gardren, (animate
Locative ren, red, gomkeren, (the wife) J objects) of a of a master. J river.
gardred, (inani- mate objects) of
Locative of \ Rest (
Definite re, tare... gomketdre, in (with) a master.
a river. gardre, in a river.
Indefinite pare ... gomkepdre, in the vi- gardpdre, in the cinity of a master. vicinity of a
river.
Locative of ( Definite te, tdte... gomketdte,toa.msi9ter, gardte, to a river. Motion ... ( Indefinite pdte ... gomkepdte, to the vici- gardpdte, to the vi-
nity of a master. cinity of a river*
Vocative... ated,ate
ated gomke, 0 master
19. The above is of course only the singular number, but it is un- necessary to decline the dual and plural numbers at length. In the case of animate nouns, the dual and plural signs (king and ko) are added to the roots before the postpositions, the latter remaining precisely the same as in the singular number, e. g. gomkeking, two masters ; gomkekingd, of or belonging to two masters ; gomkekopdete, from the vicinity of three or more masters. In the case of inanimate nouns, the dual and plural numbers are exactly the same as the singular.
CHAPTER V.
ADJECTIVES AND THEIR COMPARISON.
20. There is no Article in Ho. The context must show in each case whether the definite or indefinite article is to be used in translating a Ho sentence into English, e. <i. /«>// gnjotnmie may mean either " a child is dying " or " the child is dying". The numeral miad (one) is often* prefixed to a noun with the force of an indefinite article. This is especially the case in narratives. E. g. Musing betar miad ho (mido) luikend — Once upon a time there was a certain man.
21. > Ho adjectives are invariable, i. e. they are not affected by the gender or num'»er of the noun they qualify. E. g. Bugin dpu — a good father ; bugin engd — a good mother ; bugin engdkodpuko — good fathers and mothers.
22. Most Ho adjectives may without any change of form be used as nouns or verbs, or, to put the matter in its correct sequence, the original root can be used as a verb, noun or adjective without the addi- tion of any secondary root to denote that its meaning has been altered. Thus, hende — to blacken, blackness, and black ; chakad — to deceive, deceit, and deceitful.
JWote — As adjectives are necessarily limited to words denoting qualities, and as the words etkan (bad) and bugin (good) are used so as to embrace most vices and virtues, the operation of this rule is more common as between nouns and verbs, e. g. od — a house, to make a house ; jdrom — an egg, to lay an egg. Other parts of speech may be used as verbs in the same way. Thus, ed (yes) means also " to agree ", j>drom (across) means also " to cross " and der (before) means also " to precede ". This trans- ferability is one of the features of the language and is extremely useful in practice.
23. Adjectives do, however, undergo a change of form softietimes, though such cases must be regarded as exceptional. Thus the suffixes n and an are added to a few verbs and nouns to form adjectives. E. g. etkd (to be bad) becomes etkan (bad) ; gonong (price, value) becomes gonongan (valuable) ; bisi (poison) becomes bisian (poisonous^; and pe (strength) becomes pean (strong).
Rote — A similar n is occasionally used to form nouns from verb roots, the n being inserted after the first vowel which is then repeated. Considering how simple this method is,
( 20 )
it is strange that it is not more resorted to, the expla- nation being probably that the aboriginal mind not only cannot rise to abstractions, but is unable to think even of concrete things apart from the actions which give rise to them. The only common examples of the usage referred to are onol (a writing) from ol (to write) ; handling (a « share) from hating (to divide) ; gonoe (death) from goe
(to kill) ; enete (a beginning) from ete (to begin) ; kenesed (an obstruction) from fcesed (to impede) ; ranakab (a steep slope) from rakab (to climb) ; handrub (a cover) from hdrub (to cover) ; chanab (an end) from chdbd (to finish) ; and randpid Can eyelid) from rapid (to blink). •
24. A large class of words equivalent to English adjectives «?s formed from verb roots by the addition of the tense-suffixes. These are participial forms and will be better understood when that branch of the subject is reached (vide Chap. XIII).
25. The Comparison of Adjectives is effected in a way very similar to that familiar in Hindi. The comparative degree is formed by adding the ablative case-sign ete to the noun with which the comparison is made, and the superlative degree is formed by prefixing the adjective saben (all) to the compound formed by the addition of ete to the object of comparison. In neither case does the adjective take any suffix as in English.
Kuiete ho marangd — A man is bigger than a woman. Kerdete sddom dnjdtee nired — A horse runs faster than a buffalo. En ddruete ned salangid — This tree is higher than that one. . Saben joete uli bugind — The mangoe is the best of all fruits. Sabenkoete Somd Idndidd — Soma is the laziest of all. Sabenete ne kdpi leserd — This axe is the sharpest of all.
CHAPTER VI.
• PRONOUNS.
I— PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
26. All the personal pronouns have two forms which may be called the Full Form and the Shortened Form respectively. Hoffman has an • abstruse discussion as to which of these forms is the original one in Mundari. I do not propose to follow him into the intricacies of the question, because the consideration that seems to me to militate entirely against the conclusion he comes to is the fact that the shortened form is
I 21 )
parasitical and that, whenever the various personal pronouns stand by tlieinselves, the full form must bo used. The question is, however, a more or less academic one and, for all practical purposes, it will suffice to know when each form should be used.
27. Before enumerating these forms for each of the three personal pronouns, it may be as well to explain that the dual and plural numbers of the first personal pronoun are further sub-divided into two distinct forms which may be called the Inclusive and the Exclusive respectively.* It is strange that a primitive language should, in this respect, be more precise than our modern tongues, but the fact remains that the En^li>li pronoun*" wo" takes four distinct forms in Ho. The beginner will be well-advised *o get into the habit early of using these forms instead of the vague " we." They are as follows : —
The Inclusive Dual denotes the speaker and the person addressed, and is equivalent to " thou and I" or "you and 1" according to the form which usage has sanctioned.
The Exclusive Dual denotes the speaker and some third person other . than the person addressed, and is equivalent to " he and I " or " she and I."
The Inclusive Plural denotes the speaker and two or more persons addressed, and is equivalent to "you and I."
The Exclusive Plural denotes the speaker and two or more third prrsons other than the person addressed, and is equivalent to " they and I."
28. The full and shortened forms of the personal pronouns may now be noticed.
Full- Form.
( Indus, alang, thou & I ... abu, you & I. 1st Person ani<i, I {
I Exclus. almif, he or she & I aleftaej & I.
Shortened Form.
SING. DUAL. PLURAL.
Indus, alang, thou & I ... abu, you & I.
if,
• 2nd ,, a in, thou ... al>en, you two ... ape, you.
3rd „ <(/', he or she... aking, they two ...«/•<», they.
f Indus, lam/, thou & I ... bit, you & I. 1st Person ing, I I _, ' , ,., VPTJ iv AT
I Exclus. liny, he or she & I le, they & I.
2nd „ m, em, me, thou ben, you two ... pe, you. 3rd „ i, he or she ... king, they two ... ko, they.
( 22 )
It appears therefore that the shortened Form is obtained by the elision of the initial a from the full form, or, if Hoffman's view is correct, that the full form is obtained by prefixing an a to the shortened form, which, in that event, might properly be called the simple form.
29. The uses of these two forms are most important. The full
form is used (t) when the pronominal subject of a sentence is to be
*emphasised, e. g. in answer to the question Ned okoe rdpudkedd — who
« broke this ? a Ho would say aing rdpudkedding — I broke it, If he was
merely making a statement of fact»in the course of a narrative, he would
say rdpudkedding only (see below under shortened form).
• (ii) Whenever a pronoun is declined, i. e. whenever* it is used
in connection with the added postpositions dealt with in a preceding chapter.
Amtdteng dgued — I will bring it to you.
Aid od hdndiakand — His house has fallen down.
Aletdete jdnd kdam ndmed — You will not get anything from us.
(Hi) When a pronoun stands as an indirect object and is inserted in the verb. In such cases, the full form becomes a suffix, but it is only used as such to avoid confusion with the direct pronominal object for which the shortened form is inserted. The sentence " I will give you a horse" may be translated Amtdte sd doming emid or Am sddowinq emamd. The second rendering illustrates the inserted indirect object and the first the inserted direct object, the indirect object being expressed by the dative case (c./. para. 17 (#) and Note 4 to para. 47).
Note — The above rule only holds good for the present, imperfect and future tenses of the Indicative Mood, and for the Impera- tive, Subjunctive and Conditional Moods.
The shortened form is used (z) when a pronoun stands as the subject of a sentence. The Ho idiom requires that a pronominal subject must be suffixed either to the verb or to the word immediately preceding it, and it is for this purpose that the shortened form is used. E. g. Huju- tanding. — I am coming ; gapding hujud. — I will come tomorrow. The following rules should be noted in this connection : —
(a) The singular of the first personal pronoun contracts to ng after words ending in e. E. g. Dongolteng senotand — I am going to Chaibassa. This is a purely phonetic change, and there is nothing to account for it being limited to this vowel beyond the fact that the law of harmony of vowels
( 23 )
is generally inoperative in agglutinative languages and that any I'vitli-no' of its action imi.-t be regarded as exceptional.
(/>) The singular of the second personal pronoun is regulated by the following considerations : —
(1) The shortened form 7/1 is used when the verb, or the word preceding it, ends in a vowel, its effect being to % alter a long vowel into a short one. E. y. Goletanam — you are whistling ; choiiuin hujnd — when will you *
come ? The vowel does not shorten when the word preceding the verb is the negative kd, nor is the
shortened form of the pronoun used. The compound is always rendered kdant, the second a being pronounced very lightly.
(2) The form em is used when the verb, or the word preceding it, ends in a consonant. E. g. Ne sunvmem lenledd chi — did you press this oil ? As a matter of fact, no part of the verb (except the imperative, regarding which see the next rule) ends in a consonant, so that this rule only refers really to the preceding word as in the example given.
(3) The form me is used with the imperative mood and in the conjugation of the verb mend (to be, to exist) and its antonym bano. E. g. Dubnte — sit down ; mendmed — you are present ; and bangmed — you are absent. (C.f. Chap. XVI.)
(c) The third person singular becomes e when suffixed as a subject. E. g. Hujulende — he came ; sddome kiringkid — he bought a horse.
(a) The second use of the shortened form occurs when a pronoun stands as the direct object of a transitive verb. Such objects "are in- variably inserted in the verb in accordance with rules which vafy with the tenses and will be fully treated later. (Vide Chaps. VII, VIII and IX). For present purposes, it will be sufficient to say that the shortened forms, as given in para. 28, must be used for such insertions, the form for the second person singular being invariably me.
Somd danddtee tdmkedinyd — Soma beat me with a lathi. •
Gapding nelmed — I will see you tomorrow. Aivd sddom sdlime — Hold my horse.
( 24= ;
(m) It follows, from the note under the rule above dealing with the use of the full form for the inserted indirect object, that the shortened form must be used when an indirect pronominal object has to be inserted in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses of the indicative mood. This also will be better understood at a later stage (see Chap. IX) and I will merely add the following examples here.
Sddome emakadingd — He has given me a horse. &ddoming emadmed — I gave you a horse.
30. The full forms of the personal pronouns may be declined in the same way as nouns. One example will suffice.
Nominative ... ... aing, I.
Accusative ... ... aing, me.
( ainqtdre. ) A
Dative .. < • f to me-
I aingtdte. )
Instrumental ... ... aingte, by me.
i ainytdete, from me. Ablative ... ..< .
( ainc/paete, rrom near me.
Genitive ... .. we a, mine.
Locative ... ... ^ ainc/tare, in me.
of Rest ... ... i aitiypdre, in my vicinity.
Locative of ... ... , aingtdte, to me.
Motion ... "'\ aingpdte, to my vicinity.
II— NEUTER PRONOUNS.
31. The neuter or, as he calls it, impersonal, -pronoun in Mundari is, according to Hoffman, d — it, which, as it represents an inanimate object only, does not alter in the dual and plural numbers. It is certain that, when it stands as a direct object to certain tenses of the verb, the suffix-fprm of this pronoun is e, as in ndmeding — I will get it, where " it " is any yianimate object. The only authority I can find for the fbrm d is that it is added to demonstrative, interrogative and other adjectives to form the corresponding pronominal forms for inanimate objects. ( Vide paras. 32, 34 and 35 below).
Ill— DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
32. These pronouns are formed from the demonstrative adjectives ne (this), en (that) and ter (that far away, yonder) by the addition of the shortened personal forms i, king, ko, when animate objects are denoted,
and by (ho addition of the neuter form •< whon inanimate ul>j«-< indicated. Certain euphonic changes occur, but the formation- generally regular.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE.
( Ne, this
i
A'//, that ...
7Vr, thut youder i
Ne, this ...
i
En, that ...
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONODN. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. ,
)ii, this animate being ... niking neko, niku.
nil. fill, that animate being ... inking,
enking enko.
ten, that animate being yonder terking terko.
ned, this thing ... ... ned ' ... ned.
end, that thing... ... end ... end.
7Vr, that yonder terd, that thing youder
terd
terd.
— The forms ten, terking and terko are not in common use. Nor are the animate compounds formed from terlekd in the next paragraph.
The above pronouns may be declined in the same way as nouns and personal pronouns. E. g. Nitdete moi tdkd idierne — Take five rupees from this person.
Inid holong etkdd — That man's flour is bad.
Nedre bdbding ukukedd — I hid the paddy in this (box).
33. .The word lekd (Jike) is very commonly added to the demonstra- tive adjectives to form compounds which are also demonstrative adjectives. Thus we get nelekd (like this), enlekd (like that), and terlekd (like that yonder). By adding the simple personal forms i, king, ko, and the demonstrative pronouns m, niking, neko, we obtain a further useful class of pronouns which Hoffman calls qualificative, and De Smet qualitative, pronouns, but which are really only compound demonstrative pronouns.
SINGULAR. |
DUAL. |
PLURAL. |
|
flilekdi nilekani |
\ an animate being like ) this one |
t niiekdkiiKj \ nilekanking |
nilekdko. ... nilekanko. |
inilckdi inilekani |
}an animate being like that one |
( inilekdking I inilekankiiiy |
I nilekdko. inilekanko. |
terlekdi terlekaiti |
\ an animate being like ) that one yonder |
f terlekdh'uuj \ teriekankiny |
... terlekdko. tt'ilekanko. |
( 26 ) The corresponding inanimate forms are nedlekd, endlekd and terdlekd.
Note — The forms for the compound pronoun give other forms for the demonstrative adjectives, viz, nelekan, enlekan and terlekan, and these are the forms that are commonly employed. Care should be taken to distinguish between Nelekan kdpi — an axe like this, and ne kdpilekd — like this axe.
IV— INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
>
34. The ordinary interrogative pronouns are okoe — who (animate), okond and chikand — what (inanimate) and, less commonly, chilekahd — what sort (inanimate). The adjectival forms are okon, chikan ami chilekan, all used before animate and inanimate nouns alike. •
Okoe ne paitie paitikedd — Who did this work ?
Chikande kdjietand — What is he saying ?
Okon Mankitdeteng dgued — From what Manki shall I bring it ?
Chilekan hoko en hdtureko taind — What sort of men live in that village ?
Note — 7. These pronouns are declinable like the others already dealt with, but it should be noted that the dual and plural forms of the animate interrogative pronoun are okoeteking and okoeteko respectively.
2. In Mundari, the adjective okon is, according to Do Smet, placed before animate nouns only, chikan being used with the same meaning before inanimate nouns. In Ho, okon
O *
and chikan are used indifferently before animate and in- animate nouns. Thus, " what village is this ?" may be translated either Ned okon lidtu or ned chikan hdtu. .«
V— INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
35. Indefinite pronouns are formed from the indefinite adjectives^ (any at all), jdn (any) and eta (other, another) in the same way as demonstrative pronouns are formed from demonstrative adjectives.
ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
f jai, jdige, anyone at all ... joking . . . jdko. Ja, any at all ...< " .
( jad, anything at all ... jaa ... jda.
ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR. DDAL. PLURAL.
f /dni, anyone ... idnkimi ... idnko.
Jan, any ... •?
I /a//a, any thing ... jdnd ... yam!.
f etdi, another one ... etdkint/ ... etdko.
/-,/<«, other, another-;
I c/aa, another thing ... etdd ... etn'i.
» Note — 1. The </,' \\\ jn'ni,' is merely an enclitic.
• 2. ./a/// may take either^a singular or a plural verb, but the
former is more common in Ho. E. g. Jdni hujulende chi — • did anyone come ?
•>'.' There are certain other indefinite adjectives which may be used as indefinite pronouns without the addition of any suffix. E.g. Tdrdmdrd — some ; purd — many, much ; and Imringlekd — some, a few, a little. Their meanings indi- cate that they can only be used as plural pronouns, but, as such, they are common.
Purdko mendkod — Many persons (or any other animate beings) are present.
Huringlekdko niddreko senoeand — A few persons went away in the night.
VI— POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
36. The ordinary possessive pronouns are formed by the genitive case of the personal, demonstrative, interrogative, and indefinite pronouns, e.g.awd — mine, akod — theirs, nikingd — these two's, okoed — whose, and jdnid — anybody's. These forms precede the noun indicating the object possessed and are invariable. E. g. Aivd sddom — my horse, aid od — his house, akod hdture — in their village.
37. Possessive pronouns are also formed by suffixing ta followed by the shortened forms of the personal pronoun to the animate or inani- mate object possessed. These compound forms are very common and are given in full in the table below.
38. When the animate object possessed is a relative, these com- pound forms change somewhat. Instead of tainq, tarn and tae for my, thy, and his or hers, ing, me or m (after a vowel) and te are used. Thus, " my horse " is sddomtaing, but " my father " is dpning ; " his house " is odtae, but " his younger brother " is undite. The changes in the dual and plural numbers will be found below.
39. The three kinds of possessive pronouns referred to in the pre- ceding paragraphs may be grouped as follows to facilitate reference, the object possessed in each case being singular in number.
1st Person
f Singular
f Inclusive , ! Dual \ , •\ I Exclusive
f Inclusive
Plural {„"•,. ^ ( Exclusive ,
f Singular 2nd Person < Dual
I;
{'
Plural Singular
3rd Person ^ Dual (.Plural
FULL FORM |
FORM |
SUFFIX FORM |
PRECEDING |
SUFFIXED |
WHEN OBJECT |
OBJECT |
TO OBJECT POSSESSED IS |
|
POSSESSED. |
POSSESSED |
A RELATIVE. |
. aind |
t aing |
ing. |
. alangd ... |
talang . . . |
talang. |
,. alingd ... |
taling . . . |
ingtaling. |
,. abud |
tabu |
tabu • |
. aled^ ... |
tale |
i'Mgtale. |
. amd |
tarn |
me* m. * |
. abend ... |
taben |
metaben, mtaben. |
. aped |
tape |
metope, mtape. |
,. aid |
tae |
te. |
.. akingd ... |
taking . . . |
tetaking. |
, . akod |
tako |
tetako. |
Note — 1. There is no difficulty about using the above forms when the object or relative possessed is singular, or when the possessor of dual or plural objects or relatives is singular. But when the possessor and the relative possessed are both dual or both plural, or one is dual and the other plural, the Hos avoid the complications of the suffix forms and use the full prefix forms.
Engdingtale — Our mother. A led engdteking — Our two mothers. Undim — Thy younger brother.
Akod unditeko— Their younger brothers.
Akingd unditeking — Their two younger brothers.
Aled uriko Urikotale
Amd uriko Urikotam
Our cattle
cattle
Akingd uriko \ The cattle Urikotaking / of the two.
2. There are a few exceptions to the rule stated in para. 38. Thus, hon (a child"), kodJion (a son) and kuilion (a daughter) may take either of the suffix forms in all persons of the singular number, as, e. g. hontaing or honiny (my child), kodhontam or koahonme (thy son), and kuihontae or kuihonte
( 29 )
(his daughter), /./a ci wife) becomes aivd era in the first person singular and is never , i-<i/>iin:/ or trdtny. The secoml person singular may be (imn < i<i or . . but never eram; and tlio third person singular may be aid erd, ,-i-iitae or erdte. Lastly, housed (a nephew), honerd (a niece), gekod (a nephew) and cjekui (a niece) insert, instead of suffixing, the possessive signs. Thus, honingsed (my nophew), lioinnt'ini (thy niece), geteltod (his nephew) and getekn'dckiny (her two nieces). The subject of this note and the next one are more fully noticed in Chapter XXIV.
» 3. The compounds formed by the addition of the possessive , suffix to nouns indicating family relations. may be declined ., with the usual case-suffixes. Thus, undite (his younger
brother) becomes unditetdte (to his younger brother), imditetdete (from his younger brother), undited (his younger brother's). The dual and plural suffixes are those mentioned in the note to para. 3, viz. teking and teko, and the full declension is therefore nnditeteking (his two younger brothers), uvditeteko (his younger brothers), unditetekopdete (from the vicinity of his younger brothers). As stated in Note 1 above, the dual and plural suffix forms are generally avoided, and this is particularly the case when they have to be declined. For example, " their mothers " is akod engdteko and " from their mothers "is akod engdtekotdete.
4. Juri (a friend) and sdki (a namesake) are treated as terms of relationship by the Hos and take the possessive suffix forms used with relatives. E.g. Jurim (thy friend) and sdkite (his namesake).
40. The word " parents " is expressed in Ho by the compound engd-dpu (literally " mother-father"). When the parents of a single personfare referred to, the dual for nouns indicating relationship is used, but the possessive suffix is inserted after both parts of the compound. E. g. Engding-dpuingtekinci — my parents, engam-dpumteking — thy parents, and engdte-dputeteking — his parents.
(«) When two or more persons with the same parents are alluded to, the prefix possessive forms are used and the ordinary dual suffix is added to the compound.
Alangd engd-dpuking hujuakandking — Our (thy and my) parents have come.
( 30 )
Aped engd-dpuking Dongolreking taikend — Your parents were in Chaibassa.
Akingd engd-dpukinging nelkedkingd — I saw their (of the two) parents.
(lit) When the reference is to the parents of two or more persons who are not brothers and sisters, the prefix possessive forms are used similarly, but the plural suffix is added to the compound.
Abud engd-dpuko bangkod — Our (your and my) parents are not present.
Abend engd-dpuko Asdmteko senoeand — The parents ot you two went to Assam. "
Akod engd-dpuko kuld goekedkode — A tiger killed their parents.
VII—OTHER PRONOUNS.
41. There can be no doubt that the Ho language was originally without either Relative Pronouns or relative clauses, but the influence of other vernaculars may be traced nowadays in the use of the personal and demonstrative pronouns as relatives and correlatives. There are no separate forms for relative pronouns, and they will be more fully noticed in dealing with the original and idiomatic usage which compresses a whole relative clause into a single participial form used either as an adjective or a noun. (Vide Chap. XIII).
42. There are no Reflexive Pronouns either, though the enclitic ge, added to personal pronouns, produces a kind of reflexive pronoun, as e, g. Aingge — I myself, amge — thy thyself, aige — he himself, apettietege — from you yourselves. These are, however, only emphasised forms of the personal pronouns really, the reflexive idea being expressed by insert- ing n and en into the verb. (Vide Chap. XV).
CHAPTER VII.
\
TENSE-SUFFIXES.
43. In dealing with the Munda family of languages in his " Linguistic Survey of India", Dr. Grierson points out that the most that can be said of any word in these languages, of which Ho is one, is that it performs the functions of a noun, adjective or verb, and not that it is a noun, adjective or verb. This is of course true, but, in the absence of any other recognised set of terms, one has to fall back
( 31 ) •
on the grammatical terminology of more advanced languages, and deal with the ivhitionship between words tinder the headings of the commonly- nccepted parts of speech. It has already been noticed (see para. 3 6 ante) tliut, in the case of nouns, compounds can be evolved by the use of postpositions which perform all the functions of case-suffixes and result, when grouped together, in a conventional declension. In the same way, although there is not in Ho any conjugation in the ordinary sen s^ of the term, compounds exist which denote the same relations as the tenses of an organic language, and which may therefore be utilised in* framing a conjugation. '
44. > As stated in para. 21, the original root can be used indifferently as a noun1, adjective or verb. When used as a verb, it is equivalent to the ordinary infinitive mood and is the form in which the meanings of words are expressed in the Vocabulary at the end of this work. This root may be conjugated by the formation of compounds consisting of the root, the tense-suffix and the copula or verbalising agent a. Thus, the present tense of the verb giti (to sleep) is formed by giti (the root) -f tan (the present tense-suffix) -f a (the copula). This form itititand is incomplete l>y itself, but is at once rendered intelligible by the addition of the shortened form of the first personal pronoun as a subject-sign in the manner explained in para. 29. Thus, gititanding — I sleep or am sleeping.
45. The tense-suffixes of the indicative mood, both active and passive, may be grouped as follows. It will be seen that the forms differ somewhat in the case of transitive and intransitive verbs, and the student will find it necessary carefully to distinguish between these two kinds oE verbs, the distinction being quite as important for practical purposes as that between animate and inanimate objects.
TENSE. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE.
!.• Present
2. Imperfect
3. Future
4. Perfect
5. Past
6. Pluperfect
By adding these tense-suffixes to any root we arrive at, what Hoffman calls, the " bare tense-form " which, as will be seen later, is ix complete word in itself capable of being used adjectively or substantively. The
TRANSITIVE |
INTRANSITIVE |
|
tan |
tan |
gtan |
tan taiken ... |
tan taiken ... |
otan taiken. |
— |
— |
o |
akad, tad ... |
akan |
akan |
ked |
ken, can |
ean |
led |
len |
len |
( 32 )
addition of the copula a to the tense-form (in the case of the active future, the copula is added to the root there being no tense-suffix between) verbalises it and only the subject and object signs are wanting to the construction of a complete sentence.
46. It will be remembered (vide para. 29) that, when any personal pronoun is the subject of a sentence, the shortened form is affixed either to the verb or to the word immediately preceding it. In the same ' way, when a noun denoting an animate being stands as the subject of a sentence, the shortened form ?of the third personal pronoun corres- ponding in number with it is added to the word immediately preceding the verb, unless that word happens to be the subject itself, In which case the pronominal subject-sign is added to the verb. E.g.kHujutanding — I am coming, gapding hujud — I will come tomorrow ; and choilam hujud* — when will you come ? illustrate the usage when a personal pronoun is itself the subject, whereas sddom Jwjutande — the horse is coming, ddsi gapde hujud — -the servant will come tomorrow, and kuldkwg Jioldking hujulend — two tigers came yesterday, illustrate the usage when an animate being is the subject.
Note—I. The addition of the pronominal subject-sign, even when the subject is already expressed in the sentence by a distinct noun, is one of the idiomatic usages of the language which should be strictly observed. It will be found that its omission is not uncommon in conversation, particularly in short sentences where there can be no doubt as to the meaning. Thus a Ho will say : Mundd hujittand — the Munda comes, though this is really as incorrect gramma- tically as it would be to translate the sentence into English as " the Munda come".
?. The addition of the subject-sign to the verb, instead of to the word preceding it when that word is the subject, avoids confusion and repetition. Thus, if the subject-sign was c invariably added to the word before a transitive verb, the
sentence Aputee goekid might mean either " His father killed him" or " He killed his father ". Applying the rule, it can only have the latter meaning, because the former would be rendered Apute goekide. Again, the
sentence : " The two raiyats have come " is rendered
c J
Parjdking hujuakandking under the rule, because the addi- tion of the subject-sign king to the word before the verb would give Parjdking king hujuakand. Such repetitions
( 33 ) .
must, however, occur where the animate direct or indirect object, and the subject, are both in the dual or plural number, and there is no other word in the sentence to place before the verb. /.'. ,,. I'usilco chufukoko goekod— Cats kill mice.
3. A noun denoting an inanimate object and standing as the subject of a sentence is not followed by any subject-sign,* e. g. Aid od (or) odtae lotand — his house is burning ; dudi, , tising rdpndeand — the bridge was broken to-day.
47. > Tho next initial difficulty in the Ho verb is the insertion of direct and ' indirect objects. In Chapter VI, para. 29, the student has already seen how the shortened or full forms of the personal pronouns are inserted into the verb when such pronouns stand as the direct or indirect objects of a sentence. It is only necessary to add here that the shortened or full form of the third personal pronoun of the same number is similarly inserted into the verb when a noun denoting an animate being stands as the direct or indirect object of a sentence. As in the case of the pronominal subject-sign, this insertion takes place even when the direct or indirect object is already expressed by a distinct noun. E. g.
Agmtanding — I am bringing him.
Nelkedkingde — He saw the two men.
Emaingme — Give it to me.
Ddsie tdmitan taikend — He was beating the servant.
Paulus bdrid setdkinge kedkedkingd — Paulus called the two dogs.
Sddoming emama — I will give you a horse.
Sddomko tasadem emakod — You will give grass to the horses.
— -1. The rule regarding the insertion of the indirect object has been stated above in general terms which do not, however, apply to the perfect, past and pluperfect tensfes. The manner in which the indirect object is inserted in these tenses will be noticed when they are dealt with seriatim (see Chap. IX).
2. The position which the inserted direct and indirect objects* occupy will also be most readily understood if each tense • is considered in turn in the first instance. Tho following table is given hero for purposes of reference after the
several tenses have been worked through in the succeeding chapters.
) Root + Direct or Indirect Object-sign + Tense- / suffix + Copula + Subject -sign.
Tense. Full Verb showing position of direct and indirect object-signs.
Present Imperfect
Future ...Root + Direct or Indirect Object-sign + Copula + Subject-sign.
Root + Tense-suffix + Direct or Indirect Object- sign + Copula + Subject-sign.
Perfect Past
Pluperfect
3. When a noun denoting an inanimate object stands as the direct object of a transitive verb, the neuter pronominal form e (see para. 31 ante) is inserted into the present, imperfect and future tenses in exactly the same way as the shortened forms of the third personal pronouns are inserted when the direct object is an animate being. The form does not alter in the dual and plural numbers, and does not occur in the other tenses of the indicative mood. E. g.
Birsd dide dguetand — Birsa is bringing a lamp.
Apia hitding bided — I will plant three seeds.
Ddruete joee godkedd — He plucked fruit from the tree.
4. When a sentence contains both a direct and an indirect object, it is more idiomatic to insert the indirect object-sign in the verb in its proper place, leaving the direct object to occupy a separate position as a distinct word outside the verb. There can be no doubt, however, that the insertion of the direct object-sign in the verb is also admissible, the indirect object being indicated by the use of the post- positions tdte and tdre according as motion is implied or not. Thus, the sentence : " I will give the master a horse " may be translated either Gomke sddoming emaid or Gomketdre sddoming emid, the former being preferable. Cf. paras. 16 (a?) (ti) and 29 (in).
( 35 ) CHAPTER VIII.
INDICATIVE MOOD OF TRANSITIVB VERBS.
48. We can now consider the conjugation of the verb more fully. For this purpose, I have selected the verbs dyu — to bring, and em — to give. Both are transitive verbs, but the former will illustrate the inser- tion of the direct, and the latter that of the indirect, object.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing., 1st Person ... dgu-e-tan-d-ing, I.bring or am bringing.
2nd „ ... dgu-e-tan-a-m, Thou bringest or art bringing.
. ( dqu-e-tan-d-e, He or she brings or is bringing.
I agu-e-tan-d, It (any inanimate object) brings.
/) / i A f dcju-e-tan-d-lang, Thou & I
dgu-e-tan-d-ling, He or she & I I bring or are bring-
2nd „ ... dgu-e-tan-d-len. You two 3rd ,, ... dgu-e-tan-d-king, They two
ing.
Pluralist „ { -^n-d-bu You & I 1
dgu-e-tan-d-le, They & I I bring or are bring-
2nd „ ... dgu-e-tan-d-pe, You 3rd „ ... dgu-e-tan-d-ko., They
ing.
Note — 7. It should be borne in mind that, in an ordinary sentence, the subject signs are transferred to the word before the verb unless that word is itself the subject.
t 2. As regards the e between the root and the tense-suffix, see Note 2 to para. 49 below.
49. In the present tense, both the direct and indirect objects are inserted between the root and the tense-suffix. Thus :
Agu-me-tan-d-ing, I bring or am bringing thee.
Acn-i-tan-d-ing, ,, ,, „ „ ,, him or her.
• Agu-e-tan-d-ing, „ „ „ „ „ it.
Agu-ben-tan-d-ing, „ „ „ „ „ you two.
Agu-king-tan-d-ing, „ „ „ „ „ them two.
Agu-pe-tan-d-ing, „ ,, „ „ „ you
Agu-ko-tan-d-iny, ,, ,, „ ,, „ them.
Note — 7. The subject-sign of the first person singular may be replaced by the subject-sign of any other person or number in the
( 36 )
above examples and, in this way, the insertion of the direct object-signs can be practised in an almost indefinite number of variations, it being always borne in mind that, whenever the subject and the direct object are one and the same person, the ordinary forms cannot be used. Thus, " I bring myself " is not dguingtanding, but must be expressed by using the reflexive verb which will be encountered later (Vide Chap. XV). Examples of the transpositions suggested are : —
Agu-ing-tan-a-m, Thou bringest or art bringing me.
Agu-ko-tan-a-m, „ „ „ „ ,, . them.
Agu-e-tan-d-e, He or she brings or is^ bridging it.
Agu-king-tan-d-e, „ „ „ „ „ „ „ thpm
two.
Agu-me-tan-d-ko, They bring or are bringing thee.,* Agu-i-tan-d-ko, ,, ,, ., ,, ,, him or her.
2. In the absence of an animate object requiring the appro- priate object-sign to be inserted, the neuter pronominal object-sign e is inserted into the present, imperfect and future tenses of all transitive verbs, (i. e. all verbs which take the transitive tense-suffixes) whether any inanimate object is expressed in the sentence or not. E. g.
Kdjietande. — He speaks. Ldnddetandko. — They laugh.
This peculiarity will be noticed further in dealing with the intransitive verbs — Vide Chap, X, para. 67.
50. The indirect object is inserted as follows : —
Em-am-tan-d-ing, I give or am giving to thee.
Em-ai-tan-d-ing, ., ,, ., ,, „ ,, him or her.
Em-aben-tan-d-ing, „ ,, ,, „ „ ., you two.
c Em-aking-tan-d-ing, „ „ „ „ „ „ them two.
Em-ape-tan-d-ing, }} „ ,, ,, ,, ,, you.
Em-ako-tan-d-ing, „ „ „ ,, „ „ them,
Note — As with the direct object, the insertion of the indirect object can be practised by using any of the other pronominal subject-si,o-ns in place of ing, it being remembered that a coincidence of the subject and the indirect object must be rendered by the reflexive verb in this case also. Examples
( 37 )
of Midi 1r;m«jM»siti(Mis. \\hich lli.- -ttid.-iit rm .-unli'miM for himself, iin- : —
/•Jin-iiiiHi-t<ni-(i-iii, Thou givest or art giving to me. &m-a&o-lan-a-m, ,, ,, ,, „ ,. „ them. /:'in-(ii-tan-<i-e, He gives or is giving to him or her
(some third person).
Hm-aking-tan-d-e, „ ,, „ „ ,, „ them two. Em-am~tan-d-ko, They give or are giving to thee.
Em-ai-tan-d-ko, „ ,, ,, „ „ ,, him or
i
her.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
, 51. The student has only to add taiken between the present tense- suffix and the copula to arrive at the imperfect tense, which can then be conjugated in precisely the same way as the present tense. Thus, Ayu-e-tan taiken- d-ing — I was bringing, Agu-e-tan taiken-a-m — Thou wert bringing, etc. The direct and indirect object-signs are inserted between the root and the tense-suffix as in the present tense. E. g.
Agu-e-tan taiken-d-ben. — You two were bringing it. Agu-i-tan taiken-d-ko. — They were bringing him or her. Em-am-tan taiken-d-king. — They two were giving to thee. Em-ai-tan taiken-d-pe. — You -were giving to him or her. Em-ako-tan taiken-d-bu. — You and I were giving to them.
Note — In this tense, the pronominal subject-sign is often seen in the middle of the tense-suffix between tan and taiken. Thus Agu-i-tan-ko taiken-d and Em-ai-tan-pe taiken-d are, if anything, more idiomatic than the regular forms given in the preceding examples, which are, however, quite permissible. The reason is that taiken is really only an auxiliary carrying the present tense-suffix into a comparatively past time.
52.» The following examples on the present and imperfect tenses should be mastered before the student passes on to the future tense. He would be well-advised to cover the English translations on the right of the page, and try to work out the meanings of the Ho sentences for himself with the help of the Vocabulary at the end.
1. Kuld amd gundi-e goe-i-tand ... The tiger is killing your cow.
2. Birre Somd ddru-e md-e-tan
taikend ... ... ISoma was cutting trees in the
forest.
( 38 )
3. Nddo uriko tasad-ko jom-e-tand The cattle are eating grass now.
4. Hord kutire parjdko mdndi-e-tan
taikend ... ... The raiyats were cooking rice at
the side of the road.
5. Hisi tdkdre ne miuko-e dkiring-
ko-tand ... ... He is selling these calves for
twenty rupees.
6. Ddsiko sddomko busu-ko em-ako-
< »
tana ... ... The servants are giving straw
to the horses.
7. Panchdred chakad kdji-e kdji-e-
tand ... ... He is telling falsehoods about his
rent.
8. Hdtete simko hola-m kiring-ko-tan *
taikend ... ... Thou wert buying fowls from
the market yesterday.
9. En hdm ho Ad-ing idi-ai-tand \
En Mm hotdte dd-ing idi-e-tand } l am takin« water to that old man*
10. Ne sdn Dongolte-ben idi-e-tand chi Are you two taking this wood
to Chaibassa ?
11. Amd otere Somd dputed uriko-e
gupi-ko-tand ... ... Soma is grazing his father's
cattle on your land.
12. Ne kuliko ndld-le em-ako-tand ... They and I are paying wages to
these coolies.
13. Aid otere (otetaere) chikand-e
her-e-tand ... ... What is he sowing in his field?
•
14. Nelekan kdpite engdte-e goe-i-tan
taikend ... ... He was killing his mother with
an axe like this.
15. Undiingd odete merom-e kumbi-i-
tan taikend ... ... He was stealing a goat from
my younger brother's house.
16. Mundd hoko renge hoko baba-ko
em-ako-tan taikend ... The rich men were giving paddy
to the poor men.
17. Bauumd setdking aid mindiko-
king hud-ko-tand ... Your elder brother's two dogs
are biting his sheep.
18. Akod tite hdturenko dumang-ko
ru-e-tan taikend ... ... The men of the village were
beating drums with their hands.
HI.
I loin kot<i-lni
int'iitlo tisliiij l»i-lnt
t,tik,-n<i,
20.
tienoean chdndure Jamddrenko Inrkerdko dsar sarte-ko sanyar- ko-tan taikend ; nddo knliiko jdlomte-ko tdb-ko-tand,
V.-t.Til:iy yon an i I wen- cut- ting tliM lu-uMclnvs but today we are picking up tho flowers.
Last month the residents of Jamda were hunting bison with bows and arrows ; now they are catching tigers with traps.
FUTURE TENSE.
53. There is no tense-suffix for the future tense, which is formed by adding the copula to the root, the neuter object-sign being placed between as explained in Note 2 to para. 49.
Sing. 1st Person 2nd „
3rd
Dual 1st „
2nd „ 3rd' „
Plural 1st „
2nd „ 3rd „
... dyu-e-d-iny
dyu-e-a-m ( dyu-e-d-e " \ dyu-e-d
( dyu-e-d-lany ' \ dyu-e-d-liny dyu-e-d-ben dyu-e-d-kiny
i dyu-e-d-bu ' \ dyu-e-d-le . . . dyu-e-d-pe . . . dyu-e-d-ko
I will bring. Thou wilt bring.
He or she ) .,,
It | will bring.
Thou and I He or she and I You two They two
You and 1 They and I You They
will bring.
will bring.
54*. Direct and indirect objects are inserted between the root and the copula. Thus,
Ayu-me-d-iny I will bring thee.
Ayu-i-d-iny
Ayu-e-d-iny
AyU'ben-d-iny
Ayu-kiny-d-iny
Ayu-pe-d-iny
Ayu-ko-d-iny
him or her.
it.
yon two.
them two.
you.
them.
( 40 ) And for the indirect object : —
Em-am-d-ing I will give to thoe. Em-ai-d-ing „ „ ,, him or her. Em-aben-d-ing „ ,, ,, you two. Em-akiny-d-ing ,, ,, ,, them two. Em-ape-d-iny „ ,, „ you. Em-ako-d-iny ,, „ ,, them.
Note — As with the present and imperfect tenses, the insertion of the direct and indirect object-signs can be practised in an indefinite number of forms by using the other pronominal subject-signs in turn. The following examples will suffice : —
Ayu-iny-a-m Thou wilt bring me.
Agu-ko-a-m „ ,, „ them.
Agu-e-d-e He or she will bring it.
Ayu-king-d-e „ „ „ them two.
Agu-me-d-ko They will bring thee.
Agu-i-d-ko „ „ „ him or her.
Em-aing-a-m Thou wilt give to me.
Em-ako-a-m „ ,, „ ,, them.
Em-ai-d-e He will give to him or her (some third
person).
Em-akiny-d-e „ „ „ „ them two.
Em-am-d-ko They will give to thee. Em-ai-d-ko „ ,, „ ,, him or her.
55. Besides its ordinary use to imply futurity, the future tense is used, where we would use the present tense in English, to express —
(z) Universal truths and natural phenomena, e.y.
Sabenko misd misd ehakadko kdjied — All men speak falsely
.
sometimes.
«
*• Gdrnd bdbde hdrdichied — Hain causes the paddy to grow.
(z'z) The existing customs, occupations and habits of animals, individuals, castes or tribes, and also constantly recurring actions and events. E.g.
Teliko sunumko lened — The Telis press oil. Bingko sonedko — Snakes hiss.
Aid era lagite Ho gononge emed — A * Ho pays bride-price for
his wife.
ji'iituLo /.mnd — The Unions an- in the h:il)il of anything.
,/uji'ikod — Tliis man grazes cattle.
ll,>ki> lijiiko k'n-iinj.'d — The Hos buy cloth from the Tantis.
.\ /, — Strictly <|>r;ikin<r. the use of the present tense should be confined to actions or states which are continuing at tin- moment of speaking. Thus, Aid of ere chik" he refund means " AVnat is he actually sowing in his field?" \vhil<> Aid otar <-ltik<nide hered means "What • does he usually sow in his field?" Though this distinc-
tion is fairly generally observed, instances are not uncommon where the Ho will not use the future when it ought to be used. Thus, for " 1 pay three rupees rent," he will say Ape tdkd panrhdiny emetand, which really means " I am paying (at the moment of speaking) three rupees rent." Such examples of careless usage should not he imitated by the student, who will always , find himself readily understood if he adheres to the . proper grammatical form.
56. The following are examples on the future tense generally : —
1. Gapd sepedko hapdnumko bdko
emakod ... ... The young men will give flowers
to the young women tomorrow.
2. Huju chandure Somd gunguinge
dandiid ... ... Soma will marry my maternal
aunt (mother's elder sister)
next month.
•
3. Nedete salanyi od kdlominy bated I will build a higher house than
this next year.
»
4. Ne meromlany pordid ondo
jilulunt/ hdkded ... ... Thou and I will skin this goat and
hang up the flesh.
5. Set are Malidtireni a lane/ layitee
topanyed. ... ... The wife of Mahati will chop uy
wood for us (thou and 1) in the morning.
. ( 42 )
6. Kunkalko chdtuko baled ... The Kumhars make earthenware
pots.
7. Singi maskalre ne hdti aled
porsoe jomed ... ... This elephant is in the habit of
eating our jackfruit in broad
daylight.
*
8. Aind erd alingd honkoe (honko-
talinge} saitibdkod ondo tikin
dipli mdndioe dguainyd ... My wife looks after our (her and
my) children and aljo brings me my cooked rice It noon.
9. Siddre Hoko birko dmined, ente
oteko bated ... ... First the Hos clear the jungle;
then they make land for cultivation.
10. Hdtuete tuiuko saben jobrdko idled Jackals take away all the refuse
from the village.
i
11. Ne hdturen Mundd chikan paitie
paitied ... ... What work does the Munda of
this village usually do ?
1 2 . Parjdkotdete Sarkdr lagite panchde
asuled ... ... He realises rent from the raiyats
on behalf of Government.
13. Diangem nued chi ... ... Art thou in the habit of drinking
rice-beer ?
14. Chimin tdkdre en marang sukuri-
pe dkiringed .. ... For how many rupees will you
« sell that big pig ?
«
15. Engdte-dputeteking aid ndldete
itade emakingd chi ... Will he give a portion of his
wages to his parents ?
( 43 ) CHAPTER IX.
INDICATIVE MOOD OF TRANSITIVB VBBBS (contd.) PERFECT TENSE.
57. The transitive tense-suffix is akad and the conjugation as • follows : — ,
Singular -'1st Person . 2nd » -
3rd
dguakadam
( dguakaddf I dyuakadd
- I have brought.
- You have brought.
He or she
- It
>has brought.
r. e duuakaddlanq - You and I
Dual - 1st Person - J
( dguakaddling - He or she and I I nave
,, - dguakaddben - You two f brought.
, - dyuakaddking - They two
2nd 3rd
( dguakaddbu - You and I Plural - 1st Person - \
I dguakaddle - They and I
2nd ,, - dguakaddpe - You
3rd ,, - dguakaddko - They
f have ( brought.
Note — 7. .The student will notice that the obsolete " thou " has been dropped. He ought now to be able to distinguish between the numbers without its assistance.
2. The form as conjugated above is the correct one, because transitive verbs do not insert the inanimate object-sign in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, even when a direct inanimate object is expressed in the sentence, e.y., Joe dguakadd — He has brought fruit.
58. In this tense, the direct and indirect objects are inserted between the tense-suffix and the copula. There is, however, one important difference between it and the three tenses treated in the preceding chapter. The simple forms of the personal pronouns are inserted as the signs both of the direct and indirect objects, and the context and circumstances must show in each case whether the object is direct or indirect. The
( 44 )
following conjugations, in which the third personal subject has been used to avoid reflexive forms, will illustrate the point : —
Agu-akad-ing-d-e, ") c me
Agu-akad-me-d-e,
Agu-aka-i-d-e,
Agu-akad-d-e,
Agu-akad-lang-d-e,
Agu-akad-ling-d-e,
Agu-akad-ben-d-e,
Agu-akad-king-d-e,
Agu-akad-bu-d-e,
Agu-akad-le-d-e,
Agu-akad-pe-d-e,
Agu-akad-ko-d-e,
Em-akad-ing-d-e, Em-akad-me-d-f , Em-aka-i-d-e,
Em-akad-lang-d-e,
Em-akad-liny~d-e,
Em-akad-ben-d-e,
Em-akad-king-d-e,
Em-akad-bu-d-e,
Em-akad-le-d-e,
Em-akad-pe-d-e,
Em-akad-ko-d-e,
)• He h;v3 brought
He has given
J
you
him or her ( some third person ) it
you or me him or her and me you two them two * you and* me them and me •
you them •
me
you
him or her ( some third
> *
person ) you and me him or her and me you two them two you and me them and me
them
Note — 1. The form of the third person singular should be noticed.
It is a contraction in which the "d" of the tense-suffix
disappears, the " a " and the " i " being pronounced to-
• gether with the ordinary diphthong given in para. 5 of
Chap. I.
2. The alternative tense-suffix tad is very commonly used instead of akad. It takes animate direct and indirect objects quite regularly and in the same position as akad, a similar contraction taking place in the third person singular, e. g. dgutadingde — he has brought me, dgutadmede — he has brought you, dgutaide — he has brought him or her, emtadlangde — he has given you and me, emtadkingde — he has given them two, emtadkode — he has given them.
( 45 )
Tho use of tail with an indirect object is not, however, usual.
59. Examples on the perfect tense are : —
1. liiiian fiint/ t>nkint/t> /mdakad- A poisonous snake has bitten both
kingd. those men.
2. Toraiteko yuuakadingd They have wounded me with
swords.
3. Jdimi kudlaming emakaid I, have given him a new spade.
4. Nidirko aind odred saiuko The white ants have destroyed
nnlfsdnakadd the thatch of my house.
5. , Kajiakadkode He has spoken to them.
6. Johan unditeko isu purde Johan has helped his younger
dengdakadkod brothers very much.
7. Knmbulf sdbakaid ondo am We ( they & I ) have caught the
tamanangrele dguakaid thief and brought him before you.
8? Jidtalang bar tdkd bar sikired Our (your and my) grandmother bdru ddrit gel tdkdtee kiring- has bought a kusum tree worth akadd Rs. 2/8/- for Rs. 10/-
9. Holdete ne sitiam abungakaid Have you washed this child since chi ? yesterday ?
10. Chikanred hdturen dindd kuiko Why have the unmarried girls of akod ubre bd tisingko em- the village put flowers in their altadd ? hair today ?
PAST TENSE.
60. The transitive tense-suffix is ked and the conjugation as follows : —
Singular '- 1st Person - dgukedding - I
2nd „ - dgukedam - you
^ brought ( dgukedde - He or she
I dgukedd - It
( dqnkeddlana - You and I
Dual - 1st Person -</,,,.. -n- , « T
l aguk&laltng - He or she & 1
_ > brought
2nd ,, - agukedaben - You two
3rd „ - dgukeddking - They two
( dqukeddbu Plural - 1st Person - \ * I agukedale |
- You and I - They and I |
2nd „ - dgukeddpe |
- You |
3rd „ - dgukeddko |
- They |
brought
61. Direct objects are inserted between the tense - suffix and the copula, and the conjugation is quite regular except in the third person singular, where the "d" of the tense - suffix disappears, as in the perfect tense, and the preceding vowel "e" is also elided.
Agukedmede, Agukide,
Agukedde,
Agukedlangde,
Agukedlingde,
Agukedbende,
Agukedkingde,
Agukedbude,
Agukedlede,
Agukedpede,
Agukedkode,
}- He brought
me you
him or her ( some third person ) it
you and me he or she and me you two
them two •
you and me them and me you them
62. Indirect objects are also inserted between the tense-suffix and the copula, the simple forms of the personal pronouns being used as in the perfect tense. The tense-suffix ked is, however, completely altered to ad, the "d" of which disappears in the third person singular.
Emadingde, Emadmede, Emaide,
Emadlangde,
Emadlingde,
Emadbende,
Emadkingde,
Emadbude,
Emadlede,
Emadpede,
Emadkode,
He gave
me you
him or her ( some third , person )
you and me
him or her and me
you two
them two
you and me
them and me
you
them
( 47 )
63. Examples on the past tense are ; —
1. Itdmlii kdjl kdjiadingd. He told me an amusing story.
'2. Durk'in Minit/d naffo <iiny. Darkan Munda and I recognised kumbuling wlurumkid, the thief.
3. Tfi- h/rtc kcrdko holdle hdr- We (they and I) drove the buffaloes /•.-'//••"». to yonder forest yesterday. *
•i. Tdtdti- .\\tiki sdmomred sdkome Her grandfather gave Naiki a gold
enutid. bracelet.
•
5. Enking filing liairte mintfiking Those two men tied np the sheep
folk-id, with a long rope.
6. ChikanmeAte honko ue taiadrem Why did you collect the children
lin/idikedkod. in this place ?
7. Hold n'uldre /</<•/<//' isn purde Last night the lightning flashed
hiehirkedd. very much.
8. Ente diuri pundi rime bongdkid. The village priest then sacrificed
a white fowl.
$. Aiumkedingde ondo aind hukum- He heard me and understood my e samjaukedd. orders.
10. Bdnddred dd d%ri pairkedd The water of the bandh overflowed ondo aled ote topdkedd. the embankment and submerged
our fields.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
64. The transitive tense-suffix is led and the ordinary conjugation is quite regular, e. g. dguledding — I had brought, dguledam — you had brought, etc. The rule regarding the insertion of direct and indirect objects is precisely the same as in the perfect tense, the simple forms of the personal pronouns being inserted as the signs of both classes of objects, leaving the context and circumstances to show which object has been used. The third person singular has a contraction exactly similar to that occurring in the past tense. •
Aguledingde, Aguledmede, Ayulide,
Aguledde, Aguledlangde, Aguledlingde, Aguledbendt,
f He had brought "
me yon
him or her ( some third person ). it
you and me him or her and me . you two
Aguledkingde,
Aguledbude,
Aguledlede,
Aguledpede,
Aguledkode,
Emledingde,
Emledmede,
Emlide,
! them two
you and me had brought -{ them and me
you
I them f me
you
him or her ( some third person \
you and me
him or her and me
you two <
them two'
you and me
them and me
>• He had given -(
Emledlangde,
Emledlingde,
ET , •» ,
Hiinledbenae,
Emledkingde, Emledbude,
Emledlede, Emledpede, Emledkode, [_
Note — Though the proper function of this tense is to denote an action prior to another action or event which is also pas,t, but which is the subject of conversation at the time, the student will often find it employed by the ordinary Ho when the past would be the proper grammatical tense to use. Thus, he will hear " aguledkoae " with the simple past meaning " He brought them," though its proper meaning is " he had brought them" or " he brought them " before some other past action or event took place. ,
65. The following are examples on the pluperfect tense, the precise connotation of which should be borne in mind in considering them :-
1. Chdtoming emlid
2. Ikir sudre movrdko ukuledd
[ had given him an umbrella.
They had hidden the dead body in a
deep well. She had shown the mad dog to us
(him and me). *
He had beaten his mother in-law with a bamboo ( also 'his mo- ther-in-law had beaten him with a bamboo'.)
Marang Gomkege bdrpdrenkinge The Deputy Commissioner had spok- kdfiledkingd. en to both parties himself.
3. Bald-bdlu setae udubledlingd
4. Hdndrte inddtee tdmlid
5.
( 49 ) CHAPTER X.
INDICATIVE MOOD OF INTRANSITIVE VERBS AND USB OF IMPERFECT AUXILIARY.
66. The tense-suffixes used with intransitive verbs have been given in para. 45. The conjugation of the various tenses is given below, the singular number being sufficient for all practical purposes.
PRESENT 'TENSE.
1st Person - gititanding - I sleep or am sleeping. 2nd „ - gititanam - You sleep or are sleeping. 3rd ,, - gititande - He or she sleeps or is sleeping. gititand • It sleeps or is sleeping.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
1st Person - gititan taikending I was sleeping. 2nd „ - gititan taikenam You were sleeping. 3rd „ - gititan taikende He or she was sleeping. gititan taikend It was sleeping.
FUTURE TENSE.
1st Person - gitiding - I
2nd „ - gitiam - You
3rd „• - gitide - He or she
gitid - It
PERFECT TENSE.
1st Person - gitiakanding - I
2nd ,,, - q'diakanam - You .
> have (has) slept. 3rd „ - gittakande - He or sh«
gitiakand - It
PAST TENSE.
1st Person - gitikending or gitieanding 2nd „ - tiitikfiiam „ gitieanam 3rd „ - liitiki'in'ic ., iiififumii'
„ gitieand
I
£
< ( 50 ) PLUPERFECT TENSE.
1st Person - gitilending - I
2nd „ - gitilenam - You
3rd „ - gitilende - He or she h
gitilend - It
Note — 1. Intransitive verbs do not of course present any of the difficulties encountered in the transitive verbs in connection with the insertion of direct and indirect objects.
2. In the imperfect tense, the pronominal subject-sign is often
placed between the two parts of the tense, suffix, e. g., gititaning taikend - I was sleeping. See Note tt> para. 51.
3. Of the two past tense-suffixes, ean is ordinarily used with
most intransitive verbs. The tense suffix ken is used also with transitive verbs in reply to the question : " What have you (or he, or she, or they, or any other person or persons) been doing ? " which is itself rendered Chikanam chikdkend ? Hoffman makes this a separate tense in Mundari and calls it the Incomplete Past, but in Ho it cannot be limited to an action that " has been interrupted or broken off before it was completed ", nor does it generally imply " an intention of resuming and completing the action ". It more often denotes a recently completed action, and is an idomatic usage rather than a distinct tense form. It does not infix
direct or indirect object-signs.
i
Simrdeteng sikend - I have been ploughing since
cockcrow.
Hdkukoe jdlomkend - He has been catching fish in a
net.
Tdkd koetankole emkend - We (they and I) have been
giving money to the beggars.
4. The three verbs huju - to come, seter - to reach, to arrive,
and tebd - to reach, to arrive, always form their past tenses with the pluperfect tense-suffix, e. g. Hujulende - he came, seterlending - I arrived.
5. The ordinary connotation of the pluperfect tense-suffix is
to indicate a state which has since altered. E. g. gitilending - I slept (but am now awake again).
( 51 ) »
67. Though the difference between the transitive and intransitive verbs is much the same in Ho as in English, there aro many Ho words used with tho transitive tense-suffixes which we should class as intransitive. Common examples are :— Sded - to breathe, bu - to bark, gerang - to groan, clidb - to open the mouth, ku - to cough, durang - to sing, hutir - to snore, rda - to cry, rapid - to wink, and oidr • to swim. Words like Idmld - to laugh, logor - to grumble, and satiny - to have patience, also take the transitive tense-suffixes and insert direct object-signs, e.g., Ldnddkedingdko - they laughed at me, chikanam logoretand - what are you grumbling about ? A few words which we would class as transitive are used intransitively in Ho. Common instances are : — de - to sit a- stride, ri<Vs and rakab - to climb, ascend. Thus, Sddome deeand • he rode the horse, burwng rakabeand - I climbed the hill. The student must always bear in mind this distinction between transitive and intransitive verbs, and remember that the two essential differences are ( i ) the different tense- suffixes in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, and ( ii ) the non- insertion of direct and indirect object-signs, and particularly the non- insertion of the impersonal direct object-sign in the present, imperfect and ordinary future tenses of intransitive verbs. .
S.
68. A large class of intransitive verbs may be converted into tran- sitive verbs by the use of the causative suffix icJii. For example, hard means " to grow " and is intransitive, as in the sentence : — Birre ne ddru hdrdeand - This tree grew in the forest. Hdrdichi means " to cause to grow " " to grow " ( actively ), and is transitive, as in the sentence : — Sirmd mutid bdbde hdrdichied - He grows paddy every year. Other common verbs which may be so converted are : — clidru - to sink, chdtom - to float, jdrom to ripen, to get ripe, jitd - to stick, ol - to issue- to go out, rukit - to shake, ter • to melt, and sur - to drown. When converted into tran- sitives by the addition of ichi, these words are conjugated quite regularly in the present, imperfect and future tenses, but commonly drop the ichi in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, which are otherwise conjugated like ordinary transitive verbs. The following examples will demonstrate the point : — •
Ote rukuiand - The ground shakes, i. e., there is an
earthquake.
Homotaing hdsute rukueand - My body shook with fever. ,
Hoio sakame rukuichietan taikend - The wind was shaking the leaves. • Kurkur dpu hontee rukvkid - The angry father shook his son.
Entf sdmd kuchuing rukukedd - I then shook the empty bag.
( ( 52 ) Ne rupd choilam sericliied - When will you melt this silver ?
Note — 1. The student will find this peculiar use of the transitive tense-suffixes with intransitive verbs rather confusing at first, and he is apt to be misled into thinking that the roots are transitive. The way in which the present, imperfect and future tenses must be expressed when a transitive tense is to be conveyed, will, however, set him right. It should be remarked also that the elision of icM in the three past tenses is not imperative, though it is usual colloquially.
2. The suffix ichi is permissive as well as causative1, and it may be added in either sense both to /ransitive and intransitive verbs. Thus, Rudichikode may mean either '• He will cause them to return ' or " He will allow them to return", and dkiringichiiding may mean either " I <.vill make him sell " or " I will allow him to sell ". In both cases, the context and circumstances must show which is
the correct rendering, i
69. Though not strictly pertaining to the present chapter, this will
probably be the most convenient place to remark that there are several transitive verbs with which the full forms of the personal pronouns are used as direct animate object-signs, inanimate objects being indicated by the usual impersonal pronominal sign e. These verbs will be treated more fully in Chapter XVII, and the following examples will suffice for the present : — Boro - to fear, Kurkur - to be angry with, Sdri - to believe, and Suku - to like, love. Thus Boroamtanding - I fear you, Kurkuradinc/de - He was angry with me, Sdriaidko - They will believe him, Sdrietandko - They believe it, Sukuakadbendlang - We ( he and I ) have loved you two.
70. The use of dai - to be able, with transitive verbs is exactly similar. Considered by itself, dai is of course intransitive, and it con- tinues to*be intransitive when used with intransitive verbs ; 0. <?.,. En oe apirdaidf - That bird can fly, Md isii sangmging nirdaieand - I could run very far last year. When used with transitive verbs, it becomes transitive and takes the full pronominal forms for direct animate objects, inanimate objects being indicated by the usual impersonal object-sign e. Thus, J$ eldaiamtanding - I can see you, Hold purd erdkoling kiringdaiakadkod - We (he and I) could have bought many wives yesterday.
Note — The future is the correct tense to use for "can" or "am able to", unless the capability is being exercised at the
( 53 ) »
muim-nt of -peaking, as in the example .NV///-/M/, - I can see you (/. e., an I speak). In fact, though //•// may really be regularly conjugated with the usual tran- sitive and intransitive tense-stillixes, the student will soon notice that the ordinary Ho, with an umi-ual sacrifice of exact ness to convenience, uses the future tense to express all the shades of meaning of "can" and " could," whether referring to present, future or past time. Thus, he will say : A/a isn M/nginging nmfatd, instead of the form given in the second example above, and this usage is so general as to be almost idiomatic. Asa rule also, he will not infix any object-signs, either expressing the object by a separate word or omitting it altogether if it is an imper- sonal pronoun. The following examples show the com- monly-heard forms before, and the grammatically-correct forms after, the English rendering :-
Aminy neldaid • I can see you - Neldaiamtanaing. Iddkvkuiny jdlomdaid • I can net fish - Hakukoing jalomdaiakoa. '
Oding baidaid - I can build a house - Oaing baidaiea. Soandaidmy - I can smell it - Soandaietanaing.
71. Before leaving the Indicative Mood, it is necessary to notice certain modifications of the regular tenses which are in common use, and which are formed by the addition of the generic imperfect auxiliary taiken. We have already seen (para. 51 ante ) how the present tense is converted into the ordinary imperfect by the use of this auxiliary, and it only remains to be added that the other tenses of the indicative mood, both of transitive and intransitive verbs, may be similarly converted into separate tense-forms, bearing the same relation to each of them, as the imperfect does to the present. The simple future cannot of course have any corresponding imperfect form, but the future when used to express existing customs, occupations and habits ( vide para. 55 )• adds the imperfect auxiliary in order to express customs, occupations and habits which are now extinct and no longer followed, e. </., Hoko ddvri erdkoko dtarko taikend - The Hos used to burn witches. As appears from the preceding example, the effect in all the tenses is merely to transfer the copula to the end of the imperfect auxiliary, the conjugation continuing quite regularly as regards the insertion of pronominal object-signs. The subject-sign always comes after the copula when there is no other word besides the subject before the verb. The full forms for each tense are therefore :-
' ( 54 )
IMPERFECT OF THE FUTURE. Ague taikending - I used to bring it. Emai taikending - I used to give him. Giti taikending - I used to sleep.
IMPERFECT OF THE PERFECT.
Aguakad taikending - I have been bringing it. Emakai taikending - I have been giving him. ' Gitiakan taikending - I have been sleeping.
IMPERFECT OF THE PAST.
Aguked taikending - I have been bringing it. <
Emdi taikending - I have been giving him, t
Gitiean taikending - I have been sleeping.
IMPERFECT OF THE PLUPERFECT.
c>
Aguled taikending - I had been bringing it. Emli taikending - I had been giving him. Gitilen taikending - I had been sleeping.
72. Examples on the rules and usages explained in this chapter are given below.
1. Nimir salandi joroakdn taikend The roof has been leaking lately.
2. Jetete sabenkole balbaltan taikend We were all perspiring from the
heat.
3. Tising Munddtdte panchding em- I can pay my rent to the Munda
daied today.
•
4. Somd kuihontee nelichimed chi Will Soma allow you to see his
daughter ?
5. Sengel mede serichied Fire melts iron.
6. Hdtyren salen sitidko Idnddi tai- All the children in the village used
kendko to make fun of him.
»
7. Singi-hasur taiomteko seterlend They arrived after sunset.
8. Tdld niddre amd odrem gititan Were you sleeping in your house at
taikend chi midnight ?.
b
9. lueanding, mendo jdni kde aium- I called out loudly, but no one heard
kedingd me.
10. Gardre Paulitsko surkid (sitr- They drowned Paulus in tne river. ichikid)
( 55 )
11. ('lii/.;i,i,i,n,>,itf ,ilnm
nuir,tii>i let r<i l»k,t.i,
Why is our (your and my) biggest buffalo limping ?
12. Sdriadingdko, ni,',/,ln enreoko They believed me, but yet they
boroaid feared him.
13. Tikinjokd gar<i inn lidritan taikend The river was flowing very swiftly
until midday.
14. Chikande chikdkend ?. l\mn- What has he been doing ? He has
bukende. been stealing.
i
15. Niddre danddkuld senbdlen tai- The hyena had been wandering here
ktnde and there daring the night.
16. Od chetanreliny rakabeand ondo We (he and I) climbed on the top
saiuling dalkedd of the house and thatched it.
17. Amd odtele hujulend, mendo ka- We (they & I) went to your bunga-
cJieritem senlen taikend low, but you had gone to Kacheri.
18. Hold nidd hoiote aind yond hdn- My cow-house fell down in last
dieand night's wind.
19. Ne otered gusind rdmtide here The owner of this plot of land used
taikend to sow sirguja.
20. Mdnki hujuakande chi ? Ed, Has the Manki come ? Yes, he has
bdrre isu ydrie tinyuakan been standing outside for a long
taikend. time.
CHAPTER XI.
>
SUBJUNCTIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS.
73. The Subjunctive Mood of transitive and intransitive verbs is formed by adding to the root the modal sign k followed by the copula d. The direct and indirect objects of transitive verbs are inserted between the root and the modal sign in accordance with the rules explained in dealing with the Indicative Mood. »
1st Person - Ayuekding - I may bring it, may I bring it, let me bring it.
2nd „ - Aguekam - You may bring it, etc.
3rd „ - Ayukde He or she may bring it, etc.
1st Person - Emaikdiny - I may give it to him, may I give it to him, let
me give it to him.
2nd „ - Emaikam - You may give it to him, etc. 3rd „ - Emaikde - He or she may give it to him ( some third
person J, etc.
' ( 56 )
1st Person - Gitikding - I may sleep, may I sleep, let me sleep.
2nd ,, - Gitikam - You may sleep, etc.
3rd „ - Gitikde - He or she may sleep, etc.
Note — 1. The above conjugations only give the singular number with the insertion of the direct inanimate object and the indirect animate singular object, but the student should by now be able to continue the conjugation in the dual and plural numbers, and to transpose object-signs so as to produce an unlimited number of variations of meaning. The following examples will suffice : —
Aguekdko - They may bring it, etc. «
Aguikdben - You two may bring hinj, etc*.
Emalangkdking - They two may give us (you & I) etot Emamkde - He may give you, etc.
Gitikdpe - You may sleep, etc. t
Gitikdko - They may sleep, etc.
2. The Subjunctive Mood indicates that the speaker is asking
or granting a permission, favour or concession, and must not be used when mere probability or doubt is intended. The latter is expressed in Ho by the future indicative followed by the word torang. Thus, Agueding torang - I may bring it (or) I will perhaps bring it.
3. The Subjunctive Mood is used also in sentences introduced
in English by such words as " in order to ", " in order that ", « but ", etc.
74. Redo is the sign of the Conditional Mood and any tense of the indicative mood, both of transitive and intransitive verbs, may be con- verted into the corresponding tense of the conditional mood by the sub- stitution of the sign redo for the copula a, direct and indirect objects being inserted in transitive verbs in exactly the same way as in the regular indi- cative .forms. The following are the first person singular forms of each tense j —
PRESENT.
dguetanredoing - If I bring (or) am bringing it -\
I (at the present emaitanredowg - It I give (or"1 am giving him >
j • TC T i I moment.)
gititanreaoing - If I sleep (or) am sleeping
IMPERFECT.
dguetan taikenrtdoing - If I was bringing it emaitan taikenredoing - If I was giving him. gititan taikenredoing - If I was sleeping.
( 57 ;
emairedouni (jitiredoing
dgitakadredoing
emakairedoing
gitiakanredoing
FUTURE,
- If I will bring it.
- If I will give him.
- If I will sleep.
PERFECT.
- If I have brought it.
- If I have given him.
- If I have slept.
PAST.
emairedoiin/ gintanredoing
dyuledredoiny
emliredoiny
gitilenredoing
- If I brought it.
- If I gave him.
- If I slept.
PLUPERFECT.
- If I had brought it.
- If I had given him.
- If 1 had slept.
Note — 1. The Imperfect Forms mentioned in para. 71 may similarly be used conditionally. E. g», Aguakad taikenredoing If I have been bringing it, Emai taikenredoing - If I have been giving him, Gitilen taikenredoing - If I had been sleeping.
2. The conditional clause usually precedes the principal sen- tence, and, when its subject is the same as that of the principal sentence, it need not be expressed by a subject- sign in both sentences, though it is always as well to put in the sign twice where there are several words in both sentences. Thus : —
Hujuredoing, emamd - If I come, I will give it to you. Gititanredo, gitikde - If he is sleeping, let him sleep. Aj>um ne rede nueredo, - If your father drinks this medicine, sdben nidde gitid he will sleep the whole night.
75. The sign redo when used by itself indicates that the condition is realizable or probable. If the condition is one that has not been fulfilled, or is not realizable or probable, the word lionang is added at the end of the principal sentence. The following examples will illustrate J
' ( 58 )
the difference, a safe general rale being that honang should be used wherever " would " is used in the English verb : —
Donyolteng senoredo, liisir kiringamd If I go to Chaibassa (as is possible
and probable), I will buy you a necklace.
Dongolteng senoredo., hisir kiringamd If I went to Chaibassa (which I lionang. cannot or will not do), I would
buy you a necklace.
Dongolteng senodairedo, hisir hiring- If I am able to go to Chaibassa (as amd. is possible, though not ^certain),
I will buy you a necklace.
76. Conditional clauses introduced by the words " even if ", " evftn although ", and similar expressions, take reo instead of redo, the other rules regarding the insertion of object-signs and the use of honing be"ing exactly the same. E. <?.,
ffujureom, kding senod Even if you come, I shall not go.
r Kedingreom, kding aiumed Even if you call me, I shall not
listen.
Gojotanreo, kding mdpmed Even if I am dying (which I pro-
bably am), I shall not forgive you.
Gojoreo, kding mdpmed honang Even if I were dying (which I am
not), I would not forgive you.
Note — In all sentences, whether preceded by the conditional reda or reo, in which honang is used, the Hos have an alternate idiomatic construction in which ted is substituted for the copula d at the end of the principal verb. Thus, the last example given above might be rendered : Gojoreo, kding mdpmeted honang, and a similar alteration might be made in all the examples in the next paragraph in which honang is used. I do not pretend to understand the rationale of this idiomatic usage.
77. The following are examples on the rules considered in this chapter : —
> 1. Ne mdndi dputee idiaikd. May he take this food to his father ?
2. Chitie emakadmeredo, okonred. If he has given you a letter, where
is it ?
( 59 ) , >
iJ. Kdam yitilenredo, l«i(td kd If you had not slept, the paddy
kuinbneand honang. would not have been stolen.
4. AsdiHti'iiy senoreo, chimin bode Even if I went to Assam, I would
hobd daidiny rudd honany. return as soon as possible.
5. Hold knlam yockirt'ilo, ••Itilt'kdte If you killed the tiger yesterday,
ondo miad yundi hold nidde how is it another cow was killed
yoeand. last night ?
6. Gitilenredoing, yoeeand honany. If I had slept, I would have been
* killed.
7. A'uAjtdre tdkd hobdoreo, en od Even if I had money, I would not
kainy /yrinyed honang. buy that house.
i? .' Ainytdre tdkd taikenreo, en Even if I had had money, I would
od kdiny kirinykedd honany. not have bought that house.
•
9. Entorsd hdtutem senlenredo, If you had gone to the village at
kumbukom sdbkedkod ho- once, you would have caught the
nany. thieves.
10. Hdsuinyreo (hdsuoreo), Ran- Even if I was sick, I would goto
chiteny senod honany. Ranchi.
CHA.PTER XII.
IMPBRATIVB MOOD AND USB OF PROHIBITIONS, INVITATIONS,
NEGATIONS AND INTERROGATIONS. • 78. The Imperative Mood is formed by the additon of the simple
forms of the second personal pronoun to the root of intransitive verbs. E.y., Gitime — sleep ( sing. ), Gitiben — You two sleep, and Gitipe — You (plural) sleep. In the case of transitive verbs, the inanimate object-sign e is always inserted ( c.f. Note 2 to para. 48 and Note 2 to para. 49 ), unless there is an animate object, direct or indirect, requiring the appropriate object-sign to be inserted between the root and the pronominal 'ending. E. y. Ayueme — bring it, Purd Idkddyueme — bring many rupees, Aynime — bring him, Ayukinyme — bring them two, Emaime — give it to him, Emakom — give them.
Note. — The last example illustrates the usual euphonic contraction of the singular pronominal sign which occurs both after the direct and indirect animate object-signs of the third person plural. E. y. , Ayukom — bring them, Ne lijd idiakom —
' ( 60 )
take this cloth to them. A similar contraction occurs after the prohibitive particle dlo, the use of which is ex- plained in the next paragraph.
79. Prohibitions are expressed by the use of a special particle dlo, which is equivalent to "do not" and is followed by the indicative future. The simple pronominal signs are added to dlo, the direct and indirect object- signs being infixed into the verb in the same way as in the ordinary future tense. The following examples will show what is meant : —
Alom gitid - Don't sleep.
Alom dgued - Don't bring it. f
Alom kedid - Don't call him. g •
Aloben emaid - Don't you two give to him. .
Alope tdmkod - Don't you (plural) beat them.
Purd ddru dlope mded - Don't you cut many trees.
En kumbuking dlom sdbkingd- Don't catch those two thieves.
80. Invitations to one or more persons to join the speaker in doing something require the simple inclusive dual ( lang ) or plural ( bu ) of the first personal pronoun and the future tense, with or without the particle dold. If dold is not used, the pronominal form is added to the future tense like an ordinary subject-sign. If dold is used, it precedes the verb in the future tense, and the pronominal forms are added to it, the d of dold being elided before lang. E. g.,
Gitidlang or Dollang gitid Let us (thou and I) sleep.
Rdpudedlang or Dollang rdpuded Come, let us break it.
Sdbidbu or Doldbu sdbid Come, let us (you and I) catch him.
Idiakodbu or Doldbu idiakod Come, let us take it to them.
81. As will have been seen by some of the examples given in the preceding chapters, Negation is expressed by the particle kd, which is always placed immediately before the verb, and thus attaches to itself all animate subject-signs in accordance with the rule in para. 46. The construction is perfectly regular, except that the addition of the pro- nominal sign of the second person singular does not shorten the long vowel of kd-vide para. 28 (b). The following examples will suffice :—
' Kding dguetand - I am not bringing it.
Kdam emakaid - You have not given it to him.
Kde gitieand - He did not sleep.
( ei ) ;
Kdko hnjurido, kiil>" .•>, n»n - IF tlu-\ il<> not nnm-. \v i YOU ;ind I i will
not <£<>.
.\'e dtii-ii k<i <»>/,>(, am - This tree is not dyin^.
.Y.'/r. — The negative of the inipcralivo mood is formed by the particle
<il<> us oxplainnl in para 79. The negative of
the subjunctive mood is -iinilarly formed, probably to
avoid confusion with the modal sign k. E. </., the negative
of dguekde (may he bring it) is not kde dgnekd, but
dlokde dyne which is merely an alternative form of dlo
dyuekde. The negative of the other persons and numbers
t is arrived at in exactly the same way, it being always
•remembered that the first form, in which the modal si<_m.
the copula, and the subject-sign are added to dlo, is more
idiomatic and more commonly used.
*
82. Interrogations are expressed by the particle chi, which is always placed at the end of the sentence and is spoken with a somewhat higher inflection of the voice than the rest of the sentence, which is not affected in any way. E.g.
Ainglom hujnd chi - Will you come with me ? Otee kiringakadd chi - Has he bought the land ?
83. The usual examples on this chapter are given below : —
1. Alokdlang eperang Let us not quarrel.
2. Airjd ddruete Id dlom goded Don't pluck flowers from my trees.
ii. Huringlekd hurumsuku dgu- You two bring me some money. aingben.
4. Dollang kapdjid Come, let us talk together.
5. Kuihontam initdre dlom gongid Don't give yonr daughter in mar-
riage to that man.
6. Alokdko neling Let them not see me.
7. Aing dlom nelichikod Don't let them see me.
8. Ne cliatuete dd duleme Pour out the water from this pot.
9. Lili dlom kedid banredo turned Don't touch a hornet or else it will
sting you.
10. Hat tern senoeand chi ? Senoean- Did you go to the bazaar ? If so, redom, isudnjdtem rudakand you have returned very quickly.
• •
PARTICIPIAL FORMS.
84. We have seen already that every Ho verb consists of at least three parts, viz. the root, the tense-suffix and the copula. The latter is the verbalizing agent, and its elimination leaves a participal form which may be used as an adjective as it stands, or be converted into a noun or a participle proper. The result is that the Ho language has as many parti- cipial forms as it has tenses, each of which may be used adjectively, substantively or conjunctively.
PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. *'
9
85. Participial adjectives consist ordinarily of the root plus <the tense-suffix. We know, however, that direct or indirect object-signs must be inserted into all transitive verbs. If no animate object is expressed in the sentence, the inanimate object-sign e is inserted in certain tenses whether an inanimate object is expressed or not. I£ the sentence contains an animate object, whether direct or indirect, its appropriate
/ object-sign is always inserted in the verb. When, therefore, a tran- sitive verb is converted into a participial form, only the copula is elimi- nated and the object-sign remains. Thus dguetande - he is bringing it, and Idnddetande - he is laughing, become dyuetan ho - the bringing man or the man who is bringing it, and Idnddetan ho - the laughing man or the man who is laughing. The following series of participial adjectives will make the point clear :-
PRESENT.
dguetan ho - the man who is bringing it.
emaitan ho - „ „ „ ,, giving to him (some third person).
gititan ho - „ „ „ „ sleeping.
IMPERFECT.
dguetan taiken ho - the man who was bringing it. emaitan taiken ho - „ „ „ „ giving to him. yititan taiken ho - „ „ „ „ sleeping.
FUTURE.
' ague ho - the man who will bring it (or) who usually brings it.
emai hd - „ „ „ n give to him (or) who usually gives to him. ytti ho - „ „ }> }) sleep (or) who usually sleeps.
( 63 ) PERFECT.
ho - the man who has brought it. ' /<" - „ „ ,, „ given to him. /i() - » » », „ slept.
PAST.
/*<> - tho man who brought it. • i ho - „ „ „ gave to him. iiitii-an ho • „ „ „ slept. •
PLUPERFECT.
dtjnled ho - Ihe man who had brought it. emli ho - „ „ „ „ given to him.
yitilen ho • „ „ „ „ slept.
Note — Where the subject of the subordinate clause is the same as that of the principal sentence, the subject-sign disappears from the former when it is expressed by a participial adjective. Where, however, the two subjects are distinct, the subject-sign of the subordinate clause appears before the participial adjective, either by itself, or at the end of the preceding word. In both cases, the participial adjec- tive is always placed immediately before the noun which it qualifies. Thus, the simple direct sentence : "Pator bought this horse" is translated Pdtor ne sddome kiringkid, and the compound sentence : "Pator, who bought this horse, has brought the money", is translated Ne sddom kir'uwki Pdtor tdkde dguakadd. But the compound sentence : " The horse Pator bought yesterday died today " is rendered Pdtor Jiolde kiringki sddom tisinge goeand. C.f. also Am kiringki sddom - The horse you bought, and holam kiringki- sddom the horse you bought yesterday.
86. In Chapter VII, para. 41, it has been stated that thete are no relative pronouns in Ho, and the preceding examples show that relative clauses must be expressed by the use of participial adjectives. This is beyond doubt the original idiomatic usage and, though the student may sometimes hear the interrogative pronoun or adjective used relatively^, with the demonstrative pronoun or adjective as its correlative, this is entirely an acquired usage seldom or never employed by the ordinary aboriginal. On the one hand, literate Hos will sometimes use the relative
f ( 64 )
I construction in imitation of more advanced languages, with which their
familiarity is thus manifested, while, on the other, Indians of different races will almost always employ it because it occurs in their own languages, and because it is easier for conversational purposes than the participial construction. For example, in translating the sentence : " The cows he bought last year have been stolen," a literate Ho might, and a foreigner probably would, say : Okon uriko mde kirinykedkod, en uriko ( enko ) kurn* buakandko, while the Ho cultivator would say : Mde kiringkedko uriko
•kumbuakand. The participial construction is the idiomatic one and, though it is certainly somewhafr difficult to acquire, the student should make it a rule to use it invariably from the beginning. If no other reason will suffice, he may be assured that, if he qannot use this construction himself, he will never be able to follow*a conversation between two Hos, and will have considerable difficulty in following sentences addressed to himself. Once he has mastered the principles of the construction, however, its clean diamond-cut results cannot but appeal to him, and should lead him on to persevere in its practical application until he has attained the necessary degree of facility in its use. Even after idiomatic self-expression has become fluent, it will often be found
/ extremely difficult to understand and follow the wealth of participial forms that drops from a Ho's lips. As Hoffman puts it : " Often and often, he ( i. e. any foreigner) will have to acknowledge to himself that he does not know what his interlocutor is driving at, though every word in the sentence sounds familiar to him". The following rule, which Hoffman gives, will be found useful in converting English sentences into Ho. It may appear rather roundabout, but experience will soon show that it is really the shortest and safest cut. " First, translate your subordinate clause into a complete Mundari ( we substitute "" Ho " ) proposition ; then, cut off the copula and the pronominal subject ; and finally, place the remnant thus obtained in its proper place in the principal proposition." As already stated, the pronominal subject-sign does not disappear altogether unless the subjects of the subordinate and principal sentences are identical.
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS.
87. Participial nouns are of two kinds, viz, animate participial nouns or nouns of agency, and inanimate participial nouns or instru- mental and objective noun.i. The first are formed by adding the simple £orms of the third personal pronoun to participal adjectives, and are used when such adjectives qualify pronouns of the third person instead of nouns. Thus :—
( 65 )
PRESENT. <t,,jiit'tnnk<i - He or she, they two, they, who is
or are bringing it. Emaitani, tmaitanking, emaitanko - He or she, they two, they, who is
or are giving to him. (lititiini, tyititanking, (jilitunko - He or she, they two, they, who is or
are sleeping, and so on through the whole series of participial adjectives given in
para. 85
•
Note — 7. It is usual to use these participial nouns in place of participial
•» adjectives followed by the several numbers of the nouns,
ILO - man and kui - woman. E. #., A'umbu sdbkii ( instead
of sdbki ho) kde hujuakand - the man who caught the
thief has not come, Bugite isindaiko dnjdteko dandiod -
• women who can cook well will be married soon.
2. In accordance with the rule in para. 55, the future form of the participial nouns must be used where the agent is is one whose custom, occupation or habit it is to do a particular thing, the object-signs invariably inserted in the future tense of transitive verbs being omitted. E. g. koei- a beggar, siui a cultivator, gupiko - graziers, disum bdgeko - emigrants.
3. Where the pronoun qualified is in the first or second person, these same participial nouns are used, but they must be preceded by the appropriate pronoun to indicate the meaning clearly. E.g. Aing dengdkedmei nddo dengd- ing dsietand - I who helped you, now ask for help, Am dengdk'd nddo dengam dsietand - You who helped him, now ask for help. Ape dengdkedpei nddope goeitand - You ( plural ) whom he helped are now killing him.
88. These animate participial nouns may of course be declined by the addition of postpositions in the same way as ordinary nouns.* Thus, Agukeditdte — to him who brought, dguekote — by or through the agency of those who will bring, emaikingtdete — from those two who gave to him, emlikod — of or belonging to those who had given to him, gititunipdre — in the vicinity of him who is sleeping, gitieanknpdete — from the vicinity of those who slept.
89. Inanimate participial nouns may be either instrumental or objective. Both classes are formed by the addition of ted to the participial adjectives, the difference being as follows. We have seen that, in the
, ( 66 ) I
absence of an animate object, all transitive verbs must insert the inani- mate object-sign e in the present, imperfect and future tenses, and that the forms of the participial adjectives corresponding to these tenses retain this object-sign. In the case of instrumental participial nouns, whether formed from transitive or intransitive verbs, this object-sign is omitted ; in the case of objective participial nouns, whether formed from transitive or intransitive verbs, it is retained. This only applies to the present, imperfect and future forms. As the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses do not insert the inanimate object-sign, the distinction between the instru- mental and objective nouns is indicated by using the intransitive tense- suffixes for the former and the transitive tense-suffixes for the latter, irrespective of whether the verb from which they are derived ^.s transitive or intransitive. There is, however, a slight difference bltween the mean- ing to be attached to these nouns when formed from transitive and intransitive verbs respectively. "When the verbal base is transitive, (i) the instrumental noun is formed by the addition of ted to the root plus the tense-suffix without the inanimate object-sign, in the present, imperfect and future forms, and to the root plus the intransitive tense-suffix in the perfect, past and pluperfect forms ; and it denotes a thing by means of which, or with which, an action is performed. E. g., jom to eat, becomes jomtanted — a thing which is being eaten with at the time of speaking, and jomkented — a thing which was eaten with at some past time.
(ii) the objective noun is formed by the addition of ted to the rflot plus the tense-suffix and the inanimate object-sign, in the present, imperfect and future forms, and to the root plus the transitive tense-suffix in the perfect, past and pluperfect forms ; and it denotes a thing which is the result of aa action, or the thing or material in respect of which an action is performed. E. g. jom becomes jometanted — a thing which is being eaten, and jomkedted — a thing which was eaten. When the verbal base is intransitive :-
(j) the instrumental noun is formed in exactly the same way as e described above, but it denotes not only a thing by means of which, or with which, an action is performed, but also a thing upon which an action is performed. E. g. dub — to sit, becomes dubtanted — a thing on which anyone is sitting at the time of speaking, and dubkented — a thing on which anyone was sitting at some past time.
(ii) the objective noun is also formed in exactly the same way as described above, but denotes a thing caused to perform an
( 67 )
action. E. </. iln/> becomes duhctanted — a thing which is being caused to sit down, and ilul>kt'<ltt'<i — a thing which was caused to sit down. Tim apparent anomaly presented by the use of the object-sign and the transitive tcnsc--ufH.\ with i'-tnus de- rived from an intransitive verb, is explained by the fact that the full forms are really dubiohieUmttd and dubiclukedted, i<-lii being, as explained in para. 68, a causative suffix which has the effect of converting intransitive into transitive verbs.
90. The distinction between these two classes of nouns, and between their meanings when formed from transitive and intransitive verbs respectively, has been explained at length, because these nouns are very frequently *used,J5y the Hos, and because facility in forming them will often h»ve the effect of extending one's vocabulary opportunely. The following series will help towards the understanding of the preceding rules which are apt to be confusing by themselves. Idi — to carry, will illustrate the rules as applied to transitive verbs, and rakab — to climb, will illustrate their application to intransitive verbs.
I. N. Iditanted
0. N.
1. N. 0. N.
Idietanted
Rakabtanted
Rakabetanted
I. N. Iditan taikented
0. N.
1. N. 0. N.
I. N.
0. N.
1. N. 0. N.
Jdietan taikented Rakabtan taikented
PRESENT.
A thing by means of which carrying is
being done.
A thing which is being carried. A thing upon which anyone is climbing. A thing which is being caused to climb.
IMPERFECT.
A thing by means of which carrying was
oeing done.
A thing which was being carried. A thing upon which anyone was climbing.
Rakabetan taikented A thing which was being caused to climb.
Idited Idieted Rakabted Rakabeted
FUTURE.
A thing by means of which carrying will
be done or is usually done, < . //. a basket. A thing which will be carried or is usually
carried. A thing upon which anyone will climb or
usually climbs, e. y. a ladder. A thing which will be caused to climb or
is usually caused to climb.
I. N. Jdiakanted
0. N. Idiakadted
1. N. Rakabakanted
0. N. Rakabakadted
1. N. Idikented
0. N. Idikedted
1. N. Eakabkentfd 0. N. Rakabkedted
I. N.
0. N. Uiledted
1. "N . Rakablented 0. N. Rakabledted
( ( 68 ) PERFECT.
A thing by means of which carrying has
been done.
A thing which has been carried. A thing upon which anyone has climbed. A thing which has been caused to climb.
PAST. A thing by means of which carrying was
done.
A thing which was carried. ,
A thing upon which anyone climfeed. A thing which was caused to climb.
PLUPERFECT.
•
A thing by means of which carrying had
been done.
A thing which had been carried. A thing upon which anyone had climbed. A thing which had been caused to climb.
Note. I — These instrumental and objective participial nouns are most commonly used in their future forms to indicate a general class of objects. E. g. jomted - a thing which is usually eaten with, i. e. anything to eat with, i. e. a fork or a spoon, and jometed - a thing which is usually eaten, i. e. anything usually eaten, i. e. an edible. Similarly, dubted - a chair, isinted - a cooking pot, isineted - afly cooked thing, sited - a plough, irted - a sickle, ireted - a harvest or a standing crop, hereted - seed or arable land, gitited - a bed, gitieted - anything caused to lie flat, Jidkuko sdbted • anything with which fish are caught, e. g. a fishing - rod.
2\ — It may be mentioned here that ted, with or without the inanimate object-sign, is also added to adjectives of quality to form inanimate nouns, the affect of the inclusion or exclusion of the object-sign being to distinguish between artificial and natural qualities. Thus — , Pundited - a white object, e. <?., chalk.
Pundieted - a whitened object, e. g. a whitewashed wall.
Loloted - a warm thing.
Loloeted - a thing which has been warmed.
( 69 ) CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.
91. These participles are formed by the addition of the ordinary postpositions to the participial adjectives, and are used to express subordi- nate clauses of time and place, in the same way as participial adjectives and nouns are used to express subordinate relative clauses. The post- positions in common use for this purpose are : —
(/) Re - meaning ' in ', ' while', ' at the time of ', ' in the act of ' 'as', otc., and denoting simultaneity between the principal and subordinate verbs. E,t y., Gititan taikenre tdkdtaeny
kumbukedd - I stole his money while he was asleep. i (ii) Jto — also meaning ' in the act of ', ' just as ', ' at the moment
of ', ' along with ', etc., and having the same denotation as re. E. y., Gomke Jiujulo mdndi dgueme — Bring the dinner
as soon as the master comes. The use of lo in this connection
i
is comparatively uncommon.
(Hi) Te — meaning * by ', * by means of ', etc., and used to express subordinate instrumental or causal clauses. E. g., Nidd nidd gitite dimsi dim si paitibu paiti daid — We are able to work every day because we sleep every night.
Added to the past participial adjectives, te forms a past parti- cipial form which is used in exactly the same way, and as commonly, as the well-known Latin construction denoting priority of state or action over that expressed by the principal verb. E. </., Bdbd dgukedtee rudeand — Having brought the paddy, he went back.
(iv) Chi — used in the same way as te to foim past participles. E. y. Bdbd idikedchi hujurudeand — After taking the paddy, he came back.
With both te and c/«, the ' d ' of the past tense-suffix is very often omitted, the above examples being ordinarily rendered agukete and idikechi.
(v) Ete— meaning ' from ', * since ' etc., and denoting continuity of state or action from the subordinate to the principal verb. E. g. Tdmkiete kding nelkid — I have not seen him since I beat him.
(vi) Red— meaning ' as regards ', ' regarding ', 'of, ' about ', ' so
far as is concerned', etc. is merely introductory. E.g.
fdkd emetanredlany kapdjid—Let us talk about the giving of the money now. Ted is commonly used instead of red with
(vii)
f
participial adjectives, but never with nouns. E. g. Ote
ndmeted marang Gomke cliikand kde kdjikedd — So far as the
getting of the land is concerned, the Deputy Commissioner said nothing.
Tdte, pdte, tare, pare, tdete and pdete — are used with the same meanings as with nouns — see Chapter III. E. g., Jonomlentdteny senotand I am going to the place where I
v\as born. Tdkd emledingtdre tdkding I returned him the money in the
very place where he had given
it to me. Two tigers came out ^rom near
the place wher?s I had been
sleeping.
emurdaid *
Aing gitilen taikenpdete bdrid kuld king oleand- king
EXAMPLES.
1. • En band totfkii bar tdkdte
u&re dkiringakadd
2. Kumbuean uriko hdrkotan tai-
kenre kumbukoing sdbkedkod
3. Gitil idikented okonred
4. Amd kacherire chimin olko
taikend
5. Dongolte senoeankotdete sumang
bar hoking rudakandking
6. Aing kdjiadme kdjim aiumkedd
chi
7. Ai mdakad ddru otetaingre
taikend.
8. Chakad kdjietanree goeand
9. Anri mdrauledi kedkite tdmiclii-
kid.
10. Aing emadme tdkdte chikanam
kiringkedd
11. Ale senotan senotanlo niddeand
12. Gusind gititan taiken odre kum-
buko bukeddko
The man who shot that bear has
sold the skin for two rupees. I caught the thieves as they were
driving off the stolen cattle. Where is the basket in which sand
was taken away ?. How many clerks were there in
your Court ?. Only two of the man who went to
Chaibassa have returned. Did you hear what I said<toyou ?.
The trees which he has cut were
on my land.
He died in the act of telling a lie. He called the man who had breached
the embankment and had him
beaten. What did you buy with the money
I gave you ?.
Night fell while we were yet jour- neying. The thieves made a hole in the wall
of the room in which the owner
was sleeping.
13. Am tiisiii'H'tiiii lij<i ii
14. Aidge disum bdgekete Asdmtee
senoeand
15. Akod mindi m,'»»nko jomko
taikt'n kuld hdturenko holdko jdlontkid.
16. Aing gard kutire tingutan
taikenre isu purd hedegeleko botaing chetanteko dpireand.
17. Paiti chdbdkete odtee senoeand
18. Am oletan tmikenteding nelkedd
19. ' En otere paiti paitietankom
neldaid chi
20. 'Am mo#rd ndmkedtdete hdtu-
tam chimin sangingd
Who gave yon the cloth which you
am wearing ?. After leaving his own country, ha
went to Assam. Yesterday the villagers trapped the
ti^er which used to eat their
sheep and goats. Whilst I was standing on the bank
of the river, a large number of
•wild duck flew over my head. He finished his work and went
home.
I saw what you wer^ writing. Can you see those man who are
working in that field ?. How far is your village from the
place where you found the dead
body ?.
CHAPTER XIV.
PASSIVE VOICE.
92. The Passive Voice is used very sparingly, the active form being preferred whenever a sentence can be transposed without affecting its meaning. As indicated in para 45, the letter "o" is the sign of the passive voice except in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses of the indicative mood, where the active intransitive tense-suffixes are used. Only transitive verbs can take the passive voice, and there are of course no direct or indirect objects. The following is a complete conjugation of the passive voice of em - to give, only the first person singular being given under each tense.
- emotanding - I am given.
- emotan taikending - I was being given.
- emoding - I shall be given.
- emakanding - I have been given.
- emeanding - I was given.
- emlending - I had been given.
PRBSBNT TENSE IMPERFECT „ FUTURE „ PERFECT „ PAST „
PLUPERFECT „
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - emokding
- I may be given, let me be given.
f ( 72 )
CONDITIONAL MOOD - emotanredoing - If I am given.
IMPERATIVE ,, - emome - Be you given.
emoben - Be you two given.
emope - Be you (plural) given.
INFINITIVE ,, - emo - To be given.
PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - emotan, emotan taiken, emo, emakan, emean,
and emlen.
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - emotani, emotankiny, emotanko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - emotanted, emoted, emakanted, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES • emotanre, emeante, emlenete, emored, emakan-
tdte, etc.
— 7. Only the present tense of the conditional ».mood has been given, but the other tenses are formed quite regularly, only differing from the active forms given in para. 74 in the omission of the inanimate object-sign le" and the insertion of the passive-sign 'o' between the root and the tense-suffix. The use of veo and honang with the passive voice is exactly the same as in paras. 75
and 76. \
2. The perfect participial adjectives and their corresponding
nouns of agency are very commonly used where separate adjectives of quality do not exist. E. g. dandiakan kui — a married woman, chirdakani — an accused person, rdpud- akan arsi — a broken mirror, pereakan chain — a full water- pot, isu sirmdakani — a very old person, sedriakani — an adult. Where separate adjectives of quality do exist, the use of the perfect participial form implies that the quality is artificial or the result of human endeavour. E. g., leser — sharp ; fosgra&w— sharpened ; sibil — sweet, sibilakan — sweetened ; hende — black, liendeakan — blackened.
3. There are no participial instrumental nouns in the passive
voice. The objective nouns have the same meaning as the active objective nouns, e. g. emoted-a. thing that is usually given — is exactly the same as emeted, and heroted — a thing that is sown — has the same meaning as liereted.
4. The passive verb jonomo — to be born, always takes len instead
of ean as its past tense-suffix. E. g. jonomlende — he was born.
( 73 ) EXAMPLES.
1. Hdtvtapg jdpdrt /«»//' i-liuiltin,- Has an elephant over been seen near
ncl,'<inti clti your village?
2. Atpakan kdfdtam >n<w<i Your swollen log will be cut off.
3. Isu t'lkdtf lij'ifalt1 itkidakand Our clothes have been washed very
badly.
4. Jdnd kding emoreo, hujuding Even if I am given nothing, I will
come.
5. A lea hdtnete Hnyitan yard ne The river which is now flowing
tirmd dnjedod from our village will dry up this
, year.
6. Undure gatlakan danddkuldiny 1 found the wounded hyaena in a
ndmkid cave.
7. Bairtee tollenredo, kde ueand If he had been tied with a rope, he
lionany would not have fallen.
8. Isu diany nuko jd chuildo kdko Those who drink much rice-beer
mundaod will never be rich.
9. Tdmeante hord kutire Idyeeand He was beaten and left on the side
of the road.
10. Kui pochodte dolentdre ne At the place where the woman had maiom pereakan lijdiny been raped, I picked up this halanyledd cloth full of blood.
CHAPTER XV.
• REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.
93. Reflexive verbs are those forms of transitive verbs in which the subject performs an action for or to itself, i. e., those in which the subject and the direct animate object are identical ( c. f. Note 1 to para. 49. ). They are formed by the addition of n to the root when the latter ends in a vowel, and by the addition of en when the root ends in a consonant. The following are examples :—
Agu • to bring, becomes dyun - to bring oneself.
Em - to give ,,
13 ai - to make, ,,
lam - to strike, „
Jir - to fan, „
Abuny - to wash, „
Atom - to move, ,,
- to give ,, (tain - to make oneself, to pretend. tauten - to strike „ jii'fit - to fan „ abunyen - to wash „ dtotnen - to move oneself, to get out of the way
74
Dul - to pour, becomes dulen Achu - to engage, „ dchun
Ord - to bathe, „ ordn
- to pour over oneself.
- to engage oneself.
- to bathe
Note — Owing to the transferability of parts of speech, the formation of reflexive verbs is not confined to verbs. Thus, the noun dasi - a servant, becomes ddsin - to make oneself a servant, to serve, and the adjective hapd - quiet, becomes liapdn - to keep oneself quiet, to be silent.
94. The conjugation of these reflexive verbs is quite regular. The intransitive tense-suffixes are used, and the n or en, as the c,a.se may be, is dropped in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses.0 Below will be found a full conjugation of the present indicative of emen with the 'first person singular of the other tenses and moods.
INDICATIVE MOOD- PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 1st Person - Ementandiny - 1 am giving myself.
2nd „ - Ementanam - You are giving yourself.
3rd „ - Ementande - He or she is giving himself or
herself. Dual 1st „ - Ementandlany - You and I are giving ourselves.
Ementandling - He or she and I are giving our- selves.
2nd „ - Ementandben - You two are giving yourselves. 3rd „ - Ementandkiny - They two are giving themselves. Plural 1st „ - Ementandbu - You and I are giving ourselves. Ementandle - They and I „ „ „
Ementandpe - You are giving yourselves. Ementandko - They are giving themselves.
• Ementan taikendiny- I was giving myself.
2nd „ - 3rd „
IMPERFECT TENSE FUTURE TENSE PERFECT TENSE PAST TENSE PLUPERFECT TENSE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
f CONDITIONAL MOOD
IMPERATIVE MOOD
- Emending
- Emakandiny
- Emkendiny
- Ernlending
- Emenkding
- Ementanredomy
- Emenme Emenben Emenpe
- I will give myself.
- I have given myself.
- I gave myself.
- I had given myself.
- I may give myself, let me give
myself.
- If I am giving myself.
- Give yourself.
- Give yourselves.
- Give yourselves (plural).
INFINITIVE MOOD - /•;//»<•/< - To give oneself.
I'AUTIOIPIAL ADJECTIVES - Emrntnn, <//«•///«// /.//£,-//, ••//«.-//, em-
iikitit, i mken, and emlt-n.
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - Ein<'iititiii,i-iin-niiiiikiny,ementankO)*ic* PARTICIPIAL INSTRUMENTAL NOUNS- Ein>-n< /tented, emki-nt, <.;, etc.
CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Ementanre, emenred, emkente, em-
lentdre, etc.
RECIPROCAL VERBS.
95. Reciprocal verbs are those forms of transitive verbs in which two or moVe individuals, or two or more sets of individuals, reciprocate the same action towards one another. They are formed by inserting the consonant p after the first vowel of the root. Examples are : —
Em - to give, becomes epem - to give to each other or to one
another.
tapdm - to strike each other. kapdji - to speak with each other, to
converse.
kupuli - to question each other. nepel - to see each other.
napdm - to find each other. dapdrom - to meet each other. kipinny - to buy from each other, to trade. upudub - to show each other. japyar - to converse.
These verbs only take the dual and plural numbers, but are otherwise conjugated regularly with the intransitive tense-suffixes, no direct or indirect object-signs being inserted. The following is a complete conjugation of epem in the present indicative, the other tenses and moods being illustrated by the inclusive dual of the first person.
INDICATIVE MOOD— PRESENT TENSE.
Tdm |
- to strike |
Kdji |
- to speak |
Kuli |
- to question |
Nel |
- to see |
Nam |
- to find |
Ddrom |
- to meet |
Kiriny |
- to buy |
Udub |
- to show |
Jagar |
- to talk |
96. |
These verbs |
Dual - 1st person epemtandlang - You and I
epemtandling - He or she and 2nd „ epemtandben - You two 3rd „ epemtandklny - They two
Plural 1st ,, epemtandbu - You and I
epeititatidlt' - They ;ind I
2nd „ epemtandjw - You
3rd „ epemtandko - They
,1
are giving each other.
are giving one another.
IMPERFECT TENSE - epemtan taikendlang - You and I were giving each
other.
- epemdlang - You and I will give each other.
- epemakandlang - You and T have given each other.
- epemkendlang or epemeandlany - You and I gave
each other.
PLUPERFECT TENSE - epemlendlang - You and I had given each other. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - epemkdlany - You and I may give each other,
let you and I give each other.
CONDITIONAL MOOD - epemtanredolang - I£ you and I are giving each other. IMPERATIVE Mood - epemben - Give each other.
epempe - Give one another (plural). INFINITIVE Mood - epem - To give each other. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - epemtan, epemtan taiken, epem, epemakan, epem-
ken, epemean and epemlen. ,
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - epemtank'mg, epemtanko, etc. PARTICIPIAL INSTRUMENTAL NOUNS - epemtanted, epelnted, epemkented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - epemtanre, epemtan taikenred, epemkente,
epemlentdete, etc.
EXAMPLES.
1. Jirubenkdle
2. Jirented dguaingme
3. Goentanree sdbeand
4. Uiukentee gitieand
5. Lokee baintand.
6. Kdam abungakanredo, entorsd
abungenme
7. JSelkedingte, chikanrede ukund
8. iSingi satub tingulen taikenko
isuko idgdeand.
9. A'tomlenredoko, kdko tegdeand
honany.
10. Auriincf iu jdked dlope hundind
11. Nepelredolang, kipirmgdlang
12. Fdben paitire depengdpe
May we warm ourselves at the fire.
Bring me a fan.
He was caught in the very act of
committing suicide. Having covered himself with a
blanket, he went to aleep. He is pretending to limp. If you have not washed yourself, do
so at once. Why does she always hide herself
when she sees me. The men who had been standing all
day were very tired. If they had got out of the way, they
would not have been trodden on. Don't assemble together until I call
out. If we see each other, we will trade
together. Help one another in all things.
!.'{. T<i/>«iik>ni oiitiiiiti dkiringakadd 1-1. '/'ii/iiiinki'iikt) fnhkftt !:<>(,• D<>n- yoltt> nil hum
!."». Alinii k,ij'<ijik,'nf<i>;-n;i bdye- akadd
16. I loin kirin;il<-(l liiTi-iniko n/>-
i/(li/!'t<t/i<i
17. .\/<ir<i/><i Gomke epter <^e Pa-
tore ctiKiktdii
18. Sapdkikente isuldng jupvrikend
19. KnnJntkinyteperanytantaikenre » fiikd idiketeng nireand
20. *I)apdromeancki engd ondo
kuihonte cheperebkendkiny.
I have sold flic :*1 joining house also. ' 'atdi t lion- jn-rsons who struck one
another and take them to Chai-
bassa. I have left it in the place where
he and I conversed together. Tiny are showing one another the
seed which they bought yesterday. The Deputy Commissioner has given
§the disputed land to Pator. They assumed each other's names
and became great friends. While the two thieves were quar-
reling amongst themselves, I
ran away with the money. The mother and her daughter kissed
each other after they met.
CHAPTER XVI.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
97. Irregular forms of any kind are uncommon in agglutinative languages. This is because these languages are, as a rule, character- istic of a nomadic state of society where language must necessarily be intelligible to many, though their intercourse be but limited. Defi- nite ideas are connected with certain sounds, and it is essential that this connection should be constant. There are accordingly only a very few irregular verbs in Ho, and, as in most languages, the verb " to be " is the most important of them. In English, that verb may be either a mere link-word or a real predicate, but, in Ho, the copula or verbal- izing agent d is used as a link-word, while mend is the predicate form. The difference between the two is similar to that between the Bengali 33 and ^TftW? which is explained as follows by Beames in his " Grammar of the Bengali Language " : "The matter may be mad^e clear by observing that there are, in many Aryan languages, two verbs meaning " to be ", one of which is a mere copula or linking-word used to connect other words in a sentence where no special stress is laid on the idoa of being, while the other is used when the idea of being is an important element in the sentence ". Thus, Ne dirt nambald - This
stone is heavy. En ddru
- That is a high tree. Donyolre mended
- He is in Chaibassa. A'sar odrt> mend - The bow is in the house.
( ( 78 )
98. The conjugation oE the verb mend meaning " to be ", " to exist ", "to be present", is as follows. It will be noticed that, in the present tense, the subject-sign is inserted between the root and the copula : —
INDICATIVE MOOD — PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 1st Person Mendingd - I am, I exist, I am present.
2nd „ Mendmed - You are, etc.
3rd „ Mended - He or she is, etc.
Mend - It is, etc. ( same form for dual and
plural ). Dual 1st Person Mendlangd - You and I are, etc.
Mendlingd - He or she and I are, etc. '
2nd „ Mendbend - You two are, etc. (
3rd „ Mendkingd - They two are, etc. o
Plural 1st Person Mendbud - You and I are, etc.
Mendled - They and I are, etc. '
2nd ,, Mendped - You are, etc.
3rd „ Mendkod - They are, etc.
FoTORE TENSE - Hobdoding, hobdoam, hobdode, etc. I, you, he or she will be. Tainding, tainam, tainde, etc. I, you, he or she will remain. PAST TENSE - Taikending, taikenam, taikende, etc. I, you, he or she was, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD - Mendingredo - If I am, etc.
- Hobdoredoing - If I will be, etc.
- Taikenredoing - If I was. IMPERATIVE MOOD - Tainme - be present, remain.
Tainben - „ ,, „ (dual).
Tainpe •- „ „ „ (plural).
INFINITIVE MOOD - Mend - to be. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - Mending, mendme, mende, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - Mendi, mendking, mendko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - Mendted, Iwbdoted, tainted, taikented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Mendingre, mendmetdre, tainred, taikente, etc.
99. Mend is also commonly used to express possession, the con- structicn being similar to the familiar Latin one with esse. Thus, the sentence " I have a goat " may be rendered :- Aind miad merom mended = ( literally, ' my one goat exists' ). Miad merom mendcdtaing - ( literally, ' one goat is mine ' c. f. form given
in para. 39. )
Aingtdre miad merom mended - ( literally, ' in me one goat is ' ). Of these three forms, the first is the one most commonly used, but the other two are quite idiomatic, and the last is often very useful.
( 79 )
) Note — When nn'iin means "to have" or "to possets", th«- participial
nouns of agency formed from the present tense nre
>iK'i/(if,'ni. thtftdtenking and ///</, <i/- />/•<>. /•,. </.
Memiku tiikdko mimed - Those who are present will receive
money. fdkd mendtenko bdbdko named - Those who have money
will get paddy. The forms for the other tenses do not differ. Thus, ,
Hold taikeni kcdime • Call the man who was present
yesterday. Miindi taikeni liuringlekde emadingd - The man who had
• cooked rice gave me some.
*
100. The antonym of mend is 6ano, the negative particle kd being used in sentences where only the copula d is necessary. JE. y. Ne gqrd kd ikird - This river is not deep. Aivd kdtu kd leserd - My knife is not sharp.
Aled nature penainko bangkod - There are no weavers in our village. Eu disunite hord banod - There is no road to that country.
The conjugation of banod is as follows :-
INDICATIVE MOOD — PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 1st Person bangingd - I am not, I am absent.
2nd „ bangmed - You are not, etc.
3rd „ bangded - He or she is not, etc.
banod - It is not ( same form for dual and
plural ).
Dual 1st ,, banglangd - You and T are not, etc.
banglingd - He or she and I are not, etc.
2nd „ bangbend - You two are not, etc.
3rd „ bangkingd - They two are not, etc.
Plural 1st „ bangbud - You and I are not, etc.
bangled • - They and I are not, etc.
2nd „ bangped - You are not, etc.
3rd „ bangkod - They are not, etc.
FOTDRE TENSE - kding hobdod, etc. • I will not be, etc. PAST TENSE - kding taikend, etc. - I was not, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD - bangmgredo - If I am not, etc.
kding hobdoredo - If I will not be, etc.
kding taikenredo - If I was not, etc.
( 80 )
IMPERATIVE MOOD - bangme - be absent.
bangben - ,, „ (dual).
bangpe - „ „ (plural}. INFINITIVE MOOD - bano - not to be, to be absent. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - banging, bangme, bangde, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - bangdi, bangking, bangko, PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - banoted, kd liobdoted, kd taikented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - bang-mere, bangingtdte, kd taikenred, etc.
Note — Bano is also the negative o£ mend used to express possession. Thus, " I have no norses " may be translated — A.ina sddomko bangkod ,
Sddomko bangkodtaing f
Aingtdre sddomko bangkod.
Of these, the last form expresses the meaning most clearly, I think. The second is also clear, but is apt to be unwieldy, while the first may be taken as meaning " my horses are absent ". Used in this sense, the participial nouns of agency are banoteni, banotenking and banotenko.
EXAMPLES.
1. Ddru bano disum - A country without trees. Sir mend disum - A country with forests.
Kuldko taiken disum - A country that used to contain tigers.
2. Engdteaputeteking bangking lion - A child without father or mother,
i. e. an orphan.
3. Mende od ndndiakand - The house he lives in has fallen down.
4. A ingtdre jometed banod - I have nothing to eat.
5. Burn terpd mend hdturee - He is hiding himself in the village
ukuntand beyond the hill.
6. Abu ote banotenko ringdre - We who have no land will die first
siddtebu gojod in time of famine.
7. Mendingre dguime - Bring him while I am hore.
8. Kdam taikenreng paitichdbd- - I have finished the work in your
*akadd absence.
9. Undim amlekd kde eseld - Your young brother is not so fair
as you are.
10. En isu purd uriko taikenitdre - That man who once had very many nddo jdnko bangkod cattle now has none at all.
101. The two verbs men and metd, both meaning " to say ", " to tell ", appear to be variations of the same original root. Men is used
for all ordinary purposes, >//,/<» ol)jrrt-si<m lias to l>r in-, Tied. Tli<> of both words. INDICATIVE MOOD. PBBSBNT.
Mcnetanding - 1 am saying ( it ) -
IMPERFECT.
Mem-tun taikending - I was saying
FOTURB.
Mi t't'>iin<i.
PERFECT. Menakadding PAST. Menkedding.
PLUPERFECT. Menledding SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Menekding
CONDITIONAL MOOD. Menet'inredoiny, etc.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Meneme
Meneben
Menepe
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Men
PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES.
Menetan, mene^
Menked, etc.
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY.
Menei, meneking,
Meneko, etc.
employed wlii-m-vcr an indirect following is a complete conjugation
metanttandi/i// - I am saying to ( tell- ing) you
metaitandiny - I am saying to ( tell- ing) him.
metatntan taike tiding - I was telling
you.
metaitan taikendiny - I was telling
him.
metamding. metaidiin/.
metadmeding. metaidiny.
metamkdiny. metaikdiny.
metamredoiny, etc. metairedoiny, etc.
metaime. metaiben. metaipe.
metd.
metamtan, metai, metadme, etc.
jnetami, metamkim], metamko, etc.
( 82 )
r
PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS.
Menetanted, meneted, metamtanted, metaited,
Menkedted, etc. metadmeted, etc.
CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.
Menetanre, menetdre, metamtanre, metaitdre.
Menkedte or mente, etc. metadmete, etc.
Note — 1. Men and metd are very similar to the Latin inquit, the idiom in both cases requiring the use of the oratio recta. For example, the sentence "He said he would come tomorrow," is translated " Gadding liujud mentee menkedd," which is literally equivalent to " I will come tomorrow,' having said, he said ". The construction is simple enougty, but care will be required at first in making the necessary transpo- sitions of words when converting the indirect to the direct
form of speech.
•
2. The same rule must be observed in translating subordinate
clauses beginning with "in order that," and similar expres- sions, the construction being again similar to the Latin in that the subjunctive mood is used. E. g. Ne lijd rookd mente, - Put this cloth in the sun in order
jet ere ememe that it may become dry.
Alokdpe eperang - In order that you may not quarrel,
mente, oteng I shall divide the land between
hdtingaped you.
Aid erding dandiikd - Gora killed Soma in order to marry
mente, Gora Somde his wife.
goekid
3. Mente also means 'because' in Ho, its evolution being
apparently as follows. The sentence : Kdam trikend mentee tdmkedingd means literally "Saying 'you were not present', he beat me". This may be freely rendered : " He beat me because I was not present," and mente thus became a mere causal suffix, the direct form being abandoned and the same sentence rendered : Kding taikendmentee tdmkedingd. The latter is the form used now for causal clauses. E. g. Taiomtem seterlend - You will not get anything because
mente, jdnd kdam you arrived afterwards.
ndmed Bangdedmente, alom » Do not accuse him because he is
chirdid absent.
( 83 )
Caudal clauses may also be expressed by two separate co-ordinate sentences, or by the use of nedmente or endmente (therefore) \\itlitlic principal sentence. Thus, the first example given above may bo rend'-red cither : Tiii<»ntem seterlend ; jdnd kdam mi/ma, or taiomtem sflerlend, i minti /iff jdnd kadm named.
I. The verb k-'iji - to say, to speak, to talk, to tell, may of
course be used instead of either men or metd.
•
5. There is one important exception to the general rule that
metd is only used when an indirect animate object has to
, be expressed. I refer to the very common question which
» the student will have to use often : " What do you call
this ? " This is rendered : Ned chikandpe (chindpe ) metd ?
So also /-'// (fi'irn chindpe metd - What do yon call that tree ?
Sarjom ddnile metd - We call it a sdl tree.
102. The next irrogular verb is holdo - to become, the conjugation of which is as follows : —
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT - hobdotanding - I become (or) am becoming. IMPERFECT - hobdotan taikending - I was becoming. FUTURE - hobdoding - I shall become.
PERFECT - hobdakanding - I have become. PAST - hobdeanding - I became.
PLUPERFECT - Iwbdlending - I had become. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - hobdokding - I may become. CONDITIONAL MOOD - hobdoredoing - If I become.
IMPERATIVE MOOD- akanme ~\
, * (used only in conjunction with
akanben > At
i some other word.)
akanpe J
INFINITIVE MOOD - Iwbdo - to become. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - liobdotan, hobdo, hobdean, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - hobdoi, hobdotring, hobdoko, etc.
I
PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - hobdotanted, hobdoted, Jwbdeanted, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Jwbdotanre, hobdotdre, Iwbdeante, etc.
— ]. The future tense of hobdo is used to express necessity or compulsion, the principal verb being in the infinitive moodf with the postposition Padded. /£.//. Ant smote hnbdod - You will have to go, you must go. Mere duty or obliga- tion is expressed by the infinitive followed by the word
( 84 )
f
lagdtingd. E.g. Am seno lagdtingd - You ought to go, it is your duty to go.
2. The imperative of hobdo, which is more or less an auxiliary verb, is only used in conjunction with other words to express continuity of action from the present into the future until circumstances cause a cessation. E. g. Senakanme - keep on going, Tiguakanme - continue standing, Hapdnme - be quiet, Hapdakanme - be quiet and continue so.
105. The last verb of this class which we shall notice is kd - to be unwilling, to say ' no '. Its conjugation is somewhat irregular in forma- tion.
ii
INDICATIVE MOOD
i
PRESENT • kdingdtand, kamdtand, kdedtand - I, you, be or she is unwilling. FUTURE - kdingd, kamd, kded - I, you, he or she won't. 0
PAST • kdingdeand, kamdeand, kdedeand - I, etc. would not. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - kdingdkd, kamdkd, kdedkd - I, etc. may be unwilling. CONDITIONAL MOOD - kdingdredo, kamdredo, kdedredo - If I, etc. am
unwilling.
IMPERATIVE MOOD • alomd, alobend, aloped - Don't do that. INFINITIVE MOOD - kd - to be unwilling. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - kdingdtan, kam, kdedean, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS or AGENCY - kdedi, kdedkwg, kdedko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - kaingdtanre, kamdtare. kdedeante, etc.
Note — Ea • to be willing, to say 'yes ', to agree, is conjugated like an ordinary transitive verb, i. e. edetanding, ededing, edkedding, etc. Edadmede chi - did he say ' yes ' to you, did «he grant your request ?.
EXAMPLES.
1. Pancham emte hobdod - You must pay your rent.
2. Engamapumtcking mandting - You ought to obey your parents.
lagdtingd
3. Menkedtedpe aiumkedd chi - Did yon hear what he said ?
4. Hdttengtand mentee menkedd - He said he was going to the market.
5. Ai menetantaikenre bisian bing - As he was speaking, a poisonous
hudkid snake bit him.
6. Erdtam ondo misam tdmiredo, - Tell Birsa that, if he beats his wife
Gomke tamichimed mente again, I shall have him beaten. Birsd metaime
7. Epser ute alinn .«/V<j int-ntt- Sotna
kdjiatmt
8. Jiipiii'itiiii'ildiii/ini'iiti' <nn lmn<j-
iii, r,' enitamiiKj s,iiti[»iid.
9. Niddre dding asieredo nu </<ti-
kd'imj int'iit*' chut n. netdre bdy<
10. /1m huyln M/tnda mendmed IHCH- Iftig atkdrkedd inendo ndd<> ,j<i c/iuildo kding sdria»t<i
Ti-11 Soma not to cultiv:it« the dis- puted land. lir-causd we an- I'rionds, I shall look
after your wife while you an-
away. Leave the waterpot here so that, if
I want water during the night,
I can have a drink. I thought you were a good .Mum la,
but now I shall never believe
you.
CHAPTER XVII.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
104. Impersonal verbs are those which denote subjectively certain physical feelings or mental conditions. The following is a list of the more common verbs of this class.
1. JBobiur
2. Boro
3. Client d
4. Gamang -
5. Giu
, 6. Hdrob
1. Hdsu
8. Uidting
9. Kurkur
10. Ldgd
11. Lolo
12. Rabang
13. Rdnsd
14. Renge
15. Rusurusu •
16. Sanang
17. Sdri
18. Suku
19. Tetang
20. Urgum
to be giddy to fear to be jealous, to be ticklish, to be ashamed, to be satisfied, to be ill. to be sorry to be angry, to be tired, to be hot. to be cold, to rejoice, to be hungry, to have ague, to desire, to believe, to be pleased, to be thirsty, to be warm.
. ( 86 )
When conjugated impersonally, the pronominal sign denoting the person who experiences the physical or mental condition is inserted in the verb in the same way as the animate object-sign of transitive verbs. All these verbs may, however, be construed personally, in which case the pronominal sign is added as an ordinary subject-sign to the verb, the latter being treated as intransitive. Both conjugations are quite regular, and it will suffice therefore to give the first person singular of the tenses
of the indicative mood in each case.
r
IMPERSONAL. , PERSONAL.
PRESENT.
Sukuinytand - It pleases me ... Sukutanding - I am please^.
IMPERFECT. «•
Sukuingtan taikend • It was pleasing Sukutan taikending - I was being
me ... pleased.
FUTURE.
Sukuingd - It will please me ... Sukuding - I will be pleased. PERFECT.
Sukuakadingd - It has pleased me ... Sukuakanding - I have been pleased. PAST.
Sukukedingd - It pleased me Sukueanding - I was pleased.
PLUPERFECT. Sukuledingd - It had pleased me ... Sukalending - I had been pleased.
105. It will be obvious to the student that some of these verbs may be used objectively, e. </., a person may be pleased with, ashamed of, or angry with, some other person apart from the subjective feeling which he may himself experience from some inanimate cause. In such cases, the verb is of course transitive, but the animate object must be expressed (c. /. para. 69 ante ) by the full form of the personal pronoun so as to avoid confusion with the impersonal construction. Thus,
Sukidngtand - It pleases me or 1 am pleased. Sukuaingtande - He is pleased with me or I please him. Giukedmed - It shamed you or you were ashamed. Giuadmede - He was ashamed of you or you shamed him. Kurkurid - It will anger him or he will be angry. Kurkuraiding - I will be angry with him or he will anger me.
106. The word atkdr (to think, to feel) may also be used im- personally with the suffix lekd (like, as though, as if) to express an impression which does not amount to a positive conviction, or a bodily feeling that is merely similar to one produced by some other cause. Lekd takes the place of the copula and forms a kind of conjunctive participle. E. g.
( 87 )
Jd ijnttldo kdlmj inlkilfkd atkdrtmj- - I am under the impression tliat I
l.uid never saw him.
(ii'jofiinlekd at k<iri ni/tand - I feel as if I am dying.
Tdinli-idekd hold at kdrktdti«j<i - I felt yesterday as if I had been
beaten.
EXAMPLES.
1. Kd hii/H sanaiujkid - He did not wish to come.
2. Hold uldd inn ti'titii<}kcdiii<jd - I felt very thirsty night before last.
(isuiny tetanyeand)
3. Kurkurkite (kurkureante) odetee - He got angry and went out of the
cieand house.
4. Kurkuraite odetee oleand - He got angry with him and went
out of the house.
5. Renyemetan taikendmente jome- - I gave you food because you were
tediny emadtned feeling hungry.
6. Rdvsdkoisu sirmdko jidd - Those who are always joyful will
live many years.
7. Amd bo liasuingtanre alope - Don't make a noise while my head
kdkald is paining.
8. Mermeredo beoleme • If you find it bitter, spit it out.
9. Balbalinykd mentee uiuakattd - He has covered himself up in order
to sweat. 10. Rusurusulekd atkdrinytand - I feel as if I am going to have ague.
CHAPTER XVIII.
COMPOUND VERBS.
107. Compound verbs are of two kinds, viz.
( i ) those in which some modification of the primary idea conveyed by the principal verbal root is expressed by the ad'dition of some other root, the whole compound being conjugated as a single transitive verb. Such compounds may sometimes be rendered into English literally, but more often some circumlocu- tion is necessary ; and •
( ii ) those which are not strictly speaking compounds, but which, consist of two separate verbs so closely connected together as practically, and in some cases actually, to form compounds.
r 88 )
108. In the first class of compound verbs, the modifying roots generally bear the same meanings as when they are used separately. This method of forming compounds by the junction of two separate roots is very common. The modifying roots may sometimes have meanings different from those attaching to them when standing by themselves, and, in a few cases, they have even ceased to be used independently. Common examples of roots used to form compounds while retaining their original meanings are : — ete ( to begin ), bdge ( to leave ), chdbd ( to finish ), goe (to kill), ndm (to find), Id (to exceed ), sare (to remain over )} rud ( to return ), pere ( to fill, be full ), sidd ( first ), pdrom ( across ), der ( before), japd ( close ), and filing (long ). Examples of « roots so used with meanings different from their original ones are :- idi,fdyu, ondo, torsd, ddrd, and ichi ( vide, para 68 ) ; while examples of modifying ropts which have become mere suffixes are : — urum, urd, tud, 6d, £a6, urui, utar, aid ( atdn ), and renyd. The meanings to be attached to the lasUtwo classes will be apparent from the following examples, which include also sentences illustrating the use of the first class : -
1. Holde paitietekedd - He started work yesterday.
2. Nelkedingrem olbdgekedd - You stopped writing as soon as
you saw me.
3. Jomchdbdketee oleand - He finished eating and went out.
4. Hdturenko kuldko tdmgoekid - The people of the village killed the
tiger by beating him.
5. Adean tdkding tegdndmkedd - 1 found the lost rupee by treading
on it.
6. Senoean hdteteng nuldakadd - I have drunk more than I did at
the last market. ,
7. Aiub lagite huringlekd mdndiing - 1 have eaten and left a little cooked
jomsareakadd rice for the evening.
8. Am ote emrudte ( emurdte) - You will have to give back the land.
hobdod
9. Swrpangko tuperekid - The wasps stung him all oVer.
10. Birsd idmsiddkedingd - Birsa struck me first.
11. Jm% niddre gardko senpdromed - They will go across the river
to-night.
12. Gard pdromderingme - Cross me over the river first.
13. f)dr-ue mdjapdetan taikend - He was cutting the tree close to the r ground.
14. Sddome toljilingakaid - He has tied the horse with a long
rope.
15. Kerdkoe tdmidikedkod - He kept on beating the buffaloes.
16. Hdtute ididymm.' - Take him to the village and bring
him back.
17. Seta Ittuiondomeredo, entorsd - If the dog bites you again, shoot
ttihii/inu' him at once.
18. Tisimj I >»inju(tt>ni senoredo, ned - If you go to Chaibassa today, take
iditorsdetne this as you go.
19. Tinny Donyoltem senoredo, - If you go to Chaibassa todny, bring
tni tdkdrcd lijd dyuddrdeme a cloth worth one rupee as you
come.
20. Chiminang dnjdte hold data, ne - Have this work finished as soon as
pniti chdbdichieme possible.
21. Kumbu*; nelurumkid - He identified the thief by seeing
him.
22. Ode jutidurumkedd - He recognised the house by touching
it.
23. Am hujuurdre odteny rudd - When you come back, I shall return
home.
24. Ned Donyolte iditudeme - Take this to Chaibassa and come
back.
25. Toteeante kuld nirbdkedde - After being shot, the tiger ran about
here and there.
26. Eed dyutabeme - Bring the medicine quickly.
27. Birkerd losodree juduruieand - The bison was stuck fast in the mud.
28. Birhoko yoeutarkidko - The savages (i. e. those living in
the forest) killed him completely.
29. Hord kutire taiatdmn, - Wait at the side of the road until
I come.
30. Ainy itinakad mdndijoinrenyd- - Be sure and eat the rice I have
erne cooked.
\(,te — J, The student should notice the fine distinction between Nos. 2 and 3, and between Nos. 16, 18, 19, and 24.
2. There is one more root forming common compounds, 'which are, however, highly idiomatic and are only used among the Hos themselves. This root is ;'<wn, and its resultant compounds are conjugated intransitively. It must be distinguished from the ordinary rootyom (to eat) which is not used to form compounds. Umbulre dubjompe means, as near as it can be translated, "Sit at ease in the shade", and Sadom idijomme means "Take the horse if you please".
( 90 )
109. The second class of compound verbs occurs in conjunction with the verbs nel (to see) and seno (to go). Take the sentence : " I saw him coming." This may be rendered in Ho in three ways :- (i) hujutan- ing nelkid. (ii) hujutanreng nelk'td, and (iii) nelhujukiding. The first form is a contraction of hujutandeng nelkid - he is coming, I saw him. The second form is simply the conjunctive participial form (see para. 91) and is the one most commonly used. A distinction may be noted here between hujutanreng nelkid and Imjutanloinq nelkid. The former means " I saw him coming," and the latter " I saw him as I was coming," the use of the postposition lo indicating that the participial clause modifies the subject, and not the object, of the sentence. The third form is a pure compound, the principal verb being placed first with its tense-suffixes,
etc. added to the second verb- «
•
110. We may next consider the sentence : " He went to bring
wood." This also may be rendered in Ho in three ways, viz., (i), sdn dguekding mentee senoeand, (ii) sdn dgutee senoeand, and (iii) sdn dguti- eand. The first of these forms has already been explained in Note 2. to para. 101, its literal meaning being " he went in order that he might bring wood." The second form contains the root, with the locative of motion and the subject-sign of the third person singular, preceding the principal verb. The third form is the idiomatic one. It is really a con- traction of sdn dgute i (shortened form of the third personal pronoun singular) senoeand. The e of the locative of motion is supplanted by the pronoun, and the principal verbal root disappears, the tense-suffix and copula being added to the other verbal root. This disappearance of the root sen or seno is quite common. It occurs, for instance, in the forms okontemiand - where are you going ? and okontekoeand - where did they go ? All persons and numbers of the personal pronouns may be used in the same way, the resultant forms being ting, telang, teling, tebu, tele, tern, teben, tepe, ti, teking, teko. A curious contraction in the third person singular of the past tense may be noticed. Instead of sdn dgutieand and okontieand (where did he go ?), the Ho will say sdn dgutid and okontid, which are of course also the forms for the future tense, and may mean either V he went to bring wood " or *' he will go to bring wood," and " where did he go ? " or " where will he go ? " respectively.
EXAMPLES.
o 1. Diang jd chuildo kding nelnukid - I never saw him drink rice beer.
( 2. Sitanloing nelkid - While ploughing, I saw him.
3. Sitanreng nelkid - I saw him ploughing.
4. Nelukedmere aingge ueand - As I saw you fall, I fell myself.
( 91 )
5. Doli Mini irt,inlm nslko'i - Come, let us see them catting tho
paddy.
6. Mitndd dipititumi - Ho is going to bring the Munda.
7. Jomtingtan inikcini - I was going to eat.
8. /:'n</<it, iif-ltid - lie went to see his mother. .
9. Setdre epscr nte neltid - He will go to see the disputed land
in tho morning. 10. Gapd am neltekod - They are going to see you tomorrow.
CHAPTER XIX.
NUMERALS.
I. CARDINAL NUMERALS.
111. In the introduction to his " Mundari Grammar", Hoffman says : " The Munda's arithmetical notions are of course very simple. He has as many cardinal numbers as he has fingers on both hands, or toes on both feet, riz. ten distinct forms. And, as though he had summed up fingers and toes into one grand total, he has adopted a special word for twenty, viz. hist" This is a pleasant conceit, but it is not altogether satisfactory except as an explanation of the genesis of numeration in most known languages. In English, for example, there are also ten distinct separate forms for the first ten cardinal numbers, the remainder being compounds of those ten. Thus " fourteen " is " four ten, " " twenty " is " two tens ", and so on. In Ho, the cardinal numerals are almost exactly the same as in Mundari, an important difference being, however, that, whereas th<j Mundari numerals have been largely displaced by Hindi ones, even in tracts where the latter language is comparatively unknown, the Ho numerals are still used freely throughout the Kolhan, where Hindi numerals would not ordinarily be understood.
112. The numbers from 1 to 10 inclusive, and 20, have separate forms. Between 10 and 20, the numbers are formed by adding the first nine numbers to the shortened form for 10, viz. gel. Thus, gel miad (ten and one, i.e. eleven), #<?£ taruid (ten and six, L e. sixteen). The numbers above 20 are calculated in stages of twenties. Thus 40 is hdr hisi - two twenties ; 60 is ape hisi - three twenties, and so on. Between 20 and 40, or between 40 and 60, the numbers are formed by adding the first nineteen numbers to hisi ( twenty ) and hdr hisi ( forty ; respectively. Thus, hisi geled (twenty and ten, t. e. thirty ), hisi tjel moid ( twenty and ten and five, t. e. ' thirty-five ) and Mr hisi <jel trilid ( two twenties, ten and eight, i. e. fifty eight ). The following list will make tho matter clear : —
( 92 )
1. miad, mid, mi. 30. Am geled, Jiisi gel.
2. bdrid, bar. 31. hisi gel miad, hisi gel mi.
3. aped, ape. 32. hisi gel bdrid, hisi gel bdr.
4. upunid, upun. 40. bdr hisi.
5. moid, moi. 41. bdr hisi miad, bdr hisi mi.
6. tumid, turui. 50. bdr hisi geled, bdr hisi gel.
7. aed, ae. 60, ape hisi.
8. irilid, iril. 70. ape hisi geled, ape hisi gel.
9. area, are. 80. upun hisi.
10. geled, geL * 90. upun hisi geled, upun hisi gel.
11. gel miad, gel mi. 100. moi hisi.
12. gel bdrid, gel bdr. 110. moi hisi geled, ?»oi hjsi gel. 17. gel aed, gel ae. 120 turui hisi. '
20. Am. 130. turui hisi geled, turui hisi gel.
21. Am miad, hisi mi. 200. gel hisi.
22. hisi bdrid, hisi bdr. 300. gel moi hisi.
Note — 1. It is doubtful whether the Ho imagination can rise much beyond 200, and it is almost certainly limited by 4UO, which is equivalent to twenty twenties or the square of the highest distinct numeral. I have noticed that the Hindi sau (a hundred) is used in some places, but it is really only understood by the literate Hos.
2. The word dosi is commonly used for 30 besides Am geled.
3. It will be seen that most of the numerals have two forms
and it is important to know when each should be used. It is a safe rule always to use the full form except in the following cases when the shortened form should be used :—
( i ) In the formation of the compound numerals, when only the last number retains the full form, e. g. gel bdrid (twelve), bdr hisi (forty), ape hisi gel tumid (twenty-six) and turui hisi geled (one hundred and thirty"). , (ii) Both simple and compound numerals take the
shortened form before words denoting measures of any kind, such as gaudi (a league or kos~), tdkd (a rupee), mukd (about 1£ feet in length), pati (two seers) and bisid (twenty seers). E. g.
£
Nenete Dongol gel bdr gaudi mend - Chaibassa is twelve
leagues away from here.
( 93 )
Ape kiai gel fund 1<iknimj mtui'i - I will give him
seventy six rupees.
Upun mukdren kuld taikend - It was a six foot tiger,
(iii) In enumerations of men, families and cattle, th<« words ho, od and l>o being used in apposition. E. y. Airtd kodhou mi ho (mi ho kodhon) kuilmiiko itjum li»k<> mendkod.
I have one son and four daughters.
Ne hdture bdr hisi gel od Hoko ondo gel moi od Pevamko mendkod.
• There are fifty Ho and fifteen Tanti families in this village.
• Ape bo kerdko ondo ae bo mindiko kuld goeakadkode. The tiger has killed three buffaloes and seven sheep.
II. ORDINAL NUMERALS. i 113. The only ordinal numerals in use are sidd (first) and etd
(second). For the higher numbers the following constructions are used,
and the sense is generally made clearer by pointing out the object where
possible.
Bdrid ddru taiomred mdeme
, Cut the third tree. Sana ddru bagekete miad maemc
Upun hoko taiomreni dquime )
Bring the fifth man. Up'in hoko bdyekedkote miad dyuime )
Ti.<ingete ape md Myekete taiom betare rudd - He will return on the fourth
day from now.
III. PROPORTIONAL NUMERALS.
114.' Proportional numerals are formed by adding ditvd to the shortened forms of the cardinals.
Once |
misd, midinjd |
Eleven times |
gelmiduim |
Twice |
... bdrduvd |
Twenty times |
hisidittKi |
Thrice |
apedutfd |
Twenty nine times... |
hisiareduyd |
Four times Five times |
upunduyd moidund |
Thirty times Forty times |
hi»iyeldu%d, dosiduyd bdrhitiduyd |
Ten times |
gelduftd |
Fifty times |
bdrhisigelduvd |
IV. DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS.
115. Distributive numerals are formed by reduplicating the first syllable, or the whole, of the cardinal numerals. One each ... Mimiad, miad miad, mipiad Two each ... Bdbdrid, bdria band
r 94 >
Three each ... Apapid, aapid, apid apid. Five each ... Moimoid, momoid, moid moid. Ten each ... Gelgeled, gegeled, geled geled.
Note—I. The preceding forms are used adjectively and, when placed before words denoting measures of any kind, are shortened in the same way as the cardinal numerals. E. a. Bdbdr ( bar bar ) tdkding emadkod - J gave them two rupees each. Upupun (uupun, upun upun) pati bdbdko dguakadd - They have brought four Data's ( eight seers ) of paddy each.
2. When used adverbially, the postposition te, which is used
commonly in the formation of adverbs of manner, is added to the full forms of the distributive numerals. Thus, Mimiadte, miad miadte, mipiadte - One by one. Upupunidte, uupunidte, upunid upunidte - four by i I four. Tuturuidte, turid turidte - Six by six. Araredte, aaredte, area aredte- Nine by nine.
3. The first syllable of other adjectives is similarly reduplicated,
where a repetition of the adjective might be expected, to express quantity, e. g. Hupuring ddru sumang mdeme- Only cut small trees. Maparang hdkuko dgukom - Bring several big fish.
V. FRACTIONAL NUMERALS AND APPROXIMATIONS.
116. The only fraction known to the Hos is <d/d-ahalf. E.g. Miad chdndu tdld - a month and a half ; en joete tdld emaingme - give me half that fruit. For all other fractions, recourse must be had to circum- locution in which the word handting ( a part or a share ) is employed. E. g. Upun handtingete am mi handling ondo ako ape handting baite hobdod - You will have to make one quarter and they will make three quarters.
117. Approximations may be expressed either by putting together two numbers which are near the exact number, or by suffixing lekd ( like) to any one number in the vicinity of the correct one. E. g.
Hisi hisi moi hoko holdko hujulend - About twenty or twenty five men
came yesterday.
Tumi aeduvding senoeand - I went six or seven times.
r Moi hisile'kd* lioko mendkod - About a hundred men are present.
« Upunduvdlekde tdmkedingd ' - He struck me about four times.
( 95 ) CHAPTER XX.
DIVISIONS OF TIME, COINS, WKIGHTS AND MEASURES. I. CHRONOLOGY.
118. The Hos have no chronology of their own. Their word sinn<i (a year) means the period between one MAge Parab and another. This festival can only be celebrated after all the rice crops have been cut and stored, and it affords a suitable opportunity for propitiator) sacrifices in i order to secure prosperity in the coming year. It is thus a sort of New Year festival. Familiarity with the Courts has, however, bred some knowledg'e of the Sambat era which began in the year 57 B. 0. «
II. MONTHS OF THE YEAR.
»119. The names of the months come from the same source and are as follows :-
Baisdk... April - May Kdrtik ...October - November
Jet ...May - June Agan ...November- December
Asiit- ...June -July Pus ...December- January
Sdoan ...July - August Mdg ...January - February
Bddo ...August - September Pdgun ...February - March
Asin ...September - October Chait ...March -April.
As the Ho word (chdndu) for a ' month ' also means ' moon ', it is evident that their month is a lunar one, i. e. from one new moon (nuil-i clidndu) to another, or from one full moon (full clidndu) to another.
120.* The division of the year into months is, however, exotic, tin- indigenous method being one of seasons. Having regard to climatic conditions, some divide it into ral>any dipli - the cold weather, jele s'm<ii or lolo dipli - the hot weather, and jaryi dd - the rains. Others divide it according to the stages which cultivation has reached, e. <j. /«>;•.•> or roni - the sowing season, karul <///<// - the time for reploughin^, /<•<> or sardi - harvest time, and so on. Others, again, will fix time by reference to one of the many festivals or to the blossoming of the sdl tree. The ideas of an aboriginal as to time and distance are notoriously, and in practice inconveniently, misleading. Ho can seldom recollect relatively beyond a single year, and usually utilises some well known occnrren as e. </., a land settlement, to fix the period of any particular event* concerning himself. A woman, who was quite unable to say how old her* child was, replied, however : Marany j»tl rdpmlmii rirmdree jonomUnd - he was born in the year the big bridge was broken. Further enquiry
( 96 )
showed that she meant the bridge over the River Roro by which Chaibassa is entered, and the point was thus cleared up.
III. DAYS OF THE WEEK.
121 The word fora ' week ' is hat which also, and in fact primarily, means ' a market '. These markets take place once a week at convenient centres and are a most important feature in the social economy of the Hos. There, they dispose, at a discount, of their surplus stocks of rice, and purchase, at a premium, the only luxuries that their lives know ; there are born the romances of the young which often terminate, there also, in forcible, though not ordinarily unhappy, unions ; and there a man, and a woman also for that matter, may get gloriously, intoxicated
in convivial company for a comparatively small consideration.
(
122- The days of the week are corruptions of the Hindi and Uriya forms and are all followed by betar or betarang, both meaning ' a day '.
Sunday ... JKuibdr Wednesday ... Budbdr
Monday ... Sombdr Thursday ... Gurbdr
Tuesday ... Mangalbdr Friday ... Sukurbdr
Mangarbdr Saturday ... Sanibdr.
There are various words for ' day ', viz. din, betar, betarany, md, bar, and hula. ' One day ' is musing, contracted from mid ( one ) and singi ( the sun ). ' Two days ' is similarly bdrting, but ' three days ' is ape md or ape din, ' four days ' is upun md or upun din, and so on.
IV. PARTS OF THE DAY
123. The usual division of a day into hours, minutes aad seconds is unknown. Though a Ho reckons his months by the moon, he uses the sun to fix the tiiie of the day. If one wishes to ascertain at what time any particular event took place, the form of enquiry is : Chimtang singi taikend - how much sun was there, i. e. what time was it ? The Ho will then point to the position of the sun in the sky at the time and say : nimtang singi - so much sun as that, or, if the time was the same as that at which the conversation is taking place, he will say : , imtang singi - so much sun as this, i. e. as there is now. Besides the natural divisions according to the sun's position, the Hos also divide their day according to the work to be done, the meals to be eaten, etc. The following is a fairly complete list in proper chronological order :-
Simrd der - Before cockcrow. Simrd - Cockcrow.
( 97 )
Mir inir - Just before daylight when objects fir.it become distinguishable.
Ang, idang - Dawn.
Singiol, fingitur - Sunrise. i - Morning.
Uri apaur sinyi - Cattle yoking time, /'. e. about 8 A. M.
li.isimn ill/ili - Time when food left over from the night before (ttdti - stale) is eaten, t. e. about 9 A. M.
Marany basin in ili/>li - About 10 or 11 A. M.
Tikin, nutlisingi - Noon.
Tdrdringi, kochesingi - Afternoon. •
Hatang da singi - Time when water is boiled for the cooking of rice, i. <•.
, about 4 P. M.
Singihasur - Subset. Ur\ ader dipli - Time when cattle are driven home, i. e. shortly after
sunset.
Aiuo - Evening. Mir mir - Twilight. Nidd - Night.
Mdndi jom dipli - Evening meal time, i, e. about 8 P. M. Giti dipli - Sleeping time, i. p. about 9 P. M. Tdld nidd - Midnight, Sin pi satith - The whole day.
V. COINS, WEIGHTS AND MEASURES.
124. As in all primitive communities, barter used to be the only method by which commodities were exchanged among the Hos. It is curious, however, that they should have separate words of their own for "to buy. " ( £trtn gr ) and "to sell" ( dkiring ), but should use the Hindi bodol for " to exchange ". With the gradual opening up of the country, the use of Indian money has become general, and the words given in the list below have been adopted as part of the language. The only known weights refer to paddy, and the measures of length and distance are comparatively few.
_»
MONEY - Poisd - a pice, d#d - an anna, siki - four annas, bdr siki - eight
annas, ape siki - twelve annas, tdkd - a rupee, mi tdkd tdld or turui tiki - one rupee and eight annas.
WEIGHTS - Konrd - about £ seer, poild - about 1 seer, pati - about 2 seers , ( in some parts only 1 seer ), bisid - about 20 seers, kundi • about 20 seers, panti or purd - about 10 maunds, bdndi - an indeterminate measure as there are small and big bandis, but generally about 10 maunds.
MEASURES - Mid sarsar - a finger's breadth, bitd - a span, muM - a cubit or about 1£ feet, mundrad - the length from the elbow to the closed hand, chandang - a pace, gaudi - about 3 miles or the distance a newly-plucked leaf would dry up in ( c.f. Hindi ddlbhangd kos ), basiam hord - distance which can be travelled from sunrise to about 9 A. M., tikin hord - distance which can be travelled up to noon, mid giti hord or musing hord - a whole day's journey, mid obor jiliny - a man's whole length with arms extended, ( mid tupuing or mid sar - the distance an arrow can be shot, mid sded -
the distance that can be covered in one breath.
t,
VI. POINTS OF THE COMPASS.
125. Only the four cardinal points are known and a»9 as follows : —
< North ... Kd t dchamrd
South ... Bokanduki East ... Singiol West . . . Singihasur
The first two are derived from the position in which a dead body is placed prior to being burnt, i. e. with the legs (kdtd) to the north and the head ( bo ) to the south. The last two are derived from the rising ( ol ) and the setting ( hasn ) of the sun ( singi ).
CHAPTER XXI.
SEPARATE POSTPOSITIONS.
126. These postpositions differ from those which have been considered in Chapter III in that they are never suffixes, but always occupy an independent position in the sentence immediately after the noun or pronoun which they govern. If the latter represents an animate being, it may be either genitive or accusative in case, but, if inanimate, it takes the accusative only. These separate postpositions are for the most part formed by the addition of the simple postpositions re and te, indicating rest and motion respectively, to roots which, when used by themselves, are primarily adjectives, nouns or verbs. The following are • those most commonly in use :—
(i) Aerre and derte - before, ahead of, in front of. Alangd (alang) derre mended - He is ahead of us. Gomked (gomke) derte dlom senod •• Don't go in front of the master.
( i i 99 )
(ii) Taiomre and taiomte - behind, after.
Aivd (aim/) taiomiv 1,11,11,1? - Remain behind me.
M"i nui tiiiomtf ItujuHH' - Come after five days, (iii) Chetanre and chetante • on, upon, on the top of.
Od clu'tanr" ne dnbtan taifc,-nde - The bird was sitting on the house.
Bum chetantee rakabeand - He climbed to the top of the hill.
(iv) Liitarre and Idtarte }
e i / , , ,. ( - below, under, underneath. ouotfr* and subate )
Ddru subdre lijdred od tinguicltieme - Pitch the tent under the trees. En ddru Idtarte doldbu nired - Come, let us run under that tree, (v) Bit<\rre and bitdrte - in, inside.
Unda bitdrre bdnd mended - The bear is inside the cave. Od bitdrte pdrkom dgueme - Bring the bed inside the house, (vi) Bdrre and bdrte - out of, outside.
s Bir bdrreng ndmkedd - I found it outside the forest.
Disum bdrte senome - Go out of the country, (vii) Japdre zndjapdte - near, close to, in the vicinity of.
Hdtujapdte bdndd mend - There is a bandh near the village. Kuld liuang japdtee hujulend - The tiger came close to the pit. (viii) Pdromre and pdromte • across, on, or to, the other side.
Aid kerdko yard pdromre mendkod - His buffaloes are on the other
side of the river. Aid kerdko gard pdromteko senakand - His buffaloes have gone across
the river, (ix) Idldre and tdldte - among, in, or to, the middle of.
Bingko tdldree gititan taikend - He was sleeping among the snakes. Birrenko tdldteng senaeand - I went among the savages, (x) Hordte - by, through, by means of ( used with persons only ).
Ni (nid) hordte kumbuko sdbeand - The thieves were caught by this man. Aivd ddsid (ddsi) liordte amd olakadted kuleme - Send your letter
through my servant, (xi) Lagite - for, on behalf of.
Ned am (amd) lagite, end ai (aid) - This is for you and that for him.
lagite mend. *
Aing (aivd) lagite darkdse olkedd - He wrote the petition on my
behalf, (xii) Jokd - up to, as far as, for.
Tdld niddjokd aingloe taikend - He was with me up to midnight. Bdrid lidtu bagekete ondo m'uid lidtu - They carried the baggage as • jokd bdromko gokedd far as the third village »
Mi chdndujokd senokam - You may go for one month.
CHAPTER XXII.
<:•'• , v
ADVERBS.
127. There are four classes of adverbs, viz. Adverbs of Time, Place, Quantity and Manner. Most of the separate postpositions may also be used as adverbs, the difference being that, as adverbs, they have no connection with nouns or pronouns, but simply modify the verbs with which they are used.
I. ADVERBS OF TIME.
Tising |
- today. |
Gapd |
- tomorrow. , |
Meang ~) Gapdter ) |
- the day after tomorrow. , |
Ter gapdter |
- the day after gapdter. |
« |
|
Hold |
- yesterday. |
Holdter |
- the day before yesterday. |
Ter holdter |
- the day before holdter. |
Honder betar |
- a few days back, i. e. within 10 days. |
Honderman ~) Holdman ) |
- some days further back than honder betar. |
Honder honder |
- within the year, but further back than honderman |
or holdman. |
|
J\Te sirmd ^ |
|
j$e kdlom ) |
- this year. |
Kdlom |
- next year. |
Ter kdlom |
- year after next. |
Md |
- last year. |
Misad sirmd |
- year before last. |
Ter misad sirmd |
- year before misad sirmd. |
Huju chdndu ") Mulu chdndu ) |
- next month. |
Senoean chdndu ~j |
- last month. |
Nirean chdndu ) |
|
Dimsi \ |
|
Dimsi dimsi j Angomutid |
- daily, every day. |
Angogapd J |
|
'Hdt mutid |
- weekly, every week. |
' Chdndu mutid |
- monthly, every month. |
Sirmd mutid ~) Sirmd sirmd ) |
- annually, every year. |
Choild, chuild |
- when ? |
|
Chimtd, chimitd |
1 |
|
[ Chimtang, chimitang ) |
- at what time ? |
|
Nd |
- now. |
|
Imtang, imitang |
- at this time. |
|
Nimtang, nimitang |
- at that time (pointed out ). |
|
Enang |
- then, at that time ( some time back ). |
|
Jd dipli Jdimtang |
! |
- at any time, at any moment. |
Jd chuildo ka |
) |
• |
Jdimtango kd |
i |
- at no time, never. |
Jd betar , |
- any day. |
|
Jau jav • |
) |
|
Jauge |
- always. |
|
Bardbari |
) |
|
Misd misd |
- sometimes, occasionally. |
|
Itu dund |
- often, frequently. |
|
Itu purd duvd |
- very often. |
|
Likd likd |
- almost immediately afterwards. |
|
Ndai, ndev |
- after a little while. |
|
Entorsd |
- at once, immediately, without any delay. |
|
Aerte |
- before. |
|
Aerre |
- in future. |
|
Jaiomtc |
- after, afterwards, later. |
|
Siddre |
- at first. |
|
Munure |
- in the beginning, in the time of one's ancestor!. |
|
Chanabre |
\ |
- in the end. |
Tundure ' |
5 |
|
Musing betar Mid dipli |
i |
- once upon a time. |
En betar |
- at that time. |
|
Auri |
. |
- not yet. |
Chimin jdked |
- up till then, until. |
|
jVo' jdked |
- up till now. * |
Note — /. Auri is invariably followed by the future tense of the verb. E.g. Hujuakande chi - Has he come? Aurie hujud - He has not yet come.
<?. Likd likd, ndai and ndett, are only used with reference to future time, as e.g.> likd likde hujud — he will arrive soon. Such a sentence as " I arrived in the village and he came
( 102 )
II.-
Nere, nenre, netd, netdre
Nepd, nepdre
Nete, nente, netdte
Nepdte
Neneie, netdete
Nepdete
Enre, entd, entdre
Enpd, enpdre
Ente, entdte
Enpdte
Enete, entdete
Enpdete
Terre, tertd, tertdre
Terpd, terpdre
Terte, tertdte
Terpdte
Terete, tertdete
Terpdete
Okonre, okonte, okontdre
Okonpa, okonpdre
Okonte, okontdte
Okonpdte
Okonete, okontdete
Okonpdete
Jdre, jdpdre
Jdpdre
Jdte> jdtdte
Jdpdte
Jdete^ jdtdete
Jdpdete , •
Sabentdre
Sabenpdre
Sabentdte
Sdbenpdte
Sabentdete
Sabenpdete
Jomtipdre
Lengdtipdre
shortly afterwards " would be rendered : seterlend ondo huring gdri taiomtee hujulend.
-ADVERBS OF PLACE.
Hdtureng
- here, in this place.
- hereabouts.
- hither, to this place.
- to this direction.
- hence, from this place.
- from thrs direction.
- there, in that place.
- thereabouts.
- thither, to that place.
- to that direction.
- thence, from that place.
- from that direction.
- yonder, in yonder place.
- somewhere yonder.
- yonder, to yonder place.
- to somewhere yonder.
- from yonder place.
- from somewhere yonder.
- where, in what place ?
- whereabouts ?
- whither, to what place ?
- to what direction ?
- whence, from what place ?
- from what direction ?
- anywhere at all.
- anywhere abouts.
- to anywhere at all.
- to any direction.
- from anywhere at all.
- from any direction.
- everywhere.
- in every direction.
- to everywhere.
- to every direction.
- from everywhere.
- from every direction.
- on the right hand.
- on the left hand.
( 103 )
Chetanrf, chctantdre \
_. > - above, on top.
Sirmare, nrmatdrt \
Cli, /(////r, rliitntihit,' )
> - above, to the top. j
airmail, nrmdtate
Chetanpdr? }
- somewhere above. Sirmddre \
- below, nnderneath.
Sirmdpdre
!
Ilitiirrf - within, inside.
/>',j,/, - without, outside.
Japdre - near, close by.
Pdronn; % - across.
Tdldre • - in the midst.
At^re - ahead.
Taiomre - behind.
Doeare - behind, at the back.
Knndamre - behind.
Dananyre - behind (some opaque object).
Chanabre - at the end.
Note. — All the adverbs from Idtarre onwards may be varied in the same way as chetanre and sirmdre according as rest in, or motion to, any particular place or direction is meant.
III.— ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.
/.<»/, pnrd - much Chiminang - how much ?
Isupura I _ yery mnch Iminang - that much.
Timbd Niminang - this much, so much.
/luring • - a little Ondo - again.
Note. — Approximations to the above quantities are obtained by the addition of lekd. Thus, iminanglekd - about as mnch as that.
IV.— ADVERBS OF MANNER. 1*28. There are several kinds of Adverbs of Manner.
(t) Words used adverbially without any suffix except, in some cases, the emphatic enclitic ge.
Isu - very. Likd - almost.
Bode - quickly. Sutnang
o/ j. - - -iu o j
Damage - in vain, without oumoa
rhyme or reason.
Sdrige - truly, certainly. Misd torsd - altogether, without
leaving anything.
)
\ ' only' alone- )
( 104 )
(it) Adverbs formed by the addition of the instrumental postposition te to other parts of speech. The following are a few examples : —
Anjdte - quickly.
Borote - timidly.
Hambalte - with difficulty.
Ldrte - easily.
Kdkaldte - loudly.
Maite - softly.
Sudete - slowly.
Ldnddte - laughingly,
Ldndidte - lazily. '
Rdvsdte - joyfully, gladly.
Rukute - tremblingly. ,
Sukute - voluntarily.
Achakdte - suddenly, unexpectedly. <
Akachakdte - mysteriously.
Kvrkurte - angrily.
Oborte yiti - to sleep on the stomach.
(Hi) Adverbs formed by the addition of the suffix lekd (like), with or without the postposition te, to other parts of speech. The number of such adverbs is indefinite.
Chilekd, chilekdte - how, in what way ?
Nelekd, nelekdte \
w 7 2 i '4 I - in this way.
Nekd, nekate ]
Enlekd, enlekdte \
I - in that way. Enkd, enkate )
Terlekd, terlekdte \
}- in the same way as that yonder. Terdleka, terdlekdte }
Okonlekd, okonlekdte - like what, in what manner ?
Jdlekd, jdlekdte - in any way at all.
Ddsilekd, ddsilekdte - like a servant, in a menial way.
Hichirlekd (te) - like the lightning.
Holdlekd (te) - like it was yesterday.
Aiumlekd (te) - audibly.
Hdpdlekd (te) - quietly.
Atkdrolekd (te) - perceptibly.
Nelolekd (te) - visibly, obviously.
Gojolekd (te) - mortally.
( 105 ) CHAPTER XXIII.
CONJUNCTIONS, INTBRJBCTIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS PARTICLES.
129. There are not many Conjunctions in Ho and those that do occur are sparingly used. The following is a fairly complete list : —
Ondo - and.
A,1///,', entedo - and then.
,]/, ndo - bat.
Nidmente - for this reason,
therefore. - for that reason, therefore.
Redo - if (used as suffix only).
Banredo - if not, or else, or.
Chi - or. •
Mente - because 1 ,
V (suffixes only.) O - also
EndmerAe
Enreo
l^iinreo
even if, notwithstanding, although, still.
INTERJECTIONS.
130. The following list is self-explanatory :•
Eld Ate, ated
A
Mdr
Dold, dol Ju
Hald
Haigore
Haind
Haindgore
Bapdri
Bapdrigore
Ocho, ochd
- hallo ! Is used to attract attention and conveys
also an order to approach.
- hallo ! Is used to attract attention purely and is
the ordinary sign of the vocative case. In some parts of the Kolhan, ated is only used in addressing males, the form atend being employed to, and among, females.
- hallo ! Is used to attract attention as in amd — you
there 1
- all right 1 Is used as an exhortation with the
imperative in addressing equals and inferiors.
- come along ! For its use see paragraph 80.
- go ! Is used only with the imperative of teno —
to go.
- hurrah ! Expresses joy or applause.
•- alas
Expresses physical pain or anger.
- alas 1 Expresses mental agony or distress. i
- take care 1 An exclamation conveying a caution.
( 106 ) MISCELLANEOUS PARTICLES.
131. These particles may be affirmative, negative, emphatic or indeterminate, and may also be either independent or enclitic.
Ed - yes.
Kd
•" no- Bano
\- perhaps. Torang \
Idu ondo - who knows ?
Kd chi - or not ? (
Kd ondo - certainly not.
Alo - a negative particle used as a prefix only. See paragraph 79.
Qe - an emphatic enclitic equal to " certainly," " of comse,"
and, when used with pronouns, conveying an almost reflexive sense. When used with a verb, it stands between the tense form and the copula. Distinguish, for example, Inige hujud — he himself will come, and Ini hujuged — he will certainly come.
J}o - also an enclitic equivalent to the Hindi to and possibly
derived from it. Has no definite meaning, but may usually be rendered by " indeed."
Derang - an independent particle standing at the end of a sentence
and implying uncertainty or lack of personal know- ledge. E.g. Hdtutee senakand derang — he has gone to the village I hear, but I do not know for certain.
Chimad, chiad - also an independent particle implying personal suspicion, but no knowledge either personal or acquired. E.g. Hdtutee senakand chimad — he has gone to the village I think, but I have no information on the subject.
Honang - also an independent particle, the use of which has been
explained in paragraph 75 ante.
( 107 ) , CHAPTER XXIV.
TERMS OF RELATIONSHIP, AMD CASTE AND TRIBAL NAMES.
132. The terms of relationship in common use among the Hos are extremely varied and intricate. The following is a fairly comprehensive list prepared on the basis of personal enquiries all over the Kolhan. The letters " m. s." and " w. s." mean " man speaking " and " woman speaking " respectively.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Father - Apu. fSon - Kodhon.
Mother • Engd. Daughter - Kuihon.
Parents - Engd-dpuking. Children - Honko,sitidko.
»
Elder brother (ra. s.) - Bauu. Younger brother (m. s.) - Undi.
Younger sister (w. s.) - Undikui.
Elder brother (w. s.) - Bauu. Younger brother (w. s.) - Undi.
Elder sister (w. s.) - Aji.
Elder sister (m. s.) - Aji. Younger sister (m. s.) - Misi
misierd, undikui.
Father's elder brother Father's younger brother Younger brother's son (m. s.) i Younger brother's daughter (in. s.)i Elder brother's son (m. s.) Elder brother's daughter (m. s.)
Father's elder brother's wife Father's younger brother's wife Husband's younger brother's son Husband's younger brother's daughter Husband's elder brother's son Husband's elder brother's daughter
Father's elder brother's son Father's elder brother's daughter Father's younger brother's son Father's younger brother's daughter
Father's elder sister l Father's younger sister | Elder or younger brother's son (w. s.)
- Gungu.
- Kdkd.
- Gungu.
- Homed, honherel.
- Honerd.
- Gungu.
- Kdki, gauing.
[- Gungu.
- Honsed.
- Honerd.
- Bauut undi.
- Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.
- Bauu, undi.
- Aji, mist, miiierd,
- Hdtom.
- Homon, homonkod.
Elder or younger brother's daughter (w. s.)- Homonkui.
Father's elder sister's husband j
I - Kumd. Father's younger sister's husband }
Wife's elder or younger brother's son - 6ra» gekod. Wife's elder or younger brother's daughter Gekui.
( 108 )
9. Father's elder or younger sister's son - Bauu, undi.
Father's elder or younger sister's daughter Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.
- Kumd.
10. Mother's elder brother \
Mother's younger brother / Elder or younger sister's son (in. s.) - Get gekod. Elder or younger sister's daughter (m. s.)- Gekui.
11. Mother's elder brother's wife
Mother's younger brother's wife Husband's sister's son Husband's sister's daughter
- Hdtom.
- Ge, gekod.
- Gekui.
12. Mother's elder or younger brother's son - Bauu, urtdi. Mother's elder or younger brother's
daughter
13. Mother's elder sister Mother's younger sister Younger sister's son (w. s.) \ Younger sister's daughter (w. s.) J Elder sister's son (w. s.)
Elder sister's daughter (w. s.)
14. Mother's elder sister's husband Mother's younger sister's husband Wife's younger sister's son Wife's younger sister's daughter Wife's elder sister's son
Wife's elder sister's daughter
- Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.
- Gungu.
- Gauing.
- Gungu.
- Housed^ honherel.
- Honerd.
- Gungu.
- Apoeng, kdkd.
- Gungu.
- Bon, honkod.
- Bonkui.
15. Mother's elder or younger sister's son - Bauu, undi. Mother's elder or younger sister's
daughter
16. father's father - Tdtd.
Father's mother - Jid.
Mother's father - Idtd.
Mother's mother - Jid.
- Aji, mm, mirierd, undikui. Son's son (m. s.)
Son's son (w. s.)
Daughter's son
(m. s.) Daughter's son
(w. s.)
Great grandfather^ Great grandson \
Great grandmother) Great granddaughter /
Jaii, jaiikod.
(Jaiikui for the daughters in all four cases).
17. Husband
- Berel,hdm. Wife
- Erd.
( 109 )
18. Wife's father - flonedr. Daughter's husband (m. s.)
Wife's mother - Handr. Daughter's husband (w.s.) Husband's father - Ilonedr. Son's wife (m. t
'Husband's mother - / lunar. Son's wife (w. s.) r
19. Wife's elder brother - Bauuhonedr. Wife's younger brother - Tend. Younger sister's husband (m. s.) - Ard. Elder sister's husband (ra. s.) - Tend.
20. Wife's elder sister - Ajiliandr. Wife's younger sister - Tfndkui. Ycmnger sister's husband (w. s.) - Ard. EldeV sister's husband fw. s.) - Tend.
2?. Husband's elder brother - Bauuhonedr.
Husband's younger brother - Iril.
Younger brother's wife (m. s.) - Kimin.
Elder brother's wife (m. s.) - Hill.
22. Husband's elder sister - Ajiliandr. Husband's younger sister - Iril. Younger brother's wife (w. s.) - Kimin. Elder brother's wife (w. s.) - Hili.
23. Wife's elder or younger sister's husband - Sardgi.
24. Husband's elder brother's wife - Aji Husband's younger brother's wife - Undikui.
25. Son's wife's father - Bdld }
o > -c > iu -DJLIJL j. (Same for daughter's
Song wife s mother - Bdlderd lv
0 , .. , -DJLiJLT husband's parents).
Son s wife s parents - Bdldhng
26. Father-in-law's elder brother - Gungu honedr. Father-in-law's younger brother - Kdkd honedr. Father-in-law's elder sister - ffdtom handr. Father-in-law's younger sister - ffdtom handr. Mother-in-law's elder brother - Kumd honedr. • Mother-in-law's younger brother - Kumd honedr. Mother-in-law's elder sister - Gungu handr. Mother-in-law's younger sister - Gauing handr.
27. Step-father - Kdkd. Step-son - Homed, Step-mother - Gauing. Step-daughter- ffonerd. Step-brother or half-brother - Bauu, undi. Step-sister or half-sister - Aji, miii, inisierd, undikui.
28. Husband's other wife - Hirum, ndtd-erd. Father's other wife (elder) - Gungu. Father's other wife (younger) - Gauing.
29. Relation - Hdgd.
Namesake - Sdki]
_. . . ,>(both regarded as relatives)
Friend - Jun\
<Note — 1. In the case of Nos. 6, 9, 12, 15, and 27 (latter half) in the above list, the term to be used varies with the compara- tive age of the speakers. Thus, if a father's elder brother's son was being addressed, the word banu would only be used if he was actually older than the speaker (see No. 2) ; otherwise undi would be the proper term. It should be noted that, between two women, only the term undikui can be used in addressing, or speaking of, a younger relative of any .of the degrees mentioned above. As between a man and a woman, the terms misi and misierd could be used, as well as undikui, in the same circumstances.
2. It will be observed that all the various relationships covered
by the English word " cousin " are expressed by the same Ho words as those used for uterine brothers and sisters. If a man says he is the elder brother (bauu) of another man, the next question is : Midlaireni chi Mkdgungureni (i.e. uterine or avuncular ?). He may be neither (see sept relationships mentioned below), but it would be unusual for a Ho to mention the sept connection to a foreigner.
3. In practice, all terms of relationship are spoken with a
possessive suffix. Thus, dpuing — my father, dpum — your father (suffix is me after a consonant), dpute — his father, and so on through the three numbers and persons. Though the possessive forms are, as a rule, suffixed to the term of relationship, there are a few terms in the list given in which it is infixed. Thus, " my elder brother's son " is Tioningsed and not honseding, and " his elder brother's daughter " honteerd and not honerdte. The terms in which this occurs are undikui, Jionsed, honherel, honerd, homonkod, homonkui, gekod, gekui, honkod, honkui and tendkui.
( 111 )
4. Besides the ordinary vocative case signs ate, ated and atend (see paragraphs 18 and 129), certain distinct forms are nsed in addressing relatives. The following are the most common : —
Apang, apangd - 0 father !
Eang, eangd - 0 mother !
Dddd - 0 elder brother !
/iiii, fnild - 0 younger sister !
The d in the altornative forms is the interjection men- tioned in paragraph 129. It may be added to all the • terms of relationship to form vocatives, e.g. djid — 0 elder
sister ! i
• 133. The Jewish custom of levirate, common also among many other Eastern races, exists among the Hos. The younger brother of a deceased husband has the first claim to marry the widow, the idea being that the family has purchased the woman by paying the bride-price. If the younger brother does not exercise his option and the woman marries someone else, the latter has to refund the bride-price originally paid for her. There are besides restrictions on the use of the names of certain relatives. A daughter-in-law and a younger brother's wife (kimin in both cases) are never mentioned by name. They are spoken to, or referred to, either as kimining — my daughter-in-law or sister-in-law, or Josephreni kimin — the wife of my son, or younger brother, Joseph. Conversely, a daughter-in-law will not address, or refer to, her father-in-law or mother-in-law by name. If she has no children, they are Iwnedring (my father-in-law) and handling (my mother-in-law) respectively. If she has children, they are kodtdtdte (the son's grandfather) or kuitdtdte (the daughter's grandfather), and kodjidte (the son's grandmother) or kuijidte (the daughter's grandmother), according as the eldest child is a boy or a girl. In the same way, a younger brother's wife will not address, or refer to, her husband's elder brother or elder sister by name. They are bauuhonednng and djihandring respectively. Another feature of these particular relationships, is that the dual number is used in addressing each other. Thus, kimining hujuben — come here my daughter-in-law, instead of kimining hujume, the form which one would naturally expect.
134. The relationship between two individuals is ascertained by putting the question : Chikaiam— what do you (call) him, or Chikamede — what does he (call) you ? If they are uncle (father's younger brother) and nephew (elder brother's son) respectively, the uncle would reply : Honing sediding — I call him elder brother's son, or Kdkdingde — he calls me
father's younger brother, according to the form in which the question had been put. The same construction holds good in speaking of two or more third persons, e.g. Samu M&rde chikaid — what relation is Samu of Mora's ?
Chipikdodking - How are those two persons related ?
Akoe chikdkoa }
7 ., . r - What relations are they of his ? Aiko chtkaid ]
135. It should also be mentioned that a system of sept relationship, similar to that which obtains in 'the Brahman gotrds, is in force among the Hos. The Ho tribe is divided into kills or septs which ar,e strictly exogamous, all the members of a kill being regarded as rslated by descent through a common ancestor. They will thus cal'i each other by one or other of the terms of relationship given above, the correct term being ascertained by tracing backwards until a common point is reached. For example, if two members of a kill meet for the first time, one will enquire : " What used you to call my father ? " If the other replies : " I used to call him bauu (elder brother)," the latter will call the first enquirer honingsed or lioninglierel (my elder brother's son), and the first enquirer will call him kdkding (my father's younger brother). The proper terms for the other members of each family will then be determined accordingly. The system is obviously somewhat esoteric and can only be illustrated in its simplest forms, but the Hos have no difficulty in applying it, and they observe the same restrictions in regard to the use of the names of certain kin as obtain in the case of blood relations.
136. The Ho equivalents of the names of the castes and tribes with which they have come into contact are interesting.
CASTB OR TRIBAL NAME. Ho EQUIVALENT.
1. Bhuiyd Buid
2. Bhumij Mutkan
3. Birwal Duvud
4. Bcstom Bastom
5. Brahmin Bame
{ Karpdbai Muchi
6. Ohamdr or Muchi \ Dumangbai Muchi
7. Chhatri or Rajput Rdjdhon, Rdjd
8. Dhobi Dobd
9. Dom Dom
10. Gareri Mindi gupii
11. Ghasi Gdnsi
( 113 )
12. Godla or Gom
13. Gond
14. Kaldl or Sunri
15. Kamar or Lohar
16. Kewat
17. Kliandwal
18. Kharid
19. Kumhar
20. Kurmi
21. Mahomodan
22. Mallah
23. Modi,
24. Muncld
25* Nap it or Ha jam
26. Santal
27. * Sarak
28. Tamaria
29. Tanti
30. Teli
31. Thatera
32. Uraon
Gau
f)urud
Sundi
Kamdr
Keovlo
Kundvar Gau (Gour)
Karid
Kunkal
Kurmi
tTnrku
Maid
Mudi
Mundd
Barandi
Santard
Sargd
Tamrid
Penaiv, Mdli
Teli
Tentri
Urdou
SHORT PIECES FOR TRANSLATION.
The following pieces may seem childish to the educated mind, but they are in keeping with the elementary ideas of the Ho, contain some information about his mode of life and customs, and will serve to enlarge the student's vocabulary along practical lines : —
1.— THE BODY.
Aingtdre homo meno. , Homore bo sabenete chetana ; onte lutur, med, mud ondo a mend. A' bitdrre lee ondo data mend. Med-inua latarre, taran, hoto, kuam, laii, do'ea, ti ondo kata mena. Tire honganda ondo marang ganda mena. Bo chetanre ub mena. Medtebu neled ; luturtebu aiumed ; muatebu saeded ondo soanea. Titebu s*abea ondo katatebu senod.
2. — OATTLB.
r
[Jriko saben disumre mendkod. Urikoa unr ibila ondo akoa ub hende chi pundi chi ara hoba daia. Akoa kata chdtaakana. En chata- akan kata isu ketea ondo Hoko hanko meta. Urikoa barid diring mena. Ako tasad ondo busuko jomea ondo senotan senotanreko ating daia. Bikete tingure chi burumroko lijumed. Urikote hoko sieako ondo sagiko orea. Akoa jiluko jomea ondo unrko akiringea. Gundikotdete todbu named ondo akoa honko miukobu metakod.
3. — BIRDS.
Oekotare baria kata ondo barid aparob mend. Ilteko pereakana ondo aparobteko apirea. Akoa ate jometeako halanged. Taramardko bdbd chi tilmingko jomea ; taramarako jiluko jomea ; ondo etako isu purd ginisteko asuloa. Konroko dareko oiared ondoko unumend. Akoa jiling kdtate genddriko jagddreko seno daia. Setakoleka simko paskakete jometeako named. Oeko tuka baikete enareko peroed ondo honko rutuieante ondo d chabkete engakoteko ajomod. Huringleka oeko hokod kdjioko eto daia.
4.— FISH.
c Hakuko dare taina. Akoa kata banod mendo chadlom ondo ilte nepa
enpdteko senbiura. Hakuko abuleka kako saedea. Akoa med mena mendo ranapid banoa. Isu anjateko aium daia. Pura hoko hakuko sabkedkote
ondo isinkedkoteko jomkoa. c
5. — THE HOT WEATHER.
v
Jete dipli isu loloa. Balbal da jod jodte lijao lumoa. Nidare neleka balbala chi dum-med (giti-med) ka hujua. Gararea da anjedoa
ondo tasad goechabaoa. Chidnkoo gojoako. Imin tetanga cbi misa misa huringleka red da nuere ji ruaa.
6.— THE RAINS.
Ne disumre gama isn porate kae gamaea. Sidare rajasala gama hobaoa. En dipli fioko siketeko herea. Ente rot gama ondo chitan gamare Hoko karaieakc. Goma gama ondo indi gama talare delbaba iroa ondo jomnama parab hobaoa. Sal oterea baba lagite indi gama isu dorkara. Jargi diplire rimil siirieae ondo hichir hichireae. Misa miga arileae. Gara poreoa ondo chokoko aiumoa. Gara pereore oiar daiko
samang parom daiako. • , 7. — THE COLD WEATHER.
v Rabang diplire, sabenko jetereko artangena ondo nidare san
tingketeko jirubena. Bnsu atedketeko gitia, banredo isu rabangkoa.
Reng^ko jaj;iteko uiuna ; mundako barki lijateko uiuna. Dado isu tutkuna mendo hoko lagite da-hoio isu bugina.
8.— TREES.
Daru abua pura paitire hujua. Enarea jobu jomea ondo babu baoa. Sante mandibu isinea ondo nail, sagi, parkom, dubteabu baiea. Sabeneto sarjom daru ketea. Hatua darure lungam ondo baru darure enkobu anrakoa. Uli, porso ondo loa dararea jobu jomea.
9. — HOUSES.
Kolan disnmre hoko oa baiere kunta sidareko bidea. Ente jata ondo hasate ginilko baiea. En ginil chetanre mutul, jangi ondo seneor omkete sainko dalea. Ape upun sirma taiomte en hasado rapudoa ondo oa etkage neloa. Mendo hasarea itate oa baioredo, isu sirma lagite taina. Oarea jobra duar japare alope endaea.
10. — CLOTHES.
Uri meronjkoa nb, oekoa il, ondo haknkoa harad mena. Hokoa sumang etang unr mena. Enamento akoa homo uiu lagite hoko disnm ondo diplileka lijako baite hobaoa. Ka rabang disumre enko kad^somrea lija ondo rabang disumre mindi ubrea lijako tusingea. Kuikoo e^a et.a lijako erea.
11. — SABAI GRASS.
•» Saiuete badchom tangaa. Birre badchom nainoa, mendo parjako akoage paiti lagiteko idi daia. Irketeko uniea ondo tol lagite saitibaea. Taramarako parkom ondo machila ganduko tengea ondo etako hatreko akiringea. Isu pura badchom ei^a dsumte olsakam bai lagite kuloa.
12.— LAO.
Tolakan enkoete chidnko olako. 01 dipli hoko kotoko hadea. Koteren enko idikedkote eta darureko jankoa. Bakra enkodo bakra darure, baruren enko baru darure ondo murren enko mur darureko anraoa. Turui chandureko toloa ondo mi sirmare bar dunako anraoa. Enkote sakom, sankd ondo eta eta singar baioa.
13. — COCOONS.
Asar chandu ol lungamko hoko lariako metakoa. En lungamkoete tirako ondo patniko olako. 'Barsingleka taiomte patni peroeae. Perochabaeanchi pero miad kulire emoa. Ente rutni dipli \\pko hatna darureko tipanea. Lungam chiduko upun danako utraca ; enteko tolena. Tolkenteko akiringoa, ondo kiringko eta eta diSumte idikedkote sutamko borkoa ondo kilimili lijako tengea.
14. — HO VERSION OF THE CREATION.
Ote Baram ondo Singbonga akingtegeking baieana. Hutub diri ondo date oteking baikeda. Ena tasad ondo daruteking singarkeda. Sidare baturen jontuko ondo taiomte birren jontukoking baikedkoa. Hoko tain lagite sabena baisekaeanchi, miad koa ondo miad kui bailena- king. Singbonga miad isu marang huangre enkinge saitibakedkinga, ondo enking kaking sitiajomtan nelkedkingte diange baietokedkinga. Duang nuketeking misaeana. Nelekdte honganrako hobaeana ondo disum hokote pereeana.
VOCABULARY AND INDEX.
VOCABULARY.
FOREWORD.
The following collection of about 1800 Ho words does not pretend to be anything more than a working vocabulary including almost all the words that will be encountered by an ordinary foreigner. The foumber of words used by an average Ho is probably not more than 400 at the outside, and, though I have no doubt that every student will discover occasional words that I have omitted or never come across, I think that the vocabulary I have collected will be found sufficient for all practical purposes. I« have not attempted to compile a dictionary, because lexicography is an art that requires special knowledge and peculiar abilities, as well as a greater amount of time than a normal official can afford. The student should therefore note that all the English synonyms by which a Ho word might be translated have not been included, and that he will often find the Ho equivalent for any particular English word by looking for it under some alternative English rendering. As a rule, only the bare meanings are given in the first part. The distinctions, if any, between the various Ho equivalents for the same English word must be looked for in the second part where their precise meanings are given.
2. The following are the abbreviations used : —
•
adj. = adjective. post. = postposition,
adv. = adverb. pron. = pronoun,
conj. = conjunction. v. i. = intransitive verb,
inter. = interjection. v. imp. = impersonal verb.
i. p. = idiomatic phrase v. irreg. = irregular verb.
<
n. a. = animate noun. v. p. = verb in passive voice.
n. i. = inanimate noun. v. rec. = reciprocal verb,
num. = numeral. v. ref. = reflexive verb,
v. t. = transitive verb.
VOCABULARY.
ENGLISH-HO.
abduct (v. t.) able (v. irrog.) abortion (n. i.) abscess (n. i.) abscond (v. i.) abuse (v. t.) accidentally (adv,^... according to custom
(adv.) according to one's
wishes (adv.)
account (n. i.) accuse (v. t.) accused person (n.a.) accustom (v. t.) ... ache (v. imp. and
v. i.)
acid (adj.) acquit ^v. t.) Adam's apple (n. i.) adjoin (v. ^ec.) adopt (v. t.)
adorn (v. t.) adult (n. a.) advantage (n. i.) ... adversary (n. a.) ... affection (n. i.) after (post, and adv.) after a little while (adv.)
afternoon (n. i.) ... tdrdsingi
d'lklr, arkid |
again (adv. & v. t.) |
ondo |
dai |
age (n. i.) |
tin/ft |
endd-ad |
agree (v. t.) |
ed, rdji, bai, |
uju |
t |
suku |
nir |
ague (v. imp.) |
nisuruiu |
gonde, erang |
air (n. i.) |
sirmd |
dchakdte |
alas (inter.) |
haigore, Juiind |
liaindgore, |
||
dasturlekdte |
!><(j>drit |
|
bapdrigore |
||
sananglekdte, |
alive (v. p.) |
jido |
uruulekdte |
all (adj.) |
saben |
lekd |
alluvial deposit (n. i.) |
tobrd |
chird |
almost (adv.) |
likd |
muddle |
almost completely |
|
sebe |
(adv.) |
haringbdrte |
alone (adv.) |
iumang, tumad |
|
hdsu |
also (conj.) |
o (used as suffix |
moroe |
on\y),jdked |
|
da, bdge |
alter (v. t.) |
bodol |
ututud, ututud |
although iconj.) ... |
enreo, iminreo |
topo |
amaze (v. t.) |
dkachakd, |
dubumbul, |
dkadandd |
|
asulhdrd |
amazed (v. imp.) ... |
dkachakd, |
ringdr |
dkadandd |
|
sednakani |
ancestor (n. a.) ... |
jidtdtd |
Idb |
and (conj.) |
ondo •• |
bairi |
angry (v. imp. v. i. |
i |
juri |
& adj.) |
kurkur |
taiomre, taiomte |
animal (n. a.) |
jontu |
ankle (n. i.) |
kdtdreneke |
|
likd likd, ndai, |
anklet (n. i.) |
dndu |
nden, huring |
anna (n. i.) |
did |
gdri taiomte, |
another (adj.) |
eta |
huringlekd |
another person |
|
taiomte |
(pron.) |
etdi |
( 120 )
another thing (pron.) etdd
attention (n. i.) ... ji
answer (v. t.) |
kdjiurd |
at the back of (adv.) |
doedre, |
ant (n. a.) |
mum, tonto, |
danangre |
|
hau, nidir |
aunt (n. a.) |
gungu, gauing, |
|
ant-hill (n. i.) |
bunum |
hdtom, kdki |
|
any (adj.) |
jdn |
avarice (n. i.) |
tdkd-ldb |
any person (pron.)... |
jdni |
axe (n. i.)... |
hake, kdpi |
anything (pron.) ... |
jdnd |
axle (n. i.) |
nigd |
anywhere at all(adv.) |
jdre, jdpdre, |
||
jdtdre t |
B. |
||
appear (v. p.) |
atkdro, nelo |
babe (n. a.) |
bale lion |
appraise (v. t.) |
gonong |
bachelor (n. a.) |
dindd seped |
apprehend (v. t.) ... |
sdb |
back (n. i.) ,... |
doed |
approximately (adv.) |
atkdrte |
backbone (n. i.) ... |
sindurijahg |
argue (v. rec.) |
kapdji |
bad (adj.) |
etkd, etkan |
arm (6. i.) |
ti |
bad land (n. i.) |
pi ote, kiindi ote |
armlet (n. i.) |
tdro |
bad luck (n. i.) |
losib banod |
armpit (n. i.) |
hatld |
bad omen (n. i.) ... |
ond ere |
arrange (v. t.) |
bai, dili |
bad spirit (n. a.) ... |
bongd |
arrange bride-price |
bag (n. i.) |
kuchu |
|
(v. t.) |
gonong sid |
baggage (n. i.) ... |
bdrom |
arrest (v. t.) |
sdb |
bake (v. t.) |
lad |
arrive (v. i.) .., |
seter, tebd |
balance (n. i.) |
sare |
arrive at (v. t.) |
betd |
bald (adj.) |
changdel, chere |
arrow (n. i.) |
sar |
bamboo (n. i.) |
mad |
asan tree (n. i.) ... |
hatnd ddru |
band (n. i.) |
guti |
ascend (v. i.) |
rakab |
bdndh (n. i.) |
bdndd |
ashamed (v. imp.)... |
giu |
bank (n. i.) |
kuti ( gar a, |
ashes (n. i.) |
toroe |
kuti - bank |
|
ask (v. t.) |
asi, kuli |
of a river) |
|
ass (n. a.) |
gadd |
bar across a door |
|
assemble (v. t.) |
hundi |
(n. i.) |
sonoro, ganai |
assist (v. t.) |
dengd |
barber (n. a.) |
banddri, |
associate with |
barandi |
||
(v. ref.) |
jurin |
bargain (v. rec.) ... |
kipiring |
astonish (v. t.) |
dkachakd, dka- |
bark (v. t.) |
bu |
dandd |
bark of a tree (n. i.) |
uw |
|
astonished (v. imp.). |
dkachakd, dka- |
barren woman (n. a.) |
bdnji |
dandd |
basket (n. i.) |
kdnchi, tunki, |
|
astringent (adj.) ... |
heben |
topd |
|
at first (adv.) ... |
siddre |
bask in the sun (v. t.) |
jet ere artang |
atmosphere (n. i.)... |
sirmd |
bathe (v. t.) |
ord |
(v. irr<»g.)
n. i.) bean ( n. i.) hear (n. a.) h«-:ir (v. t.) heard (n. i.J heat (v.t.) heat a drum (v.t.)... beat in (v. t.) boat out a plough- share (V. t.)
beautiful (adj.) ' ... because (conj.) beckon (v. t.) become fv. irreg.) ... bed (n. i.) bee (n. a.) beetle (n. a.) before (post. &adv.).
beg (v.t.) begin (v. t.) beginning (n. i.) ... behind (adv. & post.).
be in a hurry(v. i.).. belch (v. tj believe (v. t.) bellows (n. i.) bell hung round the
neck of cattle
(n. i.)
below (adv.) bend (v. t.) benefit (n. i.) benighted (v. p.) .. berd land (n. i.) besides (conj.)
( 121 ) |
||
//(( /M |
ItHcl-iiiit (n. i.) |
|
kodlu |
big (a.lj.) |
in;/ |
ft inn |
bilo (n. \.) |
|
Ixiln, hand |
bill (n. i.) |
d |
idling |
hind (v. t.) |
tni |
</<ir<-li<i |
hird (n. a.) |
M |
tdni |
hirdlimo (n. i.) |
dtd |
ru |
hirth (n. i. & v. t.)... |
jonom |
M |
bison (n. a.) |
I'irki i'i |
bite (v. t.) |
/<>/<*, It'ifi |
|
hnls'niii, jHijuii, |
bitter (adj.) |
mer |
ter |
black (adj ) |
hi'iirii' |
Iniiiin nelo |
black ant (n. a.) |
tOlito, nniiTi |
mente |
blacken (v. t.) |
hende |
gaui |
blacksmith (n. a.) ... |
kamdr |
hobdo |
blame (v. t.) |
chird |
pdrkom |
blanket (n. i.) |
komoro |
dwnur |
bleat (v. t.) |
rda |
Mm |
blind (adj.) |
medadakan, |
derre, derte, |
kdyrd, kdvri |
|
mdngre, |
blink (v. t.) |
rdpid |
samanangre |
blood (n. i.) |
maiom |
koe |
blow away (used of |
|
ete |
wind only-v. t.)... |
otdng |
enete, munu. |
blow np a fire, i. e. |
|
taiomte, |
with a fan (v.t.)... |
jir |
taiomre, doedre, |
blow with bellows |
|
danangre, |
(v.t.) |
sijnttl |
kundamre |
blow with the mouth |
|
kaubau |
(v.t.) |
ong, orong |
auu |
blue (adj.) |
ydded |
sari |
boat (n. i.) |
dongd |
tint pud |
body (n. i.) |
homo |
body-louce (n. a.) ... |
li/d-sil-it |
|
boil (n. i.) |
uju |
|
tiring |
boil (v. t.) |
tiki, basantj |
Idtarre, subdre |
boil eggs (v. t.) |
oiong |
leod |
boil paddy, i. e. be- |
|
lab |
fore husking (v. t.) |
liti, tiki |
aiubo, niduo |
bone (n. i.) |
jany |
sdl ote |
book (n. i.) |
kitdh, boi |
ne bdgekete |
boots (n. i.) |
karjHi |
( 122 )
bore (v. t.) born (y. p.) borrow (v.t.) bor tree (n. i.) ... bother (v. t.) bottom (n. i.) bough (n. i.) boundary (n. i.) ...
boundary pillar
(n. i.) bow (v. t.) bow (n. i.) bow of a fiddle (n. i.)
bowstring (n. i.) ... bracelet (n. i.) Brahmin (n. a.) brain (n. i.) branch (n. i.) brass (n. i.) ...
brave (adj.) ...
breach (v. t.) bread (n. i.) ...
break (v. t.)
break into pieces
(v. t.) break into pieces
with the hands
(v.t.)
breast (n. i.) breast of woman
Cn. i.)
breathe (v. t.) ... breeze (n. i.) bribe (v. t.) ...
brick (n. i.) , ... bride (n. a.) ' bridegroom (n. a.)... bridge (n. i.")
bu |
bright (adj.) |
maskal |
jonomo |
brim of a vessel |
ch u t kde, |
riri idi |
(n. i.) |
kdndom |
bai darn |
bring (v. t.) |
dyu |
mukuing |
bring a case (v.t.) ... |
ndlis |
Idtar |
bring in (v. t.) |
dder |
koto |
bring out (v. t.) ... |
ol |
chimi, simd, |
broad (adj.) |
osdr |
chaudi |
brother (n. a.) |
bauu, undi, |
, |
lidgd. |
|
pilpai |
brother-in-law |
bauuhonedr, |
tirub |
(n. a.) |
lend) drd, iril |
dsar |
brothers (n. a.) /... |
undiboed, |
gened, banam |
undibokv |
|
dsar |
brushwood (n. i.) ... |
tondang, |
hatual |
hdrdhtiru |
|
sdkom, sankd |
bud (n. i.) |
moi |
Bame |
buffalo (n. a.) |
kerd |
hatang |
bug (n. a.) |
mdji |
koto |
bull (n. a.) |
andid |
pitol, kdysd |
bullock (n. a.) |
hard |
borsd |
bundle of clothes |
|
a&pd, marau |
(n. i.) |
yente, gentri |
lad |
bundle of paddy |
|
rdpud, rauy orf, |
(n. i.) |
bird, muti |
hochd, sid |
burn (v. t.) |
dtar, ting |
burn (v. i.) |
lo |
|
kechd |
burn (v. imp.) |
usur |
burn a dead body, |
||
burn bricks or lime |
||
bandi |
(v. t.; |
rapd |
kuam |
burn straw, i. e. to |
|
fertilize land |
||
tod |
(v. t.) |
bdpal |
sded |
burn wood for char- |
|
hoio |
coal (v. t.) ... |
hdngar |
gus |
burst (v. p.) |
rdpudo |
itd |
bury (v. t.) |
topd |
koned |
bush (n. i.) |
lieperpatd |
bor |
but (conj.) |
mendo |
dudi, kukuru, |
butterfly (n. a.) |
pampal |
pul |
buy (v. t.) |
kiring |
( 123 )
buzz (v. imp.) ... lutursdri
by accident (adv.)... dchakdte
by chance (adv.) ... <<</M/U/<
by means of (post.)... //•>/
C.
cactus (n. i.) ... sid
cage (n. i.) ... y«V/, gdrod
calamity (n. i.) ... duku calf (n. a.) ... miu
calf (n. i.^ ... junkd
call (v. t.)', ... ked
call loudly (v. t.)>... iu call out (v. t.) ... iu camel (n. a.) ... urit can (v. irreg.) ... dui capable of judging well or thinking properly (v. i.) ... sedn capon (n. a.) ... gaid sim care for (v. t.) ... suku careful (v. t.) ... uruu carry (v. t.) ... idi
carry away (v. t.) ... adkir, arkid,
dtu, oldng carry in the arms
(v. t.) ... koeong
carry in the hand
(v. t.) ... idi
carry off (v. t.) ... adkir, arkid,
dtu, otdng carry on the back
(v. t.) ... gundrd, kud
carry on the bosom
(v. t.) ... hebe
carry on the head
(v. t.) ... dupil
carry on the hip
(v. t.) ... hel>t>
carry on the shoulder
(v. t.) ...go
carry tales (v. t.) ... ker
rarry under the arm
(v. t.) carry with both hands
(v. t.) cart (n. i.) case (n. i.) cast (v. t,)
caste (n. i.)
castor oil tree (n. i.)
castrate (v. t.)
castrated (adj.)
cat (n. a.)
catch (v. t.)
catch a glimpse of
(v. t.) catch by the throat
(v. t.)
catch in a net (v. t.) catch in the hand
(v. t.) catch round the
waist (v. t.) catch the breath
(v.t.)
caterpillar (u. a.) ... cattle (n. a.) cave (n. i.) cease (v. t.) centipede (n. a.) ... Chaibassa (n. i.) chain (n. i.)
chair (n. i.)
Chakardapore (n. i.) chalk (n. i.) chameleon (n. a.) ... change (v. t.) channel (n. i.)
herbed
tiping idi fiyi, gdri mokardmd A '//•/, j, \hudmd,
endd jdti
hiiidi ddru baidd baidd pusi, bilai sdb
nelgod
limbud jdlom
teld gdti
deo
chidu
mi
Idta, undu
bdge
sengel-mdrmdr
Dongol
sinhi,
jir.jri dubted.
machild
gdndu Cliakd kdlimiti kdkdratnbad bodol mdrid, otol,
dd-hord
( 124 )
, charcoal (n. i.) ... hdngar charge (n. i.) ... jimd, gotdo chase (v. t.) ... Mr, kdki
cheat (v. t.) ... chakad
cheek (n. i.) ... jod
chest (n, i.) ... kuam
chew (v. t.) ... tdgoe
chew the cud (v. t.). lijum ' chicken-pox (n. i.)... mdri child (n. a.) ... hon, sitid
chilli (n. i.) .., malchi, marchi
chin (n. i.) ... dkid
chisel (n. i.) ... rukd
cholera (n. i.) ... laii-dul choose (v. t.) ... said chop with a hatchet
(v. t.) ... samd
chop wood (v. t.) ... topang cigarette (n. i.) ... pikd claim (v. t.) ... ddbi
claim possession
(v. t.) ... eser
clap the hands (v. t.) tdping chaprd claw (n. i.) ... sarsar
claw (v. t.) ... gotd
clean (adj. & v. t.)... parchi clean with water
(v. t.) ... chdpi
clear forest (v. t.)... dmin clear the throat
(v.t.) ... kde*
clear up (v. i.) ... pdend clear wate* (n. i.) ... tetd dd climate (n. i.) ... dd-hoio climb (v. i.) ... de, rakab
clod o£ earth (n. i.)... hdsdbu close (adj.) ... japd, nde
cloth (n. i.) ... lijd
clothes (n. i.) ... lijd 'cloud (n. i.) ... rimil
clue (n. i.) ... mundi
cluster (v. t.) ... jur
coat (n. i.) coal (n. i.) cobra (n. a.) cobweb (n. i.)
... sutui ... hangar ... pdndu bing ... jdlom
cockcrow (n. i.) ... simrd cockfight (v. t.) ... sim tol, i. e. with artificial spurs (kdti). Sim pdrd is any place where cock- fighting usually takes place, the winning cock being called jitkdr sim or. sdndi, and the loser pddu sim or sdfidi. The action of the cocks is known as soddj the reciprocal form sopodd being common.
cockroach (n. a.) ... upi
cocoon (n. a.) ... lungam^lugam
coffin (n. i.) ... chalpd
cohabit (v. t.) ... do,jagar,juti, misd.
coiffure (n. i.) ... sitpid, rotod
cold (adj.) ... rabang, tutkun,
sdsd
cold in the head
(v. imp.) ... mdvdd
collar bone (n. i.) ... ddtdromjang
collect (v. t.) ... Tiundi
collect round (v. t.) .. jur
coloured border of a 'dhoti (n. i.) ... onol
comb (n. i. & v. t.). . ndki
come (v. i.) ... Jiuju
come in (v. i.) ... bolo
come out of the egg
(v. i.) ... rutui
come up out of the
ground (v. i.) ... omon
comfort (n. i.) ... tuku
comic song (n.i.) ... lagri durang
commit suicidr
(v. rcf.) coinniQii (adj.) complainant (n. a.)., compound (n. i.) .., compromise (v. t.).., conceal (v. t.) couch (n. i.) confess (v. t.) confusion (n. i.) ... consumption (n. i.). . content (vt imp.) ... converse (v. t.) * ... converse together
(v. recip.) cook (v. t.) cook rice (v. t.) cooked rice (n. i.) ... cool (adj.) coolie (n. a.) copper (n. i.) copy (v. t.) corrupt (v. t.) cotton (n. i.) cough (v. t.) cough and cold (n.i.) count (v. t.) country (n'. i.) country spirit
(n. i.)
courageous (adj.) ... court (n. i.) courtyard (n. i.) ... cousin (n. a.)
cover (v. t.) cover (n. i.) cover, e. g. with a blanket (v. t.) .
( 125 ) |
||
cow (n. a.) |
yundi |
|
yoen |
cowardly (adj.; |
boro |
sadai |
cowherd (n. a.) |
:/"/"'' |
mndai |
cowhouse (n. i.) |
govd |
bakai |
crab (n. a.) |
kafkom, |
fail, rdji |
kdkom |
|
uktt |
cramp (v. imp.) ... |
nti/Hj |
sakod |
crane (n. a.) |
ko |
mandting |
creep (v. i.) |
obor |
golmdl |
creeper (n. i.) |
na», ndge |
rdj rog |
criticize (v. t.) |
chird |
hdrob |
crocodile (n. a.) |
tden |
jagar |
crooked (adj.) |
bankd, ko<-hc, |
gdndi |
||
japgar, kapdji |
cross-beam (n. i.) ... |
kodlu |
isin |
crouch (v. i.) |
obor |
iiit'indi) dundu |
crow (n. a.) |
kd |
mdndi, dundu |
crow (v. t.) |
rda |
red |
crowd (n. i.) |
guti |
ndldi, ndldtani |
crowbar (n. i.) |
sdboro |
tdmbd |
crush between nails |
|
nakal |
(v. t.) |
toe |
etkdichi |
cry (v. t.) |
rda |
kddtom |
crystal (n. i.) |
arsi diri |
ku |
cuckoo (n. a.) |
toau |
ku-mdndd |
cucumber (n. i.) ... |
tder |
lekd |
cultivate (v. t.) |
tin, si |
disuin |
cultivated land |
|
(n. i.) |
ote^ ti-ote |
|
arki |
cultivator (n. a.) ... |
tiui |
borsd |
culvert (n. i.) |
dudi, kukuru, |
kacheri |
pul |
|
rdchd |
cunning (adj.) |
chufar |
kdkdgiingit, |
cup made of leaves |
|
6auw, undi, |
(n. i.) |
pu |
etc. Vide |
cup made of metal |
|
Chap, xxiv |
(n. i.) |
gind |
of Grammar. |
curdled milk (n. i.).. |
dumbd tod |
hdrub |
ourry (n. i.) |
utu |
handrub |
custard-apple |
mandal, |
(n. i.) |
dambau |
|
uiu |
custody (n. i.) |
jimd, gotdo |
( 126
custom (n. i.) |
dastur |
day before yesterday |
|
cut (v. t.) |
md |
(adv.) |
holdter |
cut as with scissors |
dead (adj.) |
gojakan |
|
(v.t.) |
Idtab |
dead body (n. i.) ... |
monrd |
cut branches (v. t.)... |
hese |
deaf (adj.) |
kdla |
cut brushwood |
death (n. i.) |
gonoe |
|
(v. t.) |
ging |
death-rattle (n. i.) ... |
hu |
cut grass or paddy |
deceive (v. t.) |
chakad |
|
(v. t.) |
ir |
decorate (v. t.) |
singdr |
cut into pieces |
decorate hair with |
||
(v. t.) |
gundui |
flowers (v. t.) ... |
bd |
cut up flesh (v. t.)... |
ged |
decrease (v. p.) |
dduo, huringo |
cat up with a knife |
deep (adj.) |
ikir i |
|
or with the teeth |
deer (n. a.) |
birjilu, pustd, |
|
(v. t.) |
rere |
saram |
|
cut with a knife |
defendant (n. a.) ... |
muddle |
|
(v. t.) |
had |
delay (v. t.) |
gdri |
cut wood (v. t.) |
topang |
den (n. i.) |
Idta, undu |
deny (v. t.) ... |
kd-mandting |
||
4 |
deposition (n. i.) ... |
kdji |
|
dacoit (v. t.) |
ddku |
depressed (v. imp.)... |
huringji, |
daily (adv.) |
dimsi, dimsi |
monduku |
|
dimsi, |
deride (v. t.) |
Idndd |
|
angomvtid |
descend (v. ref.) ... |
ddun, dgun |
|
daily labourer (n. a.) |
ndldi, ndldtani |
desire (v. imp.) |
sanang |
ddl(n.i.) |
utu (cooked) ; |
despise (v. t.) |
hild |
ddli ( un- |
destroy (v. t.) |
nuksdn |
|
cooked) |
devil (n. a.) |
bongd |
|
damage (v. t.) |
etkd |
dew (n. a.) |
saparum-dd, |
dance (v. i.) |
sun |
sisir, sisir-dd |
|
danger (n. i.) |
boro, tiuku |
dhoti (n. i.) |
p'indd |
dark (adj.) |
hende, nubd |
die (v. i.) |
9°j° |
date (n. i;) |
kitd |
die of starvation |
|
daughter (n. a.) ... |
kuihon |
(v. i,) |
uu |
daughter-in-law |
different (adj.) |
eta, kilimili, |
|
(n. a.) |
kimin |
tdngd. |
|
dawn (n. i.) |
ang, idang |
difficult (adj.) |
hambal, muskil |
day (n. i.) |
betar, betarang, |
dihbdri (n. i.) |
bakai |
V |
huld, bar, |
dim (adj.) |
dumduld |
md, din. |
dip into water |
||
day after tomorrow |
(v. t.) |
tupu |
|
(adv.) |
meang, gapdter |
dirty (adj.) |
humu, etkd |
ditoharge c v. t.)
disciple (n. a.) discover (v. t.) disease (n. i.) dismiss (v. t.) dissect (v. t.) dive (v. i.) divide (v. t.) do (v. t.) dog (n. a.) door (n. i.] doubled up^adj.) .., doubt (n. i.) ».., doubtful (adj.) dove (n. a.) drag'(v. t.) draw (v. t.) draw (v. t.) draw in the breath
(v.t.)
draw water (v. t.) .. dream (v. t.) dress (v. t.) dribble (n. i.) drink (v.t.) drive (cattle) (v. t.). drive in (v. t.) drive in with a
hammer (v. t.) .. drivel (v. t.) drive out (v. t.) .. drown (v. i.) drum (n. i.) drunk (v. p.) drunken (adj.) dry (adj.) dry up (v. t.) duck (n. a.)
dumb (adj.) dung (n. i.) dunghill (n. i.)
( 127 ) |
||
nit, l>dge |
dwarf (n. a.) |
baram |
child |
dysentery (n. i.) ... |
maiom laii-dul, |
held, IKIDI |
tul |
|
hdsu, rogo |
||
da, bdge |
E. |
|
gcd |
||
unum |
each (adj.) |
mutid |
lui t ing |
ear (n. i.) |
lutur |
rikd |
ear of paddy or |
|
seta |
• other crop (n. i.). . |
gele |
duar, silping |
early (adj.) |
bdle |
unyud unyud |
early (adv.) |
idangre |
td |
ear-ring (n. i.) |
murki, pagrd. |
kd-sdriolekd |
earth (n. i.) |
Utd |
putam |
earthen waterpot |
|
or |
(n. i.) |
chdtu |
or |
earthquake (n. i.) ... |
ote-ruku |
onol |
ease oneself (v. t.) ... |
t, birpd, ol |
east (n. i.) |
singiol |
|
sib |
easy (adj.) |
Idr |
burd, taut |
eat (v. t.) |
jom |
kumu |
eat as much as one |
|
tusing |
can (v. t.) |
bi |
ulidd |
echo (v. i.) |
sdriurd |
nu |
edge (n. i.) |
kuti |
hdr |
edible (n. i.) |
jometed, chdrd |
dder |
edible root (n. i.) ... |
tdngd |
egg (n. i.) |
jdrom, bili,peor, |
|
kilum |
peto |
|
ulidd |
eight (num.) |
iriled, iril |
hdrol |
elbow (n. i.) |
ukd |
sur |
elephant (n. a.) |
hdti |
dumang |
embankment (n. i.)... |
dnri, |
bulo |
embrace (v. t.) |
hambud |
bul |
emigrate (v. t.) |
disum bdge |
ro • |
employ (v. t.) |
dchu, paiti em |
dnjed |
empty (adj.) |
tdmd |
konro, hedfieh' |
, end (v. t.) |
chdM |
jer-janyd |
pnd (n. i.) |
chanab, tundu |
gala |
enemy (n. a.) |
bairi |
ynri, i/uvsi |
engage (v.t.) |
dchu |
dubi |
enough (adj.) |
liili, jokd |
( 128 ) |
||
enquire (v. t.) ... kuli, taddruk |
fan (v. t.) |
jir |
enter (v. t.) ... bolo |
fan (n. i.) |
jirented |
entwine (v.t.) ... paid |
far (adj.) |
sanging |
envy (v. imp.) ... hinsd, chentd |
fast (v. t.) |
katab |
epilepsy (n. i.) ... ambdri |
fat (adj.) |
kiri |
equal (adj.) ... midge, bardbari |
fat (n, i.) |
itil |
escape (v. i.) ... pochd |
father (n. a.) ... |
dpu |
especially (adv.) ... jatkdte |
father-in-law (n. a.). |
honedr |
eunuch (n. a.) ... gaid |
fault (n. i.) |
chird, dos |
evening (n. i.) ... aiub |
fear (v. t.) |
boro |
ever (adv.) ... jd chuild |
feather (n. i.) |
il |
everlasting (adj.) ... jorong jorong |
feed (v. t.) |
djom |
every (adj.) ... mutid |
feel (v. t.; |
atkdr |
evidence (n. i.) ... ijdr |
female organ |
|
excavate (v. t.) ... ur |
(n. i.) |
ruji |
exceed (v. i.) ... Id, rakab |
fence ( n. i.) |
bakai, clwrui |
exchange (v.t.) ... bodol |
fever (n. i.) |
hdsu |
excretion (n. i.) ... i |
fibre (n. i.) |
sutam |
explain (v. t.) ... udub |
fiddle (n. i.) |
banam |
extinguish (v. t.) ... en |
field (n. i.) |
ote |
extract ( from some- |
fight (v. t.) |
lardi, larai |
thing written) |
fig tree (n. i.) |
lod ddru |
(v.t.) ... old |
fill (v.t.) |
pere |
eye (n. i.) ... med |
fill the stomach |
|
eyebrow (n. i.) ... med-kdndom |
(v.t.) |
bi |
eyelid (n. i.) ... randpid |
filled, filled with |
|
P- |
(adj.) |
pereakan |
• |
find (v. t.) |
bete., ndm |
fable (n. i.) ... kdni |
fin of a fish (n. i.) ... |
il |
face (n. i.) ... med-mud |
fine (v. t.) |
ddnde |
face to face (adv.)... amnd-samnd |
finger (n. i.) |
gandd, ddro, |
fade (v. i.) ... goso |
kdtub |
|
faint (v. ir,reg.) ... gojolekd hobdo |
finger-nail (n. i.) ... |
sarsar |
fair (adj.) ... esel |
finger's breadth |
mid sarsar, |
fall (v. i.) ... u, gur, hdndi |
(n.i.) |
gandd |
fall on the back |
finish (v. t,) |
chdbd |
(v. t.) ... sandang |
fire (n. i.) |
sengel |
fall on the stomach |
firefly (n. a.) |
ipipiung |
(v. i.) ... obor |
first (adj.) |
sidd |
"allow (adj.) ... parid |
first (adv.) |
siddre, siddte |
false (adj.) ... chakad |
fish (n. a.) |
hdku |
famine (n. i.) ... ringd |
fish-hook (n. i.) |
Idnsi |
't (n. i.) . list (v. t.) Jist (n. i.) five (num.) fix (v. t.) fix ( time or date
(v. t.) flag (n. i.) flame (n. i.) flat rice (n. i.) flax (n. i.) flea (n. a.> flesh (n. i.) float (v. i.) flood (n. i.) flour (n. i.) flower (n. i.) flow slowly (v. i.) . flow swiftly (v. i.). flute (n. i.) fly (v. i.) fly (n. a.)
flying-fox (n. a.) .
fog (n. i.)
fold round (v. t.)
fold up (v. t.)
follow (v. t.)
follow, as* a sort bodyguard (v.t.)
foolish (adj.)
foot (n. i.)
footprint (n. i.)
for (post.)
forced (adj.)
forcibly (adv.)
ford (n. i.)
forehead (n. i.)
foreigner (n. a.)
forest (n. i.)
forge (v. t.)
forget (v. t.")
,.. jdlom |
forgive (v. t.) |
mdp, bdye |
... iiil |
forked piece of wood |
|
... chijinil |
(n. i.) |
tuam |
... moid, moi |
form ears (v. i.) ... |
gele |
... sob |
formerly (adv.) ... |
sidtire, tiddte |
3) |
form into cocoons |
|
. . . dill |
(v. t.) |
tol |
. .. toiol |
four (num.) |
upunid, upun m |
... jul |
four annas (n. i.) ... |
siki |
... tdben |
'fowl (n a.) |
sim |
... son |
fox (n. a.) |
taukuldt tuiu, |
. . . karchu |
kalkal, |
|
... jilu |
karamchd |
|
... diatom |
frank (adj.) ... |
suld-sddd |
... bdn |
free of charge |
|
... holony, lupu |
(adj.) |
sdmd |
... bd |
fresh (adj.) |
rokd |
. . . linyi |
friend (n. a.) |
juri |
... hdri |
frighten (v. t.) |
birkau, boidrhi |
... rutu |
frog (n. a.; |
choke |
... dpir |
fruit, (n. i.) |
j° |
. . . roko |
fruit of mahud tree |
|
... bdduri |
(n. i. ) |
dold |
... pukad |
fry (v. t.) |
atd |
... pdte |
full moon (n. i.) ... |
purnimd, tuli |
... Idtum |
chdndu |
|
. . . otonyt pichd |
full of (v. p.) |
pereo |
of |
full of (adj.) |
pereakan |
funeral (n. i.) |
topdjany |
|
. . . sutu |
furrow (n. i.) |
nailyard |
... dondo |
||
... faftd |
G. |
|
... mdndd |
gabion (n. i.) |
churui |
... layite, layid |
gain (n. i.) |
Idb , |
... pochod |
garden (n. i.) |
baked |
... pochodte |
garlic (n. i.) |
rdsuvi |
. . . </d / |
gasp (v. imp.) |
deo |
. . . samany |
gather (v. t.) |
Jut nd i |
... diku |
germinate (v. i.) ... |
omon |
... bir |
get (v. t.^ |
ndm |
ter |
get accustomed to |
|
(v. t.) |
tebe |
( 130 )
grandson (n. a.) ... |
jaii |
|
atom |
grass (n. i.) |
tasad, dumbu |
jdrom |
grasshopper |
, |
ufd |
(n. a.) |
somsor |
gotom |
gratis (adj.) |
sdmd |
rod, umbul |
graze (v. i.) |
dting |
bobiur |
graze (v. t.) |
gupi |
Idndd |
grease (n. i.) |
itil |
add |
green (adj.) |
tasadlekd |
1 green pigeon (n. a.).. |
hud |
|
linijum |
greet (v. t.) ... |
jodr |
em |
grey-haired (adj.j... |
pdnda-bo |
grieve (v. imp.) ... |
Mating |
|
gaud pere |
grind, in a pestle & |
|
mortar or in a |
||
< |
||
gong |
mill (v. t.) |
rid |
grind the teeth |
||
sard |
(v.t.) |
data, ririd |
suku, rdvsd |
groan (v. t.) |
gerang |
grow (v. i.) |
hard |
|
turtung |
grow (v. t.) |
hdrdichi |
arsi diri |
growl (v. t.) |
logor, nornor |
jumbui |
grow old (v. p.) ... |
hdmo |
sen, seno |
grumble (v. t.) |
logor |
Gau |
guard (v. t.) |
horo |
merom |
guava (n. i.) |
tamrds |
sdmom |
guess (v. t.) |
atkdr |
bugi, bugin |
guest (n. a.) |
kupul |
losib |
gullet (n. i.) |
ututod, ututud |
gun (n. i.) |
bundu |
|
bapai |
gundli (n. i.) |
gurlu, gundli |
gunpowder (n. i.) ... |
toroe |
|
ombd |
||
honso |
H. |
|
ol |
hail (n. a.) |
aril |
Gau |
hair (n. i.) |
ub |
tumbd, suku |
hair ornament |
|
jang |
(n. i.) |
chindi,chindibd |
half (num.) |
tdld |
|
jaii-kui |
hammer (n. i.) |
kotdsi |
tdtd |
hand (n. i.) |
ti |
handcuffs (n. i.)
sikri
of plough (n.i.)
hang (v. t.) hang up (v. t.) happen (v. irreg.) ... happy (v. imp.) hard (Adj.) hard water (n. i.) ... hard-working (adj.). hare (n. a.) harrow ^v. t.) harvest time (n. i.). .
i hat (n. i.)
hatch (v. i.)
hate (v. t.)
have patience with
(v. t.)
hawk (n. a.) head (n. i.) headman (n. a.) hear (v. t.) heart (n. i.) Heaven (n. i.) heavy (adj.) heel (n. i.) heir (n. a.) help (v. t.) hiccough (v. imp.)... hide (v. t.) hide (n. i.) high (adj.) high land (terraced)
(n. i.) high land (unter-
raced) (n. i.) ... hill (n. i.) hillock (n. i.) hill-stream (n. i.) ... hip (n. i.) hip-bone (n. i.) hire (n. i.)
( 131 ) |
||
liiro a plough (v. t.) |
godli |
|
fctfd |
hiss (v. t.) |
f»n. ft |
h<ik>rtjoe, tolgoe |
hit against (v. t.) ... |
tdki, toke |
hdkd |
hit a mark (v. t.) ... |
to |
hobdo |
hit with fist (v. t.)... |
gil |
sukti |
hive (n. i.) |
ddkd |
kete |
hoar-frost (n. a.) ... |
ratang |
ibil da |
hoarse (v. imp.) ... |
yagarsd |
pean |
hoe (v. t.) |
chdlu |
kulde |
'hole (n. i.) |
undu |
kdrd |
honest (adj.) |
bugi, bugin |
Uilxi ir dipH, |
honey (n. i.) |
dumur da, lilt |
tardi |
dd, hurumsuku |
|
tupuri |
honeycomb (n. i.) ... |
ddkd |
rvtui |
hoof (n. i.) |
Uu |
hild |
hornet (n. a.) |
lili |
horns (n. i.) |
diriny |
|
satiny |
horse (n. a.) |
sddom |
lesrd |
host (n. a.) |
gusind |
bo |
hot (adj.) |
lolo, urgum, |
Mundd |
jete, had |
|
alum |
house (n. a.) |
od |
ji |
how (adv.) |
cliilekd |
sirmd |
how many (adj.) ... |
chimin |
hambal |
how much (adj.) ... |
chiminang, |
indikd |
cldmtang |
|
odris |
hungry (v. imp.) ... |
renge |
denyd |
hunt (v t.) |
sanyar |
deo |
hurt (v. t.) |
hdsti |
uka |
husband (n. a.) |
her el, ham |
unr |
husband & wife(n. a.) |
kulyid |
salangi |
husk (v. t.) |
rung |
husk (n. i.) |
hen |
|
kundi ote, pi ote |
husked rice (n.i.) ... |
chault |
hyaena (n. a."* |
d and d kit Id |
|
gord |
||
buru |
I. |
|
yutu |
||
lor |
identify (v. t.) |
tit'lnrum |
chapal |
idiotic (adj.) |
dondo |
rlit rijany |
if (conj.) |
redo (used as |
ndld |
suffix only) |
ignorant (adj.)
iguana (n. a.)
ill (v. imp.)
illegitimate (adj.) ...
impede (v. t.)
in addition (conj.)...
.in a line (adv.)
in any way what- soever (adv.)
in broad daylight (adv.)
increase (v. i.)
Indian corn (n. i.) ...
in fact (adv.)
infant (n. a.)
infect (v. t.)
inform (v. t.)
in future (adv.) ...
inner room (n. i.) ...
in no way what- soever (adv.)
insanity (n. i.)
insensible (adj.) ...
inside (adv.)
instalment (n. i.) ...
intend (v. imp.) ...
intentionally (adv.)
intestines (n. i.)
in the beginning (adv.) '
in the midst of (adv.)
in the presence of (adv.)
iron (n, i.)
,.iron ore (n. i.)
t irrigate (v. t.)
irrigation reservoir <n. i.)
( 132 ) |
||
dondo |
itch (v. imp.) |
babatd |
tor |
itch (n. i.) |
kasrd |
hdsu |
( |
|
jantd |
J. |
|
kesed |
||
ne bdgekete, |
jackal (n. a.) |
tuiu, kalkal, |
jatkd |
taukuld, |
|
gene gene, gets |
karamchd |
|
gete |
jackfruit (n. i.) |
porso, kantard |
r |
jail (n. i.) |
jel |
jdlekdte |
jdmun tree (n. i.) ... |
kudd ddru |
jealous (v. imp.) ... |
hinsti, chentd |
|
singi maskalre |
join (v. p.) |
mido |
hard, Id, rakab |
joint (n. i.) |
c joren |
gangai |
join together (v. t.) . |
jod, mid |
sdrige, sdrite |
journey (v. i.) |
senhord |
bale lion |
joyful (v. imp.) |
rdvsd |
jan |
judgment (n. i.) ... |
hukum |
kdji, udub, ker |
juice (n. i.) |
rdsi |
derre |
jump (v. t.) ... |
ui |
dding |
junction (n. i ) |
midakantd |
jungle (n. i.) |
bir |
|
jdlekdteokd |
jungle-fowl (n. a.)... |
bir-sim |
baid |
just before daylight |
|
gojolekd |
(adv.) |
mir-mirre |
bitdrre, bitdrtc |
||
kisti |
K. |
|
sanang |
keep (v. t.) |
saitibd |
keep awake (v. t.)... |
en |
|
dddkete |
keep a woman (v. t.) |
do, saitibd |
pord |
keep in the mouth |
|
(v. t.) |
Idtum |
|
siddre, munure |
keep quiet (v. ref.) |
hapdn |
tdldre |
kernel (n. i.) |
jang |
key (n. i.) ... |
chdbi |
|
samanangre |
kick (v. t.) |
padd |
med |
kill (v. t.) |
goe |
bichd, bichd |
kind (adj.) ... |
saiad-korong |
diri |
kingpost (n. i.) |
jdngi |
dd idi, dre |
kiss (v. t.) |
chereb |
kite (n. a.) |
kuid |
|
bdndd |
knee (n. i.) |
mukui, ikum |
knife (n. i.) knock ( v. t.) knot (n. \.) know (v. t.) know by instinct
(v.t.)
km'tiit (n. a.) /\it»i/«ii' (n. a.) kttrthi (n. i.) kttsuni tree (n. i.) ...
L.
> lac (n. a.) , ...
ladder (n. i.) ladle (v. t.) lair0 (n. i.) lake (n. i.) lamp (n. i.) land (n. i.) lane (n. i.)
language (n. i.) ...
lap (v. t.)
last (adj.)
last night (n. i.) ...
last year (n. i.) ...
late (v. p.)»
Idtlii (n. i.)
laugh (v. t.)
lay an egg (v. t.) ...
lay in wait for (v. t.) lazy (adj) leaf (n. i.) leak (v. i.) lean (adj.) lean on (v. t.) learn (v. ref.) leave (v. i.j leave remaining (or) behind (v. t.) ...
( 133 ) |
||
kdtn |
leech (n. a.) |
IKI/ |
tofo |
leep with cowduntr O |
|
tondom |
(v. t.) |
In at], i |
MA |
I'-ft (adj.) |
konir, 1, H.I.I ti |
left (v. p.) |
||
chirgal |
leg (n. i.) |
/.•'itii |
chltt'l I'inii |
leisure (n. i.) |
j'i'rsat |
/\ in i leal |
lend (v. t.) |
/a//, rin em |
hoe |
leopard (n. n.) |
> kiii<l.tr-kiilt'i |
l«i r it ddrn |
.leprosy (n. i.) |
tundn/»iiif/i<i |
lessen (v. t.) |
ddu, dyn |
|
level (adj.) |
bardbari, |
|
enko |
toman, mid |
|
rakabted |
level land (v. t.) ... |
kdrd |
hi |
lick (v. t.) |
jal |
undu, Idta |
lid (n. i.; |
handrub |
dored |
lie (v. t.) |
cliakad |
did, maskal |
lie down (v. i.) |
giti, burum |
ote |
life (n. i.) |
ji |
/ton hard, resed |
light (n. i.) |
did, maskal |
hord |
light (adj.) |
lar |
kdji |
light a cigarette |
|
jal |
(v. t.) |
jundi |
taiom |
light a fire (v. t.) ... |
sen gel ting |
enang nidd |
light a lamp (v. t.)... |
maskal, marsal. |
md, senoean |
lightning (n. a.) ... |
hichir |
sirmd |
like (v. t.) |
suku |
gdrio |
like (adj.) |
lekd |
dandd |
lime (n. i.) |
chund |
Idndd |
limestone (n. i.) ... |
chundiri |
pero, peto, |
limp (v. t.) |
loke |
jdrom, bill |
linseed (n. i.) |
uuchi |
loro |
lip (n. i.) |
loclio |
Idndid |
liqaor-shop (n. i.) ... |
guddin |
sakam |
listen (v. t.) |
aium |
joro |
little (adj.) |
huring |
Utt |
little finger (n. i.) ... |
lion ddro |
tender |
live (v. t.) |
jid |
eton |
Kve (v. ref.) |
tain |
bdge |
liver (n. i.) ... |
im |
lizard (n. a.) |
dondd, tor |
|
tare |
load (v. t.) |
Iddi |
( 134 ) |
|||
load (n. i.) |
bdri |
maiden (n. a.) |
dindd kui |
loan (n. i.) ... |
rin |
maind (n. a.) ... |
rdmi |
lock (n. i.) |
kulpu |
maintain (v. t.) |
asul |
locust (n. a.) |
tukapard |
maize (n. i.) |
yanyai |
lodge (v. t.) |
derd |
make (v. t.) |
bni |
loin-cloth (n. i.) ... |
botoe |
make a hole (v.t.)... |
bu |
long (adj.) |
jil'tng |
make a noise |
|
look (v. t.) |
nel |
(v. t.) |
kdkald |
look after (v.t.) |
saitibd, gotdo |
make charcoal (v. t.) |
hangar |
look down (v. t.) ... |
tirub, med, ddu |
make into powder |
|
look for (v. t.) |
ndm |
(v. t.) |
laud r |
looking glass |
arsi, |
make merry |
n |
(n. i.) |
nepelupurum |
(v. imp.) |
rdrisd |
look sideways |
make preliminary |
||
(v. t.J |
hetd |
arrangements for |
|
look out for (v. t.)... |
loro |
a marriage (v. t.).. |
bdpold |
look up (v. t.) |
sangil, med |
make ready (v. t.) . . |
sekd |
rakab |
make water (v. t.)... |
duki |
|
loosen (v. t.) |
jindal |
male organ (n. i.) ... |
loe |
lop branches (v. t.). . |
hese |
man (n. a.) |
ho |
lose (v. t.) |
ad |
mange (n. i.) |
kasrd |
loose caste (v. p.) ... |
jdti etkdo, |
mangoe (n. i.) |
uli |
ojdtio |
manure (n. i.) |
sdr, guri |
|
lost (adj.) ... |
bamal |
many (adj.) |
purd |
lota (n. i.) |
guti |
map (n. i.) |
naksd |
lotus (n. i.) |
sdlukad |
mark (n. i.) |
anka, china |
louce (n. a.) -... |
siku |
market (n. i.) |
hdt |
loud (adj.) ... |
kdkald |
marriageable girl |
|
love (v. t.) |
suku |
(n.a.) |
hapdnum |
low (adj.) ... |
Idtar |
marry (v. t.) ... |
dandi |
low (v. t.) |
rda |
master (n. a.) ... |
gomke, gus'md |
lower (v. t.) |
ddu, dgu |
mat (n. i.) |
jdti |
low jungle (n. i*) ... |
tondang |
matches (n. i.) ... |
ir-sengel |
low-lying; land |
sdl ote, berd |
matchmaker (n. a,).. |
dutam |
(n. i.) |
matter (n. i.) ... |
sondoro |
|
lungs (n. i.) -... |
borkod |
maul (v. t.) ... |
gotd |
measles (n. i.) |
bumburi |
||
M. |
measure (v. t.) |
mukd |
|
"mad (adj.) |
baid, bdld-bdlu |
measure rice (v. t.). . |
song |
1 maggot (n. a.) , .... |
cJiidu |
meat (n. i.) ... |
jilu |
mdhud (n. i.) ...... |
madkam |
medicine (n. i.) ... |
red |
maiddn (n. i.) .... |
pi |
meet (v. t.) ... |
ddrom, mid |
( 135 )
nit-It (v. i.) |
. .. trr |
mouth (n. i.) |
d |
menses (n. i.) |
... dtd nd ure |
move (v. t.) |
(i/niii |
lijdkiin' liolx'mtt it |
move away (v. t.)... |
tor id, tend |
|
metal cup (n. i.) |
... glnd |
move near (v. t.) ... |
dnni |
inirn ( n. i.) |
... pdlit hdtd |
mucli (adv.) |
purd |
niiililay (n. i.) |
... tikiti |
mud (n. i.) |
lidsd, I- tod, |
middle (adj.) |
... tdld |
j»l>e, dobe |
|
midwife (n. a.) |
... ilnl |
muddy water (n. i.) |
bard dd > |
milk (n. i.) |
... tod |
mushroom (n. i.) ... |
ud |
milk (v. t.) |
... taui |
> muskrat (n. a.) |
clunidi |
millet (n. i.) |
. . . kode |
mustard (n. i.) |
ntdni, ddjany |
mind (n. j.) |
... ji |
myrabolams (n. i.)... |
merel, rold |
minor (n. a.) |
... kd-seavakdiii |
mysterious (adj.) ... |
dkadandd |
inhror (n. i.) |
... am, |
||
nepelupurum |
N. |
||
miscarry (v. t.) |
... endd-ad |
||
miser (n. a.) |
... oiol |
nail (n. i.) |
kdn 1 i |
misfortune (n. i.) |
. . . dnkii |
naked (adj.) |
totd |
mist (n. a.) |
... podsi |
name (n. i.) |
notum, numu |
mistake (v. t.) |
... gul |
namesake (n. a.) ... |
sdki |
mix (v. t.) |
... hondd) mild |
narrow (adj.) |
batari, resed |
mix with water (v. |
t.) led |
navel (n. i.) |
luti |
molasses (n. i.) |
... yur |
near (adj.) |
japd, nde |
money (n. i.) |
... Idkd |
necessity (n. i.) |
dorkdr |
mongoose (n. a.) |
... gindru |
neck (n. i.) |
holo |
monkey (n. a.) |
... .sard, yaii |
necklace (n. i.) |
hisir |
month (n. i.) |
... chdndu |
needle (n. i.) |
sui, svja |
moon (n. a.) |
... chdndu |
niece (n. a.) |
gungii) honerd, |
moonlight (n. i.) |
... tete |
homonkui, |
|
morning (n. i.) |
... setd |
gekui, honkui |
|
morning star (n. a |
.) ango ipil |
neigh (v. t.) |
rdu |
mortgage (n. i.) |
... baiv did, tikd, |
nephew (n. a.) |
gunyu, honied, |
bandar, |
Ipnherel) |
||
bdldjigi |
homonkod |
||
mosquito (n. a.) |
... sikiv |
gekodthonkod |
|
moth (n. a.) |
... pampal, tird, |
nest (n. i.) |
tukd |
patni |
nettle (n. i.) |
tengehing, |
|
mother (n. a.) |
... engd |
jepender |
|
mother-in-law (n. |
a.) handr |
sakam |
|
mouldy (v. t.) |
... bau |
nevertheless (conj.) |
enreo, iminreoj |
mountain (n. i.) |
... burn |
new (adj.) |
ndmd |
mouse (n. a.) |
... chutu |
new moon (n. a.) ... |
mulu |
( 136 )
next year (n. i.) ... |
kdtom, hujit |
omen (n. i.) |
ere |
sirmd |
on (post) |
chetante, |
|
next younger brother |
chetanre |
||
or sister (n. a.) ... |
sunutu |
on behalf of (post.) |
lagitc, layid |
nickname (n. i.) ... |
pale numu |
once (adv.) |
misd |
night (n. i.) |
nidd |
once upon a time |
|
nightmare (v. t.) ... |
bongd otd |
(adv.) |
musing betar, |
nim tree (n. i.) |
nim ddru |
mid dipli |
|
nine (num.) |
area, are |
one (num.) |
miad, mid, mi |
nod (v. i.) |
dum |
one-eyed (adj.) |
kdnrd, kdyri |
noon (n. i.) |
tikin |
one by ono (adv.) |
mido inido |
north (n. i.) |
kdtdchamrd |
onion (n. i.) |
pedji |
nose (n. i.) |
mud, mutd |
only (adv.) |
sumang, sumad |
nose ornament (n. i.) |
gunrd |
ooze out (v. i.) ... |
ol |
nostril (n. i.) |
mud-undu, |
open (v. t.) |
ni |
mutd-undu |
open (adj.) |
siddsddd |
|
not even once (adv.) |
misdo kd |
open the eye (v. t.) |
arid |
nothing (pron.) |
jdndo bano |
open the mouth (v.t.) |
chdb |
not yet (adv.) |
auri |
or (conj.) |
chi |
notwithstanding |
orally (adv.) |
ate |
|
(conj.) |
enreo, iminreo |
order (v. t.) |
hukum |
now (adv.) |
nd |
origin (n. i.) |
upan |
nudge (v. t.) |
gam |
original clearer of |
|
nursery (for plants) |
the soil (n. a.) ... |
munureni, |
|
(n. i.) |
ddrupdrd bakai |
munud parjd |
|
ornament (n. i.) ... |
singdr |
||
. |
orphan (n. a.) |
dmbdrob |
|
oath (n. i.) |
sara |
other (adj.) |
etd |
obey (v. t.) |
mandting |
ought (v. irreg.) ... |
lagdtingd |
obscene language |
outcaste (v. t.) |
ojdti, jdti etkd |
|
(n. i.) |
mdge |
outrage (v. t.) |
pochodte do |
obstacle (n. i.) ... |
kenesed, gdndi |
outside (adv.) |
bdrte, bdrre |
obstruction (n. i.)... |
kenesed, gdndi |
over (post.) |
chetante, |
obtain (y. t.) |
ndm |
chetanre |
|
occur (v. irreg.) ... |
hobdo |
overflow (v. t.) |
pair |
offence (n. i.) |
chird, dos |
owe (v. t.) |
chird, rin |
often (adv.) |
isu dund |
owl (n. a.) |
kokor |
oil (n. i.) |
sunum |
owner (n. a.) |
gusind |
'oil (v. t.) |
ojo |
||
1 oil-press (n. i.) |
gdnri, jdnti |
P. |
|
old (adj.) |
hdm, buri, |
pace (n. i.) |
chandang |
pdpri |
pachwai (n. i.) |
diang, Hi |
C i.l I . i ii. i.) paddv bird ( n :i. ) ... pain ( i). i.) pain' ( v. t. )
JHllllS tlVC ( 1). I.) ...
palate ( n. i.) palm troo (n. i.) ... pane of <jlass (n. i.) f> ipaiyd (n. i.) paper (n. i.) pardon (v. t.) parents (n. a.) parrot (n. a.) pa.-t (n. i.) partridge (n. a.) ... .pass' from hand to
hand (v. t.) pass urine (v. t.) ... paw (n. i.) pay a debt (v. t.) ... peacock (n. a.) peak (n. i.) peel trn.it (v. t.) ... peel off the bark of
a tree (v. t.) penis (n. i.) peon (n. a.) perhaps (adv.) perspiration (n. i.)... perspire (v. imp.) ... petition (v. t.) phlegm (n. i.) pidr tree (n. i.) pice (n. i.) pickaxe (n. i.) pick up (v. t.) picture (n. i.) piebald (adj.) piece (n. i.) pig (n. a.) pigeon (n. a.) pimple (n. i.)
<>n<>l,j<xl tiinr d'irit limit h' kit, i darn arsi
sakant
cnga-apu doe, bead, rupu handting, itad chitri
chdpal
duki
kdtd
hal
mdrd
chut kde
hoio
Id
loe
chaprdsi
torang, idu
balbal-dd
balbal
darkds
kde
tdrob ddm
poisd
kankua, cltolkt1
chu, halang
naksd
kabrd
do, em tafad
//«
<-lidrd
ro
tdli,
sukuri, sitkri
dudmvl
pusri
i>i/ n. i. } ... A
pit (n. i.)
place (v. t.)
place (n. i.)
plaintiff (n. a.)
plait (v. t.)
plant (n. i.)
plant (v. t.)
plantain (n. i.)
plant closely (v. t.) j>drd
plaster (v. t.) ... jod
plaster with mud
(v. t.) ... jdlom
plate (n. i.) ... kutrd,
tdri (made of metal) ; (made of stone) ; chukdi, chitki, kalgi (made of leaves ) ; latter is more a bowl than a plate.
play (v. i.) ... inung
play the drum (v. t.) ru
play the fiddle (v. t.) banam
play the flute (v. t.) orong
pleased (v. imp.) ... suki*
pliable (adj) ... Hud
plot of land (n. i.)... ote
plough (n. i.) ... naU
plough (v. t.) ... siu, si
plough cattle (n. a.) dvr nri
ploughshare (n. i.) pdnl
pluck fruit or flowers (v. t.) ... god
pluck leaves (v.t.)... he
pluck maize cobs (v. t.)
plum tree (n. i.)
point (n. i.)
point out (v. t.)
poison (v. t.)
poison (n. i.)
poisonous (adj.)
poor (adj.) ... renge
porcupine (n. a.) ... jiki
chuiujd b.ikrd ddru chut kde chundul rub, bisi em b'mi
( 138 )
portion (n. i.) ... hand tiny, itad possess (v. t.) ... dakal, dakal
dyu possible (v. irreg.)... dai, Jwbd dai,
hobdolekd post (used in house
building) (n. i.)... kuntd pot (n. i.) ... chdtu (made
of earth) ; patrd (made of stone) potato (n. i.) ... sdngd pounded rice (n. i.) tdben
pour (v. t.) |
dul |
pour off slowly while |
|
covered (v. t.) ... |
tendd |
powder (v. t.) |
laud |
practise (v. t.) |
sebe |
precede (v. t.) |
der |
precipitous (adj.) ... |
hi |
pregnant (adj.) |
hambal |
prepare (v. t.) |
sekd, bai |
present (v. irreg.)... |
mend, hdjir |
press (v. t.) |
otd |
press oil (v. t.) |
len |
pretend (v ref.) ... |
bain |
prevent (v. t.) |
mand, esed, |
kesed |
|
price (n. i.) |
gonong |
prick (v. t.) |
yittu |
prison (n. i.) |
jel |
prisoner (n. a.) |
koidi |
prod (v. t.) ... |
ruuny, ho tor, |
tundd |
|
profit (n. ir) |
Idb |
prohibit (y. t.) |
mand |
proof (n. i.) |
sabuj |
prop (v. t.) ... |
turub |
proper (adj.) ... |
tik |
property (n. i.) |
biti, yinis |
'protect (v. t.) |
danany, banchau |
'proud (v. imp.) |
mamarany |
pull after (v. t.) ... |
or |
pull up (v. t.) |
taui |
pumpkin (n. i.)
punish (v. t.)
pupil (n. a.)
pupil of the eye (n. i.)
pursue (v. t.)
push (v. t.)
put (v. t.)
put inside (v. t.) ...
put in the ground
(v.t.)
put into the fire (v.t.) put into the mouth ,
(v.t.)
put on a dhoti (v. t.) put on a sdri (v. t.). . put on clothes (v. t.) put on oil (v. t.) put on paint, plaster,
whitewash, coal
tar, etc. (v. t.) ... put on tiles (v. t.)... put rut new
blossoms (v. t.)... put out new leaves
(v.i.) put out of the way
(v.t.) python (n. a.)
quagmire (n. i.) quarrel (v. rec.) .
quench (v. t.) question (v. t.) quick (adj.) quickly (adv.) quicksand (n. i.) quicksilver (n. i.) quiet (adj.) quill (n. i.)
kakdru, kakru,pdndoi sajd
eloni, che'id med-rdjd hdr, kdki, pichd udur do, em dder
bid
urub i
djom
pindd
er
tusing
ojo
jod kecho da I
moi sayen
dtom burn biny
jaydd eperavy,
goponde hdrob kuli dnjd
dnjdte, bode dalki yitil pdrd hdpd il
« l.-.l. )
R.
rabbit ( n. a.) ... knldi'
ni'lish (n. i.) ... mitrai rafter (n. i.) ... seneor
rag (n. i.) ... chid a
railway (n. i.) ... rel rain (n. a.) ... gamd
rainbow (i. p.) ... rnlbiinj
ongtadde (see note against rulbing in lio-English vocabulary.) raise (v. *.) ... ufdc'/u, ittd
raiyat (n. a.) ... parjd rape (v. t.) ... pochodte do
rat (n. a.) ... kdfed
•ravine (n. i.) ... haui raw (adj.) ... berel
razor (n. i.) ... holad, hoioted
reach (v, t.) ... betd,seter,tebd
read (v. t.) ... parau
really (adv.) ... sdrige, sdrite
reap (v. t.) ... ir
receipt (n. i.) ... rasid receive (v. t.) ... ndm recognise (v. t.) ... neluntm reconcile (v. t.) ... juriurd, baiurd record (v. t.) ... ol recover (vi t.) ... ndmurd recover casto (v. t.). jdtiurd, jdti
rakab
recover conscious- ness (v. i.) ... tuti rectify (v. t.) ... jikurd,
buginurd
refuse (v. irreg.) ... kd refuse (n. i.) ... jobrd
refuse heap (n. i.)... dnbi register (n. i.) ... boi rejoice (v. imp.) ... rdvsd relate (v. t.) ... kdji
relation (n. a.) ... hdgd relay (n. •.) ... ddk
release; (v. t.) ... d
reliable (adj.) ... sdriolekd remain (v. t.) ... sare remain <|iiiot (v. ref.) /ia/<«/oo/ remember (v. t.) ... urntt remove (v. t.) ... idi remove an obstacle
(v. t.) ... da
render an account
, (v. t.) ... lekd dgu
rent (n. i.) ... panchd
repair (v. t.) ... baiurd repeat (v. t.) ... kdjiurd repent (v. imp.) ... hidting replough (v. t.) ... karai reprimand (v. t.) ... domkau reproduce (v. i.) ... gay, gavrd rescue (v. t.) ... danang,
banchau rescue from wild
animals (v. t.) ... hdrdu reservoir (n. i.) ... bdndd resin (n. i.) ... jair
rest (v. i.) ... ru
return (v. i.) ... rud, rudurd,
hujuurd
reveal (v. t.) ... udub
revenge (v. t.) ... halurd
reverse (v. t.) ... biur
reward (n. i.) ... bogti*
rheumatism (n. i.) ... bdt
rib (n. i.) ... sdejany, saijang
rice (n. i.) ... chauli
( uncooked ) ; mdn^i^ dundu ( cooked )
rice-beer (n. i.) ... dhinp, Hi
rich (adj.) ... munda
riddle (n. i.) ... kdni
ride (v. i.) ... de, lied
ridge (on top of
house) (n. i.) ... mual
ridge-pole (n. i.) ... mutitl
ridicule (v. t.) |
Idndd |
salnry (n. i.) ... K did |
right (adj). |
tik, bugi, biigin |
sale (n. i.) ... nildrn |
right (adj.) |
etom, jom ti |
saliva (n. i.) ... ulidd |
ring (n. i.) |
pold, mundam |
salt (n. i.) ... bulung |
ring (v. t.) |
sari |
salt-lick (n. i.) ... hdlw.ad |
ringworm (n. i.) ... |
kaprd |
saltpetre (n. i.) ... sord |
rinse the mouth |
same (adj.) ... mid, midge |
|
f (v. t.) |
Imtum |
sand (n. i.) ... yitil |
ripen (v. i.) |
jdrom, mdtd |
sandals (n. i.) ... korom |
rise (v. i.) |
ol, tur, utd • |
(wooden) ; karpd ( leather ) |
river (n. i.) |
yard |
sandal wood (n. i.) ... chondon |
road (n. i.) |
fiord, sarap |
sandfly (n. a.) ... pudki |
roam (v. i.) |
senbd |
sap of a tree (n.i.)...( sosoi |
roar (v. t.) |
rumul, rda |
satisfy (v. imp.) ... hdrob, suku ' |
roast (v. t.) |
rapd |
save (v. t.) ... danany, |
rob (v. t.) |
re |
banchau |
rock (n. i.) |
hutub, sereng |
saw (n. i.) ... koroto |
roof (n. i.) |
salandi |
say (v. t.) ... kdji, men |
room (v. i.) |
od |
say "no" (v. irreg.) . kd |
root (n. i.) |
red |
say "yes" (v. t.) ... ed |
rope (n. i.) |
bair, pdgd, bor |
scale of a fish (n. i.) hardd |
rot (v. i.) |
soed |
scales for weighing |
round (adj.) |
tuli, duri, gol |
(n. i.) ... tula |
roundabout (adj.) ... |
biur-biur, |
scar (n. i.) ... gaured china |
bankd-bankd |
scarcity (n. i.) ... r'mgd |
|
rub (v. t.) |
ir |
scatter (v. t.) ... nitir |
rump (n. i.) |
dubui |
scissors (n. i.) ... lanatab |
run (v. t.) |
nir |
school (n. i.) ... iskul- |
run away (v. i.) ... |
nir |
scold (v. t.) ... domkau |
rupee (n. i.) |
tdkd |
scorpion (n. a.) ... mdrmdr |
rust (n. i.) |
i |
scowl (v. t.) ... kurkurte nel |
scrape off (v. t.) ... husid |
||
S. ( |
scratch (v. t.) ... gotd, paskd |
|
sabai grass( (n. i.) ... |
badchom |
scream (v. t.) ... iu |
sack (n. i.) |
gum, kurchu |
screech (v. t.) ... iu |
sacred grove (n.i.)... |
jaier |
screw (v. t:) ... choe |
sacrifice (v. t.) |
bongd, pujd |
scrub (n. i.) ... tondang |
sacrificer (n. a.) |
diuri |
scrub (v. t.) ... gasar |
saxl (v. imp.) |
hidting |
scurf (n. i.) ... chitu |
saddle (n. i.) |
pdlan |
scythe (n. i.) ... ddtdrom |
sagar (n. i.) |
sagi |
sea (n. i.) ... dored |
sal (n. i.) |
sarjom |
season (n. i.) ... dipli |
seat (n. i.) secret (adj.) secrete ( v. t.) see (v. t.) seed (n. i.) seem (v. p.) seize (v. t.) seldom (adv.) selfish (adj.) sell (v. t.) sentence (v. t.) separate (adj.) separate (v. t.)o .., .servant (n. a.)
set'(v. i.)
set free (v. t.)
set silkworms'eggs
(v.t.) set silkworms or lac
(v. t.)
ilii/'tt <i
i/dini/iii
iikn
Ititd, lii'i-eted atkdi-o, iirln
mua
kd-t-nio
dkiriny
hukunt
tdnyd, cfd
bengd
ddsi, cliitnt,
ndldtani hasur da, bdye
1 ipan dnrd
settle a raiyat (v. t.) parjd dub
settlement (n. i.) ... mukd
seven (num.) ... aed, ae
sew (v. t.) ... yd
sexual intercourse ... do, jayar, juti, (v. t.) niifd
shade (n. k) ... umbul
shadow (n. i.) ... umbul
shafts (of a sagar)
(n. i.) . ... jdnyi, udrd
shake (v. i.) ... ruku
shake (v. t.) ... rukuichi
shake the head (mean- ing "yes") (v. t.) doro
shake the head (mean- ing "no") (v. t.) bo ruku
shallow (adj.) shame (v. imp.) share (v. t.) share (n. i.)
tembe, kd-ikir giu
hat in y
ha nd tiny, itad, bay
sharp (adj.) sharpen (v. t.) shava (v. t.) shed for cattle (n. i.) shed the skin (v. i.) sheep (n. a.) shell (n. i.) shelter (v. t.) shin (n. i.) .shine (v. t.) shiver (v. i.) shoe (n. i.) shoot (i. e. plants)
(v. t.)
shoot (v. t.) shop (n. i) shore (n. i.) short (adj.) short-sighted (adj.) shoulder (n. i.) shove (v. t.) show (v. t.) shrewd (adj.) shrivel up (v. i.) ... shudder (v. i.) shut (v. t.) shut the eye(v. t.)... shuttle (n. i.) shy (v. imp.) sick (v. imp.) sickle (n. i.) side (n. i.) sieve (n. i.) sift (v. t.) sigh (v. t.) sign (n. i.) sign (v. t.) signal (n. i.) signature (n. i.) sikhd-bltanyd (n. i.)... silent (adj.) silk (n. i.)
leser
leter
hoio
gond
utrdo
i n'l n di
iK-iidii
il'iiKtiif/, l"inchait
kurchukdtd
maskal, /»/
ruku
karpd
onion
fore, tote, tu'my
dokdn
kuti
huriny, tumbrub
dumdnld
taran
udur
udub
chutur
yoso
yisir
handed
japid
donyi
yiu
lidtu
ddtdr<»n
hiti
chd^d
chdh'i.
su
china
mi
cliind
sui
sikiir-bair lutpd lunyam, luyam
( 142 )
silkworm (n. a.) ... silt (n. i.) silver (n. i.) similar (adj.) simple (adj.) sin (n. i.) since (post.) sing (v. t.) sink (v. i.) sip (v. t.) sirgujd (n. i.) sister (n. a.)
sister-in-law (n. a.).. tevdkui, sit (v. i.)
sit astride (v. i.) .. sit on eggs (v. t.) .. sit on the haunches
(v. i.) six (num.) skin (n. i.) skin (v. t) skip (v. t.) skull (n. i.) sky (n. i.) slap (v. t.) sleep (v. i.) • .. sleep on the back
(v. i.) sleep on the side
(v. i.) sleep on the stomach
(v. i.) slide (v. i.) slightly raised
(adj.) slip (v. i.) slipknot (n. i.) slippery (adj.) slowly (adv.) sly (adj.)
lungam chidu |
smack (v.t.) ... taping |
tobrd, gitil |
small (adj.) ... huring |
, rupd |
small-pox (n. i.) ... mdri |
, lekd |
smart (v. imp.) ... wsur |
siddsddd |
smell (v. t.) ... soan,ji |
chird, dos |
smile (v. t.) ... germoing |
ete |
smite the breast |
, durang |
(v. t.) ... tdping |
. cJidru |
smoke (n. i.) ... sukul |
, chereb |
smoke (v. t.) ... sukul sib |
rdmtid, gunjd |
snail (n. a.) ... gendd |
dji, mm, misierd^ |
snake (n a.) ... bing |
undikui |
snap the fingers |
. djihandr, |
(v.t.) ... teb |
kimin, iril, hilt |
snap up with the |
. dub |
fingers (v. t.) ... tin |
. de, lied |
snatch away (v. t.).. re |
. abdrum |
sneeze (v. t.) ... acliu |
sniff (v. t.) ... so?% |
|
. chuchungur |
snipe (n. a.) ... kedbatd, kebatd |
. turuid, turui |
snore (v. t.) ... hutir |
. wpr, liartd |
soap (n. i.) ... sdbon |
. pord |
sob (v. t.) ... kusud |
. ui |
soft (adj.) ... lebe, norom |
. bojang |
softly (adv.) ... sudete |
. rimil |
soft water (n. i.) ... etang dd |
. chaprd |
soil (n. i.) ... hdsd |
. giti |
sole of the foot ... kdtd-talkd, |
(n. i.) kdtd-rdmd |
|
. sandangte giti |
solid (adj.) ... kete |
so many (adj.) ... imin |
|
. sutdte giti |
some (adj.) ... huringlekd, |
tdrdmdrd |
|
. oborte giti |
somehow (adv.) ... jdlekdte |
. jil |
sometimes (adv.) ... misd misd |
so much (adv.) ... iminang |
|
. dipd |
son (n. a.) ... Aon, kodhon |
.JH |
song (n. i.) ... durang |
. on&lbdvsi |
( ' wedding song ' is called dong |
. jijil |
and ' comic song' lagri durang ; |
. maite, sudete |
both these having been taken |
. chutur |
from the Santalg.) |
( 143 )
son-iii-la\v (n. a.) ... MH.II (;nlv.) (ji. i.)
«>rry (v. imp.) sort (v. t.) sound (v. t.) soup (n. i.) sour (adj.) south (n. i.) sow (v. t.) sowi.in; <eason (n. i.) spade (n. i.) span (n. i.) * ... spark (n. i.) sparrow (n. a.) 'spear (n. i.) speak (v. t.) speak falsely (v. t.).. spices (n. i.) spider (n. a.) spider's web (n. i.)... spill (v. t.) spin (v. t.) spine (n. i.) spinning-wheel (n.i.) spit (v. t.) spleen (n. i.) split bamboo (n.i.)... split into two parts
(v. t.) spoil (v. t.) spoon (n. i.) sprain (v. t.) spread a bed (v.t.)... spread a mat (v.t.)... spread a table (v. t.) spread grain out
(v.t.)
spread stones (V. t.).. spread straw (v. t.)..
spread the legs apart (v. t.)
nr<i |
ring (n. i.) |
pnldtl'i |
lin/'it'1, /'<>,/<• |
.-pring (v. t.) |
|
'."'" |
sprinkle (v. t.) |
l/ii-' lii |
Itidtintf |
sprout (v. i.) |
omon |
tdnffd |
spur (n. i.) |
r/n7yu(natural); |
siiri |
kdti (artificial) |
|
rax/' |
squeeze out with the |
|
./'!/" |
hand (v. t.) |
cAt/xi |
bokanduki |
squint (n. i.) |
kdse med. |
her |
• |
korche med |
r<»ii, hero |
squirrel (n. a.) |
tu |
ki/dlatn |
stab (v. t.) |
sobo |
bifii |
stagger (v. i.) |
dampd-dumpu |
I'tc' |
stand (v. i.) |
tingu |
detfem |
stand abuse (v. t.)... |
sdngi |
bar did, barchi |
star (n. a.) |
ipil |
kdji, men |
start (v. t.) |
ete |
chakad |
startle (v. t.) |
birkaiif boroichi |
mosld |
starve (v. t.) |
uu |
bindirdm |
statement (n. i.) ... |
kdji |
jdlom |
stay (v. i.) |
tdngiy tain |
endd |
steal (v. t.) |
kumbu |
tdkiti |
steam (n. i.) |
oiong |
sindurijang |
steep slope (n. i.) ... |
andgu, anddu, |
rent a |
ranakab |
|
be |
step-brother (n. a.). . |
bauu, undi |
pild |
step-daughter (n. a.). |
honerd |
bdtd |
step-father (n. a.) ... |
kdkd |
step-mother (n. a.)... |
gauing |
|
chdfd |
step-sister (n. a.) ... |
dji, mi si, |
efkd |
_ |
niiaii'rd, undikui |
hi nd i |
step-son (n. a.) |
housed, |
lotoe |
'honherel |
|
bil |
stick (n. i.) |
dand'i |
ated |
stick (v. t.) |
j"d, jer |
bil |
stiff (adj.) |
kete |
still (conj.) |
enreo, iminreo |
|
tdsi |
still-born (adj.) |
goete jonomlen |
ated |
sting (v. t.) |
tu |
ated |
sting (n. i.) |
tunu |
stir (v. t.) |
hondd |
|
tdndd |
stomach (n. i.) |
laii |
( 144 )
stone (n. i.) |
diri, liutub, |
sudden (adj.) |
dchakd |
sereng |
suddenly (adv.) |
dchakdte |
|
stool (n. i.) |
gdndu, machild |
sue (v. t.) |
ndlis |
gdndu |
suffer (v. i.) |
sating |
|
stoop (v. t.) |
tirub |
sufficient (adj.) |
Idli, jokd |
stop (v. t.) |
ddrom, kesed |
sugar fn. i.) |
chini |
stop temporarily, e. g. |
sugarcane (n. i.) ... |
gur-dandd |
|
on a journey (v. t.) |
... derd |
suicide (v. ref.) |
goen |
stork (n. a.) |
genddri |
sulphur (n. i.) |
gondo |
storm (n. i.) |
hoio |
sun (n. a.) |
singi |
story (n., i.) |
kdji, kdni |
sunbeam (n. i.) |
turtunp |
stout (adj.) |
kiri, kete^pean |
sunshine (n. i.) |
jete f |
straight (adj.) |
muli |
support (v. t.) |
asul, dubumbul, |
strain (v. t.) |
iting, chdld |
sambarau |
|
strange (adj.) |
dkadandd |
support (physically) |
|
strangle (v. t.) |
limbud |
(v. t.) |
turub |
straw (n. i.) |
busu, bdbdsing |
surprise (v. t.) |
dkachakd |
stray (v. p.) ... |
ado |
surround (v. t.) |
jurbiur |
stream (n. i.) |
hongard |
survey (n. i.) |
mukd |
stretch the legs (v.t.). |
cliundld |
suspect (v. t.) |
dnden |
stride (n. i.) |
cJiandang |
swallow (v. t.) |
ud |
strike (v. t.) |
tdm |
swamp (n. i.) |
jagdd |
strike against (v. t.). |
to |
swan (n. a.) |
honso |
strike with a spade |
swarm of bees (n. i.) |
jur |
|
(v.t.) |
kordm |
swear (v.t.) |
sard |
strike with the paw |
sweat (n. i.) |
balbal-dd |
|
(v.t.) |
tegd |
sweep (v. t.) |
joo |
string (n. i.) |
bair, pdgd |
sweet (adj.) |
nogbd, sibil |
string of a bow (n.i.). |
hatual |
sweetmeats (n. i.) ... |
metal |
string of a fiddle(n.i.) |
bale |
sweet potato (n. i.)... |
sdngd |
striped (adj.) |
onol |
swell (v. i.) |
mo |
strong (adj.) |
pean, kete |
swell out the cheeks |
|
strong (v. p.) |
peo |
(v.t.) . ... |
kope |
stumble ((v. i.) |
tumbid |
swim (v. t.) |
oiar |
stump (n. i.) |
butd |
swing (v. t.) |
ddngdung |
stupid (adj.) |
dondo |
sword (n. i.) |
torai |
submerge (v. t.) ... |
topd |
||
subsequently (adv.).. |
taiomte, |
• |
|
* |
taiomre |
table (n. i.) |
mej |
'succour (v. t.) |
dengd |
tail (n. i.) |
chadlom |
suck (v. t.) |
cheped |
tailless (adj.) |
band id |
suckle (v. t.) |
nunuai |
take (v. t.) |
idi |
( 145 )
take can- ( inter.) ... hike earo of (v. t.)... tako eliai'iM- ol' (v. t.) take down (v. t.) ... tako hold o£ (v.t.)... take otV clothes (v.t.) take oil' a dhoti or
/' (v. t.)
take olV tin- iiro(v. t.) take out (v. t.) tako ou^ of the
ground (y. t.) tako out with 4he
nand (v. t.) take shelter (v. t.)... •take" shelter from
rain (v. i.) take up by the roots
(v.t.)' tale (n. i.) tall (adj.) tamarind (n. i.) tame (v. t.) tamo (adj.) tank (n. i.) Tdnti (n. a.) tar (n. i.) taste (v. t./ tattoo (v. t.) teach (v. t.) tear (v. t.) tear into pieces (v. t.) tear with teeth (v. t.) tears (n. i.) tell (v. t.) tempt (v. t.) ten (num.) tent (n. i.)
tepid (adj.) terraced lowland (n. i.)
Ul'hd, IH'liO |
terraced upland |
MtUtbd |
(n. i.) ... y/, km"! i |
,/,if,'i,, |
testicle (n. i.) ... ]>efo |
ml" |
than (conj.) |
wlA |
that (pron. & adj.)... <'/<a, en |
tv4 |
thatch (n. i.) ... saiu |
thatch (v. t.) ... saiu </"/ |
|
nin, tntit |
Thaterd (n. a.) ... Tintri |
ml |
then (adv.) ... enany, ente |
O/, ondoilil |
therefore (conj.) ... nedmente, |
nedlayite, endmente, endlagite |
|
tud |
thick (adj.) ... gold, ibil |
thief (n. a.) ... kumbu |
|
din |
thigh (n. i.) ... bulu |
danang |
thin (adj.) ... etang, usu, |
batari |
|
sur |
thing (n. i.) ... girds |
think (v. t.) ... atkdr |
|
tub |
thirsty (v. imp.) ... tetang |
kdji, kdni |
this (pron. & adj.)... ned, ne |
salanyi |
thorn (n. i.) ... janum |
j°jo |
thread (n. i.) ... sutam |
asul |
threaten (v. t.) ... domkau |
odren, hdturen |
three (num.) ... apid, ape |
jntkuri |
thresh (v. t.) ... en |
Penain |
threshing-floor (n. i.) kolom |
alkatrd |
throat (n. i.) ... ututod, ututud |
chakd |
throw (v. t.) ... hurldj hitdmd, |
kodd |
ter |
eto |
throw away (v. t.)... endd |
i-harhd, oe |
thrust (v. t.) ... hot or, ruung |
keclid |
thumb (n. i.) ... engd-ddro |
rere |
thumb impression ... mailing gdndate |
med-dd |
(n. i.) arJka, tip |
kdji |
thunder (n. a.) ... rimil-sdri |
birau |
thunderbolt (n. i.)... ter |
geled, gel |
tick (n. a.) ... tiki |
lijdred od, |
tickle (v. t.) ... gamang |
tambuod |
ticklish (v. imp.) ... gamang |
urgum |
tie (v. t.) ... tol |
tie tightly (v. t.) ... urui |
|
tdl |
tiger (n. a.) ... htld |
( 146 )
tighten (v. t.)
til (n. i,)
tile (v. t.)
tiles (n. i.)
time (n. i.)
tip (n. i.)
tired (v. imp.)
tobacco (n. i.)
today (adv.)
toe (n. i.)
toenail (n. i.)
together (adv.)
tomorrow (adv.) ...
tongue (n. i.)
too (adv.)
tooth (n. i.) toothbrush (n. i.) ... top (n. i.) tortoise (n. a.) tortuous (adj.) touch (v. t.) transfer lac from
tree to tree (v.t.) transplant (v. t.) ... trap (n. i.) tread (v. t.) tree (n. i.) tremble (v. i.) tribe (n. i.) troop (n. i.) trouble (n. i.) true (^adj.^ truly (adv.) trunk of a tree (n. i.) trust (v. i.) try a case (v. t.) ... try a purchase (v.t/) tumble down (v. i.).. turban (n. i.) turmeric (n. i.) turn out (v. t.)
iting
tilming .
keclw dal
keclw
dipli
chutkde
Idyd
S"kul
tisiny
gdnda <
sarsar
midre
gapd
Ife, alang
ofused as a
suffix) data karkad
chetan, chut Me lioro
biur-biiir jut id, feed
jan rod
jdlom, arau tega ddru ruku kili guti duku sdri
sdrige, sdrite butd sdri dorbdr nelatkdr hdndi bent a sasang hdrol
turn round (v. t.) ... biur twilight (n. i.) ... mir-mir twin children (n. a.) jimki honking twist (v. t.) ... choe, mi
twist the tail (v. t.) pere two (numf) ... bdrid, bdr
u
ugly (v. i) umbrolla (n. i.) .< . unanimously (adv.) unboiled (adj.) uncle (n. a.)
unclean (adj.) under (adv.) understand (v. t.) ... undress (v. t.) unexpected (adj.) ... unexpectedly (adv.). unhusked rice (n.i,). unmarried (adj.) ... unrefined sugar
(n- i.)
untie (v. t.) until (adv.) untrue (adj.) unwilling (v. irreg.). unwrap cocoons (v.t.) upland, i. e. unter-
raced cultivated
land (n. i.) upper arm (n. i.) ... upper garment (n.i.) uproot (v. t.) upset (v. t.) up to (adv.) urid (n. i.) urine (n. i.)
etkff nelo chdtom midre, midte adod dpo, kdkd,
kumd, mdmd bisi
Idtarre, subdre bujaut samjau tud
dchakd dchakdte bdbd dindd
gur
rd<-
chimin jdke.d
chakad
kd
bor
gord ote
supu
sutui
rub
ultd
jokd
ranibd
duki
( 147 )
V. |
water channel (n. |
i.) dd-hord, ot»1, |
|
ind> i'i |
|||
vaccination in. i.).. |
tiled |
||
\ ' valley m. i.^ |
sokod |
waterfall (n. i.) |
... tdyi, dul-dd |
value (n. i.) valuable (adj.) various (adj.) |
gonong gonongan < t<i >•>'{, kilimili |
watcrsnako (n. a.) wave (n. i.) |
... sakombing, dundnl'iiui ... fhtfl |
•table ( n. i.) ... |
dd |
wax (n. i.) |
... tit utul |
vein (n. i.) |
sir |
weave (v. t.) |
... tenq |
verandah (n. i.) very (adv.) |
pindigi isu |
weaver (n. a.) fredding song (n. |
... penaiti i.) d o)i ;t |
very many (adj.) ... village (n. i.) |
isu purd, sdngi hdtu |
weed (v. t.) weeds (n. i.) |
... lied ... dumbu |
V > village priest (n. a.) |
diuri |
week (n. i.) |
... hdt |
vineyard (n. i.) |
ddk-bakai |
well (adj. & v. i. ) |
... I'ugi. bugin |
yiolonce (n. i.) |
pochod . |
well (adv.) |
. . . bugite |
visible (v. i.) |
nelo |
well (n. i.) |
... sud, chud |
\ / voluntarily (adv.)... |
snkntf |
wellknown (v. i.) |
... uai, umi |
vomit (v. t.) |
uld |
west (n. i.) |
... singihasur |
\ / vulture (n. a.^ |
didi |
wet (adj.) |
... odad, Inm |
vulva (n. i.) |
ruji |
what (pron.) |
... okond, |
chikand |
|||
what (adj.) |
... okon, rhikan |
||
wheat (n. i.) |
... gom |
||
wages (n. i.) |
ndld |
wheel (n i.) |
. . . sagi |
waist (n. i.) |
mdeang |
when (adv.) |
... choild^ chuild |
wait (v. i.) |
tdngi, tain |
where (adv.) |
... okonre, okonte, |
wait for (v. t.) |
tdngi |
okonpdre |
|
wake (v. i.) |
ntd |
whip (v. t.) |
... hdnsd |
wake (v. t.) |
utdichi |
whirlwind (n. a.) |
. . . horlosi |
walk (v. i) |
sen, seno |
whisper (v. t.) |
... tided, liaiam |
wall (n. i.) |
ginil |
whistle (v. i.) |
... gole |
want (n. i.) |
ringd |
white (adj.) |
... fundi |
want (v. t.) |
asi |
white ant (n. a.) |
. . . nidir |
warm (adj.) |
urgitm |
white louce (n.a.) |
... lijd$iku |
warm at a fire (v. t.) |
jirub |
whitewash (v. t.) |
... jod |
wash clothes (v. t.) |
itkid |
who (pron.) |
. . . okoe |
wash hands, face |
whole (adj.) |
... saben |
|
or feet (v. t.) |
abung |
whole day (n. i.) |
... singi satub |
wasp (n. a.) |
surpang |
why (adv.) |
... chikanred) |
waste (adj.) |
parid |
cliikandmente, |
chikand lagite |
watch (v. t.) |
loro, horo |
wicked (adj.) |
... etkd |
water (n. i.) |
dd |
widow (n. a.) |
... rdndi-erd |
( 148 ) |
|||
wife (n. a.) |
era |
womb (n. i.) |
. . laii |
wild (adj.) |
birren |
wonderful (adj.) . |
.. dkadandd |
wild dog,(n. a.) ... |
tani |
wood (n. i.) |
., sdn |
wild duck (n. a.) ... |
hedeyele |
wooden post (n. i.). |
.. kuntd |
willing (v. i.) |
suku |
word (n. i.) |
. . kdji |
wind (n. a.) |
hoio |
work (v. t.) |
.. pain |
winding (adj.) |
biur-biur |
worm (n. a.) |
.. chidu |
window (n. i.) |
kirki |
worship (v. t.) |
.. bonyd, pujd |
wine (n. i.) |
ddkrdsi |
wound (v. t.) |
.. gau |
wing (n. i.) |
dparob < |
wrap (v. t.) |
.. tol |
wink (v. t.) |
rapid |
wrestle (v. t.) |
.. tdbd r |
winnow (v. t.) |
atur, guni) keto |
wrong (adj.) |
.. etkd |
winnowing basket |
< |
||
(n. i.) |
hat a |
y. |
c |
wipe (v. t.) |
jod |
yarn (n. i.) |
.. sutam, sdnr/d |
wish (v. i.) |
sanang |
year (n. i.) |
sirmd |
witch (n. a.) |
baiaddni, |
year after next |
|
ddnri era |
(n. i.) |
. . tor kdlom |
|
witch-doctor (n. a.) |
deortd, sokd |
yellow (adj.) |
.. sasanglekd |
witness (n. a.) |
gaud |
yes (inter.) |
.. ed |
without rhyme or |
yesterday (adv.) . |
.. hold |
|
reason (adv.) |
sdmdte |
yet (adv.) |
. . enreo |
without a tail (adj.) |
band id |
yoke (n. i.) |
. . dnr |
wizard (n. a.) |
baiaddni, dd&ri |
young (adj.) |
.. bale, seped |
wolf (n. a.) |
mindi-kuld |
young man (n. a.)., |
..seped |
woman (n. a.) |
erd, kui |
young woman (n. a, |
) Jiapdnum |
HO-ENGLISH.
VOCABULARY.
.in (r. t.) to sit on eggs afniinj (v. t.)... to wash the hands,
feet or face. Sometimes used
also for the whole body. acluill, aldii- a stick with a sharp
dandd (*.?'.) iron point used for
prodding cattle achu*(v. t.) ... to sneeze ad (r. t.) ... to lose adkir\r. t.}... to carry away, carry
off, abduct
ado (r. p.) ... to stray, be lost adod (adj.) ... unboiled a<?d, ae (num.) seven aiub (n. i.) ... evening aiubo(v. p.)... to be benighted aiunt (v. £.)... to hear, listen alany (n. i.)... the tongue alkatrd (n. i.) tar ambari (n. i.) epilepsy awnd-s amna
(adv.) .t. face to face anddu (n. i.) an entrance ddu (n. i.) i dyu (n. i.) / and l<l (//.«.)... a bull aw? (n. i.) ... dawn anyo ipii (n. a.) morning star anjidi(v. t.)... to join the hands to-
gether to drink water or measure
rice. Mi anjuli chauli-a handful
of rice anka (n. i.) ... mark, e. y. on docu-
ments, made by illiterate persons.
Marany gdnddte anka — thumb
impression.
anddu (n. i.) i a steep downward andyu (n. i.) / slope
avpd (v. t.) ... to breach an embank- ment
apuf,a/w (num.) three arau (n. i.) ... the peculiar trap set • by professional bdgmdrcu for big frame. One thread is set across
O
a path frequented by the animal and, as soon as he touches it, a large poisoned arrow is dis- charged into his side. Another thread is placed across the path in front of the first one ; it is about the height of a man's chest and discharges the arrow harm- lessly if a man should chance along
ard, (adj.) ... red area,are (num.) nine aril (n. a.) ... hail arki (n. i.) ... country spirit, ddru arkid (v. t.)... to carry away, carry
off, abduct
arti diri (n. i.) a crystal, glass asi (v. t.) ... to ask, want asul (r. t.) ... to support, maintain,
tame
asulhdrd (v. t.) to adopt atd (v. t.) ... to fry •
atur (v. t.) ... to winnow (with the hands only, the grain falling on the floor)
ated (v. t.) ... to spread straw on a mat ; to spread stones on an embankment to prevent erosion atkdr (v. t.) to feel, think, guess atkdro (v. p.) to seem, appear atkdrte (adv.) approximately
( 150 )
auri (adv.) ... not yet auu (v. t.) ... to belch
1
d (n. i.) ... mouth, bill
da (v. t.) ... to set free, to acquit,
discharge ; to remove an obstacle daean koidi
(n. a.) ... a released convict dandi (v. t.)... to marry dd (n. i.) ... mustard ddjang (n. i.) . a vegetable achakd (adj.).. sudden, unexpected dchakdte (adv.) suddenly, by chance,
by accident dchu (v. t.) ... toemploy, engage for
any work
add (n. i.) ... ginger ddd (v. t.) ... to know dddkete (adv.') knowingly,
intentionally dder (v. t.) .. to put, bring inside,
to drive in (je. y. cattle) dding (n.i.)... the inner room of a
house where food is cooked
and comparatively privato. Also
supposed to be the abode of the
ancestral spirits. ddu (u. t.) ... to lower, lessen ddun (c. ref.) to descend tier (v. t.) ... to precede derre, der i e
(adv.) ... before, in front of
Aerre also = in future dgu (v. t.) ... to bring dgu (v. t.) ... to lower, lessen dgun (v. ref.) to descend dji (n. a.) ... elder sister djom (v. t.) ... to feed, put in the
mouth dkachakd (v.t.) to astonish, amaze,
surprise
dkadandd(adj .) wonderful, mysteri- ous, strange
dkid (n. i.) ... the chin
dkiring (v. t.) . to sell
dmbdrob (n. a ) an orphan
dmin (r..t.) ... to clear forest
dn (adj.) ... mouthed. E.g.,
huring dn chdtu — a small-mouthed vessel
dnden (v. t.)... to suspect
dndu (n. i.) ,. an anklet
dnjd (adj.) ... quick
dnjdte (adv.) . quickly, soon
dnjed (v. t.)... to dry up
and (n. i.) ... an anna %
(v. t.) ... to yoke (v. t.) ... to set silkworms or • lac
dnrd (n. i.) ... used collectively of. the number of trees leased by one man to set silkworms or lac on
dnrdpai (n. a.) group of d»ra-takers
dyri (n. a.) ... the man who per- forms the sacrifices aud does the pujd for the dprd-takers
dpri (n. t.) ... an embankment
dnr u r i k o
(n. a.^ ... plough-cr.ttle
dparol) (n. i.) a wing
dpir '^v. i.) ... to fly
dpo (n. a.) ... paternal uncle (younger than father)
dpu (n. a.) ... father
drd (n. a.) ... son-in-law ; younger sister's husband
are (v. t.) ... to irrigate by lifting water in baskets
drid (v. t.) ... to open the eye
dsar (n. i.) ... a bow
dtar (v. t.) ... to burn
dtdgom (v. t.) . to level paddy after reploughing
i'lr.) ... orally, by word of
mouth, verbally dliini (r. t.) ... to grazo atom (r! t.) ... to move, put out of
tin- way
dtonit'ii (v. ref.) to got out of the way dtn (v. t.) ... to carry awuy (used
only of flowing water, < '.</. a
river) dfii (n. t.) ... birdlimo which,
among the Hos, consists of the
juice of the pipal and bar trees
mixed with oil and applied to
bamboos
B.
•
•
babatd(v. imp.) to itch
bctdchom (n. i.) sabai grass
but ddru (n. i.) a bor tree
bai (v. t.) ... to make, prepare,
arrange ; to compromise, agree baiaddui (n.a.) n wizard, witch baid (adj.} ... mad (used of men
only) baidd merom
(n. a.) ... a castrated goat bain (v. ref.)... to pretend baivchd (n. it) a form of mortgage
the same as tikd q. v. bair (n.i.) ... rope, string bairi (n. a.) ... an enemy, adversary biiurd (v. t.)... to repair, reconcile bakai (n. i.) ... a fence ; hence that
which is surrounded by a fence,
i. e. a garden or homestead land bakrd d dru
(n. i.) ... bair or plum tree balbal {V. imp.) to perspire, sweat balbal-dd (n. i.) perspiration, sweat bale (n. i.'~ ... the string of a fiddle bamal (adj.) lost — Bamal sddom,
the lost horse
< (K.'i.) . a lirahmin
(n. i.) a fiddle with one string hanam d s ar
(n. i.) ... the bow of a fnl.Uo Ixitirhuii (r. (.) to ipe,
protect, .shelter
bandar (n. »'.) a form of mortgage in which principal is repayable, • interest being realized by usu- fruct b and o b a 1 1
(v. t.) ... to arrange banddri (n. a.) a barber bandi (v. t.)... to break into pieces
with the hands bankd (adj.) crooked bapai (v. rec.) to be on good terms bapdri (inter.) alas bapdrigore
(inter.) ... alas baram (n. a.) a dwarf ttaram (n. a.) one of the Ho dieties who cures diseases of men and cattle. Is supposed to be very small
barandi (n. a.) a barber bardbari .(adj.) level, equal barchd (n. i.) .. a spear barki lijd (n. i.) a thick cloth used
in the cold weather basany (v. t.) to boil water batari (adj.) thin, narrow ban (v. i.) ... to be mouldy bauu (n. a.)... elder brother t>aun hone d r
(n. a.} ... wife's older b'rother bd (n. i.) ... a flower bdbd (n. i) ... paddy, unhusked nY • bdbdsiny (n. i.) straw •
bdduri (n. a.) a flying-fox bdg (n. i.) ... a share, portion
( 152 )
bdge (v. t.) ... to leave, dismiss ; to acquit, discharge ; to cease
bald (n. a.}... the father of one's son-in-law
bdld-bdlu (adj) mad (used of animals only)
bdldjigi (n. z.) a form of mortgage in which one man uses his own cattle, implements and labour
to cultivate another man's land
»
and takes half the crop in return.
Known elsewhere as bhdg or sdjhd bdldsdkd (n. a.) the relations of one's
wife, married sister or mother bale (adj.) ... early, young. Bale
hon, a babe or infant ; bale sakam,
early leaves bdn (n. i.) ... a flood band (n. a.)... a bear bdndd (n. i.) .. a bdndh or irriga- tion reservoir bdndi (n. z.)... an indeterminate
measure of weight, generally
about ten maunds bdndia {adj.") tailless bdnji (n. a.), a barren woman bdnsi (n.i.)... a fish hook bdpal (v.t.). to burn straw, etc.,
on land in order to fertilize it bdpold (v. t.). to make preliminary
arrangements for a marriage bar (n. z.) ... a day bdrre, l^drte
(adv.} ... outside bdri (n.i.) ... load carried on a
sikhd-bhangd bdrid, bar (num.) two bdrom (n. i.) baggage lbdru ddru
(n. t) ... kusum tree from
which the best lac is procured bdsi (adj.) ... stale
bdt (n. i.) ... rheumatism
bdtd (n. i.) ... a split bamboo
be (v. t.) .... to spit
bengd (v.t.)... to separate
bentd (n. i.) ... a pagri or turban
berel (adj.) ... raw
besrd (n. a.) a hawk
betar, betarang
(n. i.) ... a day
bi (v. t.) ... to fill the stomach ; to eat as much as one can
bichd diri (n.i.) iron ore
bid (v. t.) ... to put in the ground
bil (v. t.) ... to spread, e.g. a ?oed or a table.
bilai (n. a.) ... a cat
bill (n. i.) ... an egg
bind\ d d r u
(n. i.) ... castor oil tree
bindirdm (n.a.) a spider
bing (n.a.) ... a snake
bir (n. i.) ... forest, jungle
bird (n. i.) ... a big bundle of paddy
birau (v.t.) ... to threaten
birjilu (n. a.) a deer
birkau (v. t.) to frighten, startle, surprise. Conveys gm idea of suddenness followed by con- fusion.
birkerd (n. a.) a bison
birren (adj.) wild
birsim (n. a.) a jungle fowl
bisi (adj.) ... unclean (morally)
bisi (n. i.) ... the poison of snakes. Bisian bing — a poisonous snake
bisid (n.i.)... a measure of weight equal to about twenty seers
bitdrre, bitdrte
(adj.) ... inside
bitd (n. i.) ... a span
bitkil (n. a.) a female buffalo
( 153 )
blur (r. f.) ... to turn round, to
rev i
b<> (n, i.) ... the head r (/•. int}>.) to "be giddy
merom
(n. a.) ... an uncastrated goat /'<></> (ndr.) ... soon, quickly
(/'./'.) reward
boi (n. i.) ... a book, register bojiinti (n. i.) . the skull bolo (v.i.) ... to enter, come in
n.*tt.) . an evil spirit, a devil d (r. /.) . . to'worship, sacrifice
to have nightmare a bridegroom rope made of straw to unwrap silk
otd
(v. t.) ...
*bor (n. a.) .
bor (n. i.) .
bor (r. t.) .
cocoons
bora dd (». i.) muddy water bordno dd
(n. i.) ... slightly muddy water borkod (n. i.) the lungs lioro (r. t.) ... to fear boroichi. (r. t.) to frighten, startle borsd (n. i.) . . courage, bravery bo rnku (v. t.) to shake the head
meaning " no " botoe (n. i.)... a loincloth bit (r. t.) ... to bark; to bore, make a hole in the wall of a house or through anything bvgi, bit gin
(adj.) ... good, right, honest buffi* nelo
(adj.) ... beautiful Imyite (adr.). . well
. drunken . to be drunk . the thigh . salt tiionl'uri (n. i.) measles
In/1 (ailj.) Indo (r. 7*.) lndt( (/i. i.)
/>ii i, ,iu (/<. t.) . a gun
bin/inn (n. i.) an ant-hill, i.e. the
heaps seen commonly on roads
which are- not used much Imrd (r. t.) ... to dravy water vessel
in hand
t (<«lj.) ... old (used with
females only) •
(n. i.} ... a hill, mountain */• // r u-b ing
(n. a.) ... a python burum (r. i.) to lie down (used
of animals only) busu (n. i.) . . . straw Imtd (n.i.) ... the trunk of a tree,
a stump butt (n. i.) ... the navel
Ch.
chachd (v. t.) . to tear
cliadlom (n. i.) a tail
chakad (adj.) false, deceitful,
untrue
chakd {v. £.)... to taste chalaibd diri
(n. i.) ... the stone used by a
witch doctor to discover the evil
spirit responsible for any
calamity chalpd (n. i.) box in which a dead
body is buried chanab (n. i.) the end chandang *
(n. i.) ... a pace, a stride changd (v. t.) to pluck maize cobs changdel (adj.) bald .
chapal (n. i.) the hip chaprd (r. t.) to slap. Tdping
dutprd — to clap the hands <-/t(tndi (n. i.) a boundary I'ltmili (n. }.) husked rice i-hdb (r. f.} ... to open the mouth
( 154 )
chdbd (r. t.) to finish, end
chdbi (n. i.)... a key
chdld (c. t.)... to strain, sift
chdlu (r. t.)... to hoe
chdndu (n. a.) the moon, a month
chdpal (v. t.) to pass from hand to hand
e/i.ap (r. £.)... to clean with water
chdrd (n. i.) an edible, a plant
chdri (n. ?'.)... the twig used to join the folds of a leaf-cup
rhdru (r. /.)... to sink
chdtd (t\ /.) to split into two
c h d t dak an
(adj.) ... cloven
rlnitom (n. i.) an umbrella
chdtom (v. i.) to float
chdtu (n. i.). . an earthen waterpot
<7wZ (n. i.) ... a wave
r h e n t d
(v. imp.}. . to be jealous?
cheped (y. t.) to suck
cfore (arf/.) ... bald
chereb (r. £.). . to kiss ; to sip
chetanre, chetante (post) on, over
chi (eon.).) ... or. Also used as the Interrogative Particle
cJriad, chiang
(part.') ... used at the end of a sentence to express uncertainty as to a preceding statement of fact. Chimad and derang are similarly used
chid A (n. ?'.)... a rag or rags
chidu (ni a.)... a worm, insect, cater- pillar, maggot
l7r // i k a n d
^ (pron.~) ... what
chikandlagite\
chikandmente\(adc.*) ... why
chikanred
chilgu(n.i.)... the natural spur of
a cock
chilekd (adr.*) how chimad (part.) used like chiad, 7. '•• ehirtd (n.i.)... a boundary chimin(adj)... how many c h i m i n a n g
(adj.) ... how much chimin jdked
(adr.} ... until c h i m t a n g ,
(adv.) ... at what tim'o, when rhind (11. i.)... a mar^, sign, signal chindibd (n. i.) hair ornament chipd (c.t.) ... to squeeze out with
the hand as, e. g. rice beer chipud (n. i.) . the fist chird (r. t.) ... to accuse, blame ; to
criticize ; to owe
chirgal (v. t.) to know by instinct chitki (n.i.)... plate made of leaves chitrd(n.a.)... a servant who works
for daily wages, but is engaged
for a more or less long period chitri (n. a.)... a partridge chitti b i n g
(n. a.) ... a korait or any
marked snake °
eldtu (n.i.) ... scurf cJioe (v, t.) ... to screw, twist the
ears
choild (adv.). . when choke (n. a.). . a frog cholke (n. i.). . a pickaxe chondon (n. i.) sandalwood ^ chu (v. t.) ... to pick with the
hand ; to take out with the hand chud (n. i.) ... a temporary well dug
in the soil chiichungur
(i\ i.) ... to sit on the haunches chitild (adi\) when
( 155 )
kili (n. i.}. a small plain made of leave- in which vegetables or QOndimentfl are placed, the prin- cipal edible being placed on a kalgi •di (//. it.) a musk rat
[n. i.) limestone .•Inui.ll,! (r. f.) to stretch the legs
(/•. t.) to point out n (n. i). . a small fence : a gabion round seedlings
i. i.) top, tip, peak, point ; the brim of ft vessel (n. a.), a mouse ••I'liht (//./.)... a triangular head- piece made of leaves and worn while working in the rain i-hntnr (adj.) .. cunning, shrewd, sly
D.
ilai (r. irrcy) to be able, can,
possible.
dai (n. a.) ... a midwife dakal d gu
(r. t.) ... to be in possession d a Ik i gi til
(n. i.) * ... quicksand dambau (n. i.) custard apple dampci-dnmpu
(r. i.) ... to stagger danany (v. t.) to protect, shelter,
save, rescue danany {adj.). secret danangre(adv») behind (some opaque
physical object) ilnndd (n. i.). a stick, lathi fanddkuld
(n. a.) ... a hyaena dapdrom (r.
rcc.) ... to meet together darcha (n. i.) a beard
dii (n. j.) (n. i.)
i (r. t.)
,1,11-k-is (//. i.) a petition ,/, is/in- (n. i.) custom da» tur le kd
according to custom
water
second crop of silk
cocoons
to claim ,
dd-hoio (n. i.) climate <ld-ltt»'d (it. i.) a water channel ddk (n. i.) ... a relay ildkd (n. i.)... honeycomb, hive d d k ~ b a k a i
(n. i.) ... a vineyard /<.>•/ (/i. i.) wine
(r. t.)... to commit dacoity It («. i.) ... raw ddl ddnde (v. t.)... to fine ddngdung
(v.t.) ... to swing fjdnri (ti. a.) a wizard d anri era
(n. a.) ... a witch ddrd (r. t.) ... to move near ddro (n. i.) ... the finger ddrom (f. t.).. to meet, stop ddru (n. i.) ... a tree tldrn pdrd bakai
(n. i.) ... a tree nursery itdfi (n. a.) ... a servant who lives
in the house ddtd (n. i.) ... a tooth ddtdrnnt (n. i.) a sickle, scythe ddtaromjang
(n. i.) ... the collar bone de (r. I.) ... to climb a 'tree,
ride
dedem (n. a.), a sparrow 9
dcll'dfid (//. /.) paddy which ripens,
and is cut first of all <f,n;id (r. t.)... to help, assist, succour
( 156 )
dec (v. t.) ... to catch the breath, hiccough. Used also of the sensation in the throat after taking nasty medicine as if one was about to vomit.
deond (n. a.). . a witch-doctor
derang (part.) used like chiad, q. v.
derd (v. t.) ... to lodge, stop tempo- rarily on a journey.
Desauli (n. a.) the tutelary diety of a village supposed to reside in the sacred grove, which is a remnant of the primeval forest left intact for the local gods when the clearing was originally made. The word is used also for the grove itself, but jaier is the proper word for that. The grove dieties are responsible for the crops and are especially honoured at all agricultural festivals.
diang (n. i.) . . rice-beer, pachwai
did (n. i.) ... a lamp, light
didi (n. a.) ... a vulture
diku (n. a.) ... a foreigner, i.e. any- one who is not a Ho.
dill (v. t.) ... to fix, arrange (a time or date)
dimbu (v. i.). . to be in the ear (used of paddy)
dimsi (adv.). . daily. Dimsi dimsi, dimsi mutid — every day
din (n. i.)1 ... day
dindd (adj.) unmarried. f)indd seped' — a bachelor. J)indd kui — a maiden
dipd (adj) ... slightly raised
dipli (n. i.)... time, season
diri (n. i.) ... a stone
Airing (n. i.) . a horn
disum (n. i.) . a country
diuri (n.a.)... the sacrificer or village priest
do (v. t.) ... to put, place
do (v. t.) ... to cohabit, have sexual [intercourse with. To keep as a mistress (perfect tense only).
dobe (n. i.) ... mud (not so much as
losod) ' doe (n. a.) ... a parrot
doed (n. i.) ... back
doedre (adv.) . behind, at thb back of
dokdn (n. i.) . a shop\
dold (n. i.) ... fruit of mahud tree
domkau (v. t.) to reprimand, threaten, scold
dondd (n. a.) a lizard
dondo (v. t.). . to raise (an axe, Idthi, etc.) for purposes of assault
dondo (adj.)... foolish, silly, ignor- ant, idiotic
dong (n.i .) ... a wedding song
dongd n. i.)... a boat
dongi (n. i.)... a shuttle
Dongol (n. i.) Ho name for Chai- bassa. Means, literally, an en- campment of many tents
dorbdr (y. t.) . to try a ca§e or suit
dored (n. i.). . any big stretch of water such as a jhil, a lake, or the sea.
dorkdr (n. i.) necessity, need
doro (v. t.) ... to shake the head meaning " yes "
dos (n. i.) ... fault, offence, sin
duar (n. i.) ... a door
dub (v. i.) ... to sit. Parjd dub — settle a raiyat
dubi(n.i.) ... dunghill, refuse heap
dubted (n. i.) . a seat, chair, any- thing to sit on
dubui (n.i.)... the rump
( 157 )
(v. t.) ... to support, look after. Used of the common practice by which a relative is taken into the house of a widow, with or without minor children, to look after her cultivation and support her generally i (n. i.) ... bridge, culvert
l (n. a.) a pigeon (r. t.) ... to urinate (».j.) ... danger, trouble, calamity, ijiicfortune d*l (r. t.) ... to pour dnl-dd (n. i.) . a waterfall difln (r. i.) ... to nod. Dwn med
kd hujud — sleep will not come dinnang (n. i.) a drum d umb d tod
(n. i.) ... curdled milk dumbu (n. i.) . weeds, grass dumduld (adj.} dim, short-sighted dumur (n. a.), a bee d u m u r-d d
(n. i.) ... honey dundu (n. i.) . cooked rice d und u bin g
(n. a.) , ... water snake dupil (v. t.)... to carry on the head iii irang (v. t.). to sing duri (adj.} . . . round like a ball e. g.,
an orange
durijang (n. i.) the hip bone datum (n. a.), a matchmaker
E.
ed (inter.) ... yes elang (v. imp.) to feel the heat emanating from a fire or the sun em (r. t.) ... to give ; to put, place en (v. t.) ... to extinguish enko (n, a.)... lac
' " ( ''. /.) ... to till.
en (r. t.) ... to keep awake enang (adv.) .. then enang unli'i
(n. i.) ... last night end, en (pron.
and adj.)... that endd (v.t.) ... throw away, spill endd-ad (n. i.) abortion, miscarriage enete (n. i.)... beginning engd (n. a.) ... mother engd-dpu (n.a.) parents engd ddro
(n. i.) ... the thumb enreo (conj.) yet, nevertheless, notwithstanding, although, still eperang (v.
rec.) ... to quarrel er (v. t.) ... to put on a sdri erang (v. t.) ... to abuse era (n. a.) ... a woman, wife ere (n. i.) ... an omen esed (v. t.) ... to prevent esel (adj.) ... fair (in colour) eser (v. t.) ... to claim possession. Epser ote — the disputed land, epser being the reciprocal form etang (adj.)... thin etang dd (n. i.) soft water eld (adj.) ... other, another etdd (pron.) ... another thing eta etd (adj.) various, different etdi (f>ron.) another person ete (post.) ... since • ete (conj.) ... than ete (v. t.) ... to begin, start ete (n. i.) ... a spark ••tk<i (r. t.) ... to spoil, damage t'lkd, el kau
(adj.) ... bad, wicked, wrong ;
dirty etkdicld (v.t.) to corrupt
( 158 )
e t k d nel o (v.p.) ... eto (v. t.) etom (adj.) ... eton (v. ref.) .
to be ugly to teach right to learn
G.
gadd (n. a.)... an ass gagarsd (v.
imp.) ... to be hoarse gaid (n. a.)... a eunuch c/aii (n. a.) ... a small monkey galang (v. t.) to plait (mats, bas-
kets, etc.)
gold (adj.) ... dumb gamang (v.
imp.) ... to be ticklish gamang (i\ t.) to tickle gamd (n. a.) rain ganai (n. i.) ... bar across a door gandd (n. i)... a toe, finger ; four of anything except money ; a finger's breadth.
gangai (n. i.) Indian corn, maize gay, gawd
(v. t.) ... to reproduce gapd (adv.) ... tomorrow gapdter (adv.) day after tomorrow gard (n. i.)... a river gard-kuti (n.i.) bank of a river gasar (v.t.)... to scrub clean (plates
and utensils) sore, wound aunt, i. e. father's
brother's wife Ho name for the Gour or Gowala caste gaud (n. a.)... a witness gaud pere
(v.t.) ... to give evidence gaudi (n. i.)... a measure of distance = about three miles
gau (n. i.) t gau (n. a^)
Gau(n.a.)
gam (v. t.) ... to nudge, beckon gauing (n, a.) stepmother gaured china
(n. i.) ... a scar gd (v.t.) ... to sew (with thread
and needle) gdded (adj.). . . blue gdndi (adj.) ... crooked gdndi (n.i)... an obstruction,
obstacle gdndu (n. i.) chair, stool with a
wooden sqat gdwi (11 .i.) . . . an e:l,. or sugarcane
press
gdri (n. i.) ... a cage gdri (v. t.) ... to delay gdrio(v.p.)... to be late gdrod (n. i.)... a cage gdt (n. i.) ... a ford gdti (v. t.) ... to catch round the waist as in dancing ged (v. t.) .., to cut up flesh,
dissect.
gekod (n. a.)... nephew (sister's son) gekui (n. a. ... niece (sister's
daughter) gele(v.i.) ... to form ears (as in
paddy) • geled, gel
(num.) ... ten gendd (n. i.) . a shell gendd (n. a.), a snail genddri (n. a.) a stork yened (n. i.). the bow of a fiddle gene gene
(adv.) ... in a line gente, gentri
(n. i.) ... a bundle (of clothes) gerang (v. t.) to groan germoing (v. t.) to smile gete gete (adv.) in a line gil (r. t.) ... to hit with the fist
I/inn (a. i.) ... a inotul cup iiiinlrn (n. n.). a mongoo (/in,/ (r. I.) ... to cut (brush wood; ,/inil (/;. /'.) .. ;i wall ffiniK (n. i.)... a tiling ; property ,/innitt '(//./'.). an agreement (an obvious OorraptioD traceable u» coolie-recruiting) .<//.->•<;• (v. i.) ... to shudder <itn (r. i.) ... to sleep, lie down t/itil (n. i.) ... sand, silt yiu (r. imp.)... to be ashamed go (i\ t.) ... Jt% carry on the • shoulder
i/i (/'. /.)... to hire a plough ./•>(/ (r. /.) ... to pluck (fruit or
Mowers,) 901 (v. t.} ... to kill
< (r. /v/1.). to Gonuiiit suicide yojakan (adj.) dead yojo (v. i.) ... to die iilckd (adj.) insensible
(t: «Vw/.)... to faint <j <> j ole kdl ,
(adv.} ... mortally <!<>! (adj.) ... round yole (v. i.)» ... to whistle (inlmdl (/»./.). confusion iioni (it. i.) ... wheat ,i,nit/ct' (int.). master. Used in addressing any superior or person in authority : also any European yoiid (n. /.) ... cowhouse, cattle-shed yomle (r. t.)... to abuse </<nt(i<> (//./.)... sulphur
(r. t.) ... give in marriage (11. i.)... deat ll
//. /'.). price, value ,/,i/i,n/,j (r. t.). (o vulue, appraise
(/ H II <l II (/ C( II
(adj.) ... valuable
." " " " " !'
*itl (v. /.)... to arrange bride price
yord ote (n. i.) high or untei
land
yoso (v. i.) ... to Fade, shrivel up
yot (it. I.) ... place where cattle are
herded
<jotd (v. t.) ... to scratch, claw, maul
yotd (adj.) ... thick, (trees, sticks, , etc.)
gotdo (v. t.)... to take charge of,
look after
yotom (n. i.)... ylii
yud (n. i.) ... betel-nut
yuddm (n. i.).. liquor-shop
ijuin (n.i.) ... a sack as loaded on
pack cattle
yuiu (n. i.) ... a temporary hut made
of leaves
yul (n. i.) ... a mistake
</ii»t (r. t.) ... to winnow (with a
basket, the paddy being tossed up
and caught again, while the chatV
is carried away by the wind.
Done by women only.)
yttndi (n. a.) . . a cow
yundli (n.i.). yundli — an upland crop
yundrd (v. t.) . to carry on the back
yundui (r. t.) . to cut into pieces
yvnyu (n. i.)... triangular headpiece
made of leaves and worn while
working in the rain
tjnnjd (n. i.)... airjtii/d — a kind of
oilseed
rd (/*./.)... nose ornament
it (n. i.}... dung
n (v. t.) ... to gra/o
•// (n.a )... a cowherd
<////• (i>. /'.) ... unrefined sugar, molasses
( 160 }
gur (n. i.) ... to fall down (used of any object standing erect, e.g., a man or a tree)
g u r-d and d
(n. i.) ... sugarcane
guri (n. i.) ... dung, manure
gurlu (n. i.) ... gundli — q. v.
gurtui (v. t.)... used of the motion in turning a gimlet, and hence of any similar revolving motion, e.g. a stick between the palms to make a hole in the ground.
gus (v. t.) ... to bribe
gusind (n. a.), owner, master, host
guti (n. i.) ... a troop, band, crowd; a lota
gutu (v. t.) ... to prick
gutu (n. i.) ... a hillock
H.
hab (v. t.) ... to bite (used of tigers
particularly)
had (v. t.) ... to cut with a knife haiam (v. i.) .. to whisper haigore, haind, haindgore
(inter.} ... alas ! (physical pain) hal (v. t.) ... to pay a debt halang (v. t.). . to pick up (from the
ground)
halurd (v. t.). . to revenge hambal (adj.). heavy, pregnant ;
difficult
hambud Cv. t.) to embrace hamsa (n. i.).. a spot in which water
is always present naturally handrub (n. i.) a cover handting
' (n. i.) ... a share, part, portion ( hapad (n. a.) a leech liap a k a n
(v. ref.) ... to remain quiet
hapd (adj.) ... quiet, silent hapdn (v. ref.) to keep quiet ha pan u m
(n. a.) ... a young woman,
marriageable girl hardd (n. i.)... scale of a fish haringbdrte
(adv.) ... almost completely,
almost entirely
hartd(n. i.)... skin (of the larger animals and snakes. Not of birds, such as fowls) r hasur (v. i.)... to.^t hatang (n. i.) the brain hatld (n. i.)... the armpit hatnd ddru
(n. i.) ... asdn tree on which
silkworms are reared. hatual (a. i.). . a bowstring hau (n. a.) ... a red ant haui (n. i.) ... a ravine had (adj.) ... hot (e.g. chillies) hded (v. t.) ... to whisper hdgd (n. a.)... a brother, a relation hdjir (v. i.) ... to be present MM (v. t.) ... to hang up hdkdgoe (v. t.) to hang (i.e. death
penalty .
hdke (n. i.) ... axe for cutting wood hdku (n.a.) ... a fish hdlmad (n. i.) a salt-lick hdm (adj.) ... old (used with an- imate males only) hdn (n. i.) ... a hoof hdndr (n. a.) .. a mother-in-law handed (v. t.) . to shut hdndi (v. i.) ... to fall, tumble down (houses, embankments, walls, etc.) hangar (v. i.) . . to burn wood for
charcoal, to make charcoal hangar (n. i.).. charcoal, coal
/•. /.) ... to whip
( /•. //) ... to drive cattle ; to
chase, pursue.
li. a.) ... a bull
hdrd (r. i.) ... to grow, increase h d r d - h n i- //
(n. I.) ... brushwood hdrdi'-lii (i\ t.) to grow lidi-Jn (v.t.)... to rescue from a wild
;mimal
Itdri (r. i.) ... to flow swiftly hdr»b (w t.)... to satisfy, quench hdrob (v. finp.) to be content hdrol (i>. t.)... fo drive out, turn out lidrul> (r. t.)... to cover hind (n. /.) ... earth, mud, soil Msdbu (n. i.). . a clod of earth Ldsu (n. i.) ... ache, pain, sickness,
fever, disease lidsu (v. t.) ... to hurt hdsu (?.\ imp.) to be ill, have fever hat (n. i.) ... a week ; market
(n. z'.)... basket used in win- nowing
i (n. a.) ... an elephant hating (v. t.).. to divide hdtom (n. a.) .. a maternal aunt hdtu (n. i.) ... a village hdturcn (&dj.) tame he (v. t.) ... to pluck leaves hebe (v. t.) ... to carry on the bosom,
carry on the hip heben (adj.)... astringent hed (v. t.) ... to weed ht-d (v. i.) ... to ride, sit astride hedegele (n. a.) wild duck he% (n. z.) ... the husk hende (adj.)... black, dark henda (v. t.)... to blacken hende (r. i.)... to get black (used of the change in colour paddy un- dergoes after it recovers from reploughing)
faperpatd
(u. i.) ... a bush her (v. t.) ... to sow lti-rl>< </ ( y. /. i.. to carry under the
urn
lierel (n. a.)... a husband hero (n. i.) ... sowing season he s d d dru
(n. z.) ... pipal tree •
hese (v. t.) ... to cut, lop (branches) hetd (v. t.) ... to look sideways hi (adj.) ... precipitous h i d t i n g
(v. imp.) ... to repent, be sorry,
be sad, grieve hichir (n. a.) .. lightning hiil ddru (n. i.) paisdr tree hild (o. t.) ... to hate, despise hinsd (r. imp.) to envy hirchi (v. t.)... to sprinkle (liquids
only)
hisir (n. i.) ... a necklace hitd (n. i.) ... a seed h i t i-h i t i
(v. imp.) ... used of the sensation which precedes fainting or follows a blow, z. e., in colloquial English. " seeing stars "
ho (n. a.) ... a man h o b d d a i
(r.irreg.)... to be possible h o b d o
(v.irreg.)... to becom^, to happen,
occur hobdolekd
(adj.) ... possible hochd (v. t.)... to break (used only
of branches of trees) hod (i\ t.) ... to pull off graiAs from a paddy stalk by hand » hoe (n. i.) ... a kind of pulse*, kurthi
( 162 )
2o (n. i.) ... breeze, wind ; a
storm hoio (v. t.) ... to shave ; to peel
fruit
hoioted (n. i.) . a razor holad (n.i.)... a razor hold (adv.) ... yesterday holdter (adv.').. day before yesterday ' holony (n. t.).. flour homo (n. i.)... body Aon (n. a.) ... a child hondd (v. t.) .. to stir, mix lion ddro (n. i.) the little finger ho n ddroking
(n. i.) ... the little finger and
the next finger
honedr (n. a.), a father-in-law honerd (n. a.), a niece (brother's
daughter) ; a step-daughter hongard (n. i.) a small river or
stream housed (n. a.), a nephew (brother's
son) ; a step-son /toeso (n. a.)- » goose, swan Aom (n. z.) ... a road, way hordte (post.)., by means of . horlosi (n. ft.), a whirlwind horo (r. £.) ... to watch, guard horo (n. a.) ... a tortoise koto (n. i.) ... the neck ho tor (v. t.)... to prod, thurst hu (v. t.) ... used of the sound
made in the throat by a dying
man, i. e. the death-rattle
c.
kuany (n. i.) .. a pit
hud (n. a.) ... a green pigeon
hud (v. i.) ... to bite
kudmd (v. t.) .. to throw, cast
Jwju (v. i.) ... to come
i/m&um (n. i.).. an order, sentence,
judgment
hukum (v. t.).. to order
hitld (n. i.) ... a day
liuhiny (v. t.). to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use humu (adj.)... dirty (used of the
body and clothes only) hundi (v. t.) . . to collect, gather,
assemble
huriny (adj.). . small, short, little h u r i n y j i
(v.imp.) ... to be depressed kur ingle k d
(adj.) ... some hurinyo (v. p.) to decrease hurld (v. t.)... to throw, cast hurum sitku
(n. i.) ... honey husid (v. /.)... to scrape off hntir (v. /.)... to snore hntul (n. i.) .. a rock or big stone
standing erect lintum (v. t.) .. to rinse the mouth
I.
c
i (v. t.) ... to ease oneself
i (n. i.) ... excrement ; rust
ilril (adj.) . . . thick
il>il dd (n. i.).. hard water
idtd (n. i.) ... a kind of tree, from the juice in the flower of which yur is sometimes made.
ichi ... (causative or permis-
sive compound)
idang (n. i.)... dawn
idangre (adv). early
idi (v. t.) ... to take, carry, carry in the hand
id u (adv.) ... perhaps
idu ondo (i. p.) who knows !
ijdr (v. t.) ... to take evidence
ikir (adj.) ... deep
ikum (n. i.)... the knee
( 163 )
;/ (//. i.) ... a leather ; tin- fin <>>'
a lisli : a <|uill
/// (,t. i.) ... rico-beer (originally liquor ready to drink as com- pared with dinny, to which watur had to li<* added. Nowadays •ny is the general term in use and /// is seldom hoard) i m (n. /'.) ... the liver imin (adj.) ... so many iinitniity (adv.) so much intinreo (co/i/.). although, neverthe- less, notwiths^ding, still, yet. iudii-d (n. i.).. the heel in tiny (r. /.)... to play /'/*// (V. a.) ... a star ipiptung (n. a.) a firefly if (v. t.) ... to reap, cut (grass) >.!• (i\ t.) ... to rub 'nil (n. a.) ... husband's younger brother, husband's younger sister iriled, iril
(num.) ... eight ir-Ki'ittjil (n. i.) matches /.</'// (r. t.) ... to cook isknl (n. i.) ... a school tan (adv.) ... very istt dtitjii (<.ul(-.) often itad (n. i.) ... share, portion, part itd (n. i.) ... a brick it'll (n. i) ... fat, grease ititiy (r. t.) ... to tighten ; to train itkid (v. t.) ... to wash clothes in (r. t.) ... to call out, call loudly, scream, screech
J.
ja</ar (c. t.)... to cohabit (with con- sent) ; to converse jaydd (n. i.)... a swamp, quagmire jaii- 1- (//. /.) ... a sacred grove jaii (n. a.) ... a grandson jaiikui (/t. a.) a granddaughter
Juir (n. i.) ... resin
j<iii;r<i (it. a.) the wife oi l),-fnnii v. p.
jal (r. t.) ... to lick, lap /an (v. t.) ... to infect; to transfer
lac from one tree to another jany (n. i.)... a bone ; a grain ; tli*
kernel
jantd (adj.)... illegitimate jypd (adj.) ... near, close japyar (v. ref.) to converse together jatka (conj.).. in addition, more ja t kdte (adv.) . especially j d cJiuildo
(adv.) ... ever jd chuildo kd
(adv.) ... never jdked (adv.)... up to, as far as; until. Also used sometimes with suffix o - also.
jdlekdte (adv.). iu any way whatso- ever, by any means at all jdlekdteo kd
(ado.) .. in no way whatso- ever, by no means whatsoever j'ilom (n i.)... a trap ; a fishing net ;
a cobweb, spider's web jdlom (v. t.) .. to plaster with mud jdlom (v. t.)... to catch in a net jdn (adj.) ... any jdnd (pron.)... anything jdndye hobdored
(i. p.) ... whatever may happen jdndo l>ano t
(pron.) ... nothing jdnyi (n. i.)... a kingpost jdnyi (n. i.) ... shafts jdnjid (/j. i.)... a contrivance made of bamboo and placed across a • water channel to intercept fish. * They are eventually caught in the fotm&cuf, '/. c.
( 164 )
jdni (pron.)... any person
jdnti (n. i.) ... an oilpress, i. e. the kind used by the Hos, as dis- tinguished from gdnri, the ordi- nary form. Both are seen in the Kolhan
jdnum (n. i.). a thorn
jdpdre (adv.) anywhere at all < jdpid (v. t.)... to shut the eyes
jdrege (adv.).. anywhere at all
jdrom (n. i.). .. an egg
jdrom(n.i.)... to ripen, get ripo
jdtd (n. i.) ... twigs
jdtdre (adv.) .. anywhere at all
jdti (n. i.) ... a mat
jdti etkd (v. t.) to outcaste
jdti e t kdo
(v. p.) ... to lose caste
jdti mdndi
(n. i.) ... the feast which a Ho has to give, say on returning from Assam, in order to get back into caste
jdti rakab
(v. t.) ... to recover caste jdtiurd (v. t.).. to recover caste jel (n. i.) ... prison, jail jepender sakam
(n. i.) ... nettle jer (v. t.) ... to stick jer-jangd (n.a,) a duck jete (n. i.) ... sunshine, heat jet ere artang
(v. t.) ... to bask in the sun ji (n, i.) ...mind, attention ;
life ; the heart ji (v. t.) ... to smell (used of
animals)
c jid (n. a.) ... a grandmother «•' jidtdtd (adj.) .. ancestral jid (v. t.) ... to live jido (v. p.) ... to be alive
jijil (adj.) ... slippery jiki (??. a.) ... a porcupine jil (v. i.) ... to slip filing (adj.) . . . long jilu (n. i.) ... meat, flesh jimd (n. i.) ... custody, charge jimki honking
(n. a.) ... twin children jindal (?>. t.)... to loosen jmjri(n. i.) ... a chain jir (v. t.) ... to fan, blow up afire jirented (n. i.) a fan jirub (v. t.) ... tpyyarm at a fire jitkar sim (or)
sdndi ... the winning cock in
a fight
jo (n. i.) ... fruit jod (n.i.) ... the cheek jodr (v. t.) ... to greet jobe (n. i.) ... mud (a little) jolrd (n. i.) .,. refuse jod (v. t.) ... to wipe ; to paint,
plaster, whitewash jojo (adj.) ... sour jojoddru (n.i.) a tamarind tree jokd (post.) ... up to jokd (adj.) ... enough, sufficient.
Chaulim jokdod chi - Is the rice
enough for you ? join (v. t.) ... to eat jometed (n. i.) an edible jam ti (n.i.)... the right hand jonom (v. t.) .. to give birth to jonomo (v. p.) to be born jontu (n. a.)... an animal joo (v. t.) ... to sweep joren (n. i.)... a joint joro (v. i.) ... to leak jorong jorong
(adj.) .. everlasting jud (v. t.) ... to stick jul (v. t.) ... to shine
( 165 )
jnl (n. /.) ... a flame
juiiilin/ (,/. a.) a glutton ; one who
always tries to get more than
others. jnndi (r. t.)... to light a cigarette
or cigar
jtinkd (n.i.)... the calf jnr(r.t.) ... to collect round, to
cluster, e. y. a swarm of bees jurlnnr ( r. t.).. to surround (used of
men only)
juri (n. a.)»... a friend jurin (r. re/.). to^fS^ociate with j n rhi >'<i (v. t.). to reconcile )utl (i: t.) ... to cohabit (a little
more polite than jagar) jut id (v.t.) ... to touch
kaln'd (adj.)... piebald kacheri (n. i.). a court kadal (n. «'.)... a plantain kakdru, kakru
(n. i.) ... a pumpkin kalgi (n. i.)... a big bowl or plate
made of leaves
kalkal (n. a.)., a jackal (small) kamdr (n. a.), a blacksmith kankua (n. i.). a pickaxe kantard (n. i.) jack fruit kapdji (v.
rec.) ... to converse, argue k<i/>rd (?i. z.)... ringworm karai (v. t.)... to replough karamclid
(n. a.) ... a fox or small jackal karcliu (n. a.), a flea karkad (n. i.). a toothbrush (made
of wood)
karpd(n.i.)... shoes, boots, sandals made of leather
kasrd (n. ».)... mango, itch i (r. £.)... to fast (n. a.) a crab katult (n. i.)... a finger kautxiit (/•. /.). to bo in a hurry kd (n. a.) ... a crow kd (part.) ... no kd (v. irrey.)... to say " no, " be un- %
willing, refuse
ktibd (n. i.) ... the handle of a plough kddsom (n. i.). cotton kde (n. z.) . . . phlegm kde (v. t.) ... to clear the throat kd-emo (adj.~). selfish kdji (n.i.') ... language, word, tale,
story, statement, deposition kdji (v. t.") ... to say, talk, speak kdjiurd (v. t.) . to answer, repeat kdkd (n.a.)... paternal uncle young- er than father ; step-father kdkald (v. t.).. to make a noise kdkdrambud
(n. a.) ... a chameleon kdki (v. t.) ... to chase, pursue kdkom (n. a.), a crab kdld (adj.) ... deaf kdlimiti (n. i.) chalk kdlom (adv.).. next year kd-mandting
(v. t.) ... to deny kdnchi (n. i.).. a big basket kdndom (n. i.) the brim of a vessel kdni (n. t.) ... a tale, story, riddle,
fable »
kdvrd,kdvri
(adj.) ... one-eyed, blirfd kdrtsd (n. /'.)... brass kdnti \ji. i.)... a nail kdpi (n. i.) ... an axe for killing , animals *
kdrd (v. t.) ... to harrow, level land
( 166 )
kdri (v. t.) ... to lend (for a short time, the thing lent, or its equi- valent, being returned. Distin- guish rin em)
kd-sdriolekd
(adj.) ... doubtful kd-sednakani
(n. a.) ... a minor kdse med (n.i.) a squint
dropped from the basket on to the ground. Done by men mostly)
kdtd (n. i.) . kdtdchamrd
(n. i.) . kdtd-rdmd
(n. i.) . kdtd-reneke
(n. i.) . kdtd-talkd
(n. i.) . kdted (n. a.), kdti (n. i.) .
leg, foot, paw
north
sole of the foot
the ankle
sole of the foot a rat
sharp blade attached to the natural spur for purposes of cock-fighting kdtu (n. i.) ... a knife kead (n. a.)... a parrot ked (v. t.) ... to call kechd (v. t.)... to break or tear into pieces (anything but wood)
kecho (n. i.)... tiles
kecho dal (v.t.) to put on tiles
ked (v. t.) ... to touch kedbatd, kebatd
(n. a.), ... snipe
kenesed /n. i.) an obstacle
ker (v. t.) ... to carry tales, inform
kerd (n. a.) ... a buffalo
kesed (v. t.)... to impede, prevent,
stop
1 keie (adj.) ... hard, solid, strong,
stout, stiff
keto (v. t.) ... to winnow (by means of a basket, the paddy being
kid (n. i.) kili (n. i.) ... kilimili (adj).. kilum (v. t.)...
hammer kimin (n. a.).. kindar-kuld (n. a)
the chin , a sept, tribe various, different to drive in with
a daughter-in-law a leopard
kipiring(v.rec.) to trade, bargain
kiri (adj.) ...
kiring (v. t.) .
kirki (n. i.) ...
kisti (n. i.) ...
kitd (n. i.) ...
kitdb (n. i.) ..,
kitd ddru
(n. i.) ko (n. a.) kodlion (n. a.), kodlu (n. i.)...
beam in a hut koche (adj.)... crooked kodd (v. t.) .. kode (n. i.) .. koe (v. t.) .. koeong (v. t.) koidi (n. a.)., kokor (n. a.), kolom (n. i.) ,
fat, stout' to uuy a window an instalment a date (fruit) a book
a palm tree
a crane, paddy-bird
a son
a beam, the cross-
to tattoo
a millet
to beg
to carry 'in the arms
a prisoner, convict
an owl
a threshing floor
komoro (n. i.). a blanket
konie (adj.)..
konrd (n. t.)..
konro (n. a.).
koned (n. a.).
kope (v. t.) ..
kordm (v. t.)
left
about £ seer
a duck
a bride
to swell out the cheeks
to strike with a spade
or hammer (e. g. tent pegs) kordmgoe(v.t.). to kill by hitting
with the back of an axe or the
head of a spade
( 167
(n. i.) ... a si|uinl
(y;. /'.).. Sandals made of WOO(1
/•••;•,./<» (/;. i.) .. a saw
k»t,i (r. /.) ... to shako straw after threshing to see whether anv grain is loft in it; to shake clothes or a carpet
kof'ifi (n. /'.).. a hammer
koto (n. /.) ... a branch, hough
hn (>./.), ... to cough
feuam (n. t.^... the chest
kui-liii (n. i.) .. aT)!l%, sack
knd (r. f.) ... to carry on the hack
kudd ddru
•
(«. /.) ... a jdmtin t roc
kudlatn (n. j.) a spade
/.-?// (n. a.) ... a woman
kuid (n. a.)... a kito
kid/ton (n. a.), a daughter
knkuru (n. i.). a bridge, culvert
kukuru (n. i.). a hollow tree
kuld (n. a.)... a tiger
knlde (n. a.) .. a hare, rabbit
knlgid (n. «.).. husband and wife (spoken of together)
knit (r. t.) ... to question, ask, enquire '
kuli (n. i.) ... a receptacle made of leaves in which silkmoths' eggs are placed ; resembles an enve- lope in appearance
kulpn (». ?'.) .. a lock
kitnui (n. a.}., a maternal uncle
ktt-»itiinl<i
(n. /.) ... a cough and cold
kvmbad(n.iS). a small bamboo re- ceptacle placed at the mouth of the dnjid <j. r., in which the fish are finally caught kinnt'/i (r. /.).. to steal
kumu (r. t.)... to dream
/ n n >l<i n< rr
(adv.) ... behin<l k,i,,rli (//.?.).. about 20 seers /•////,// ni,
(n. i.) ... terraced upland /.-unkal (/?.«.)•• a potter kit/ltd (n. a.)., a woodon post used
in house building. knpul (n. a.) .. a guest
(n. t.) ... tho jiortion of the lee between the knee and the
O
anklo ; the shin kitrkur (r.
imp.') ... to be angry knrkitrte net
(r. t.) ... to scowl
I us nd (y. t.}... to sob
kuti (n. i.) ... edge, bank, shore,
side
kutrd (n. i.).. a plate
lad (n. i.) . lad (r. «.) . lagdtingd (v.
irreg.} • lagite, lagid
(post.) . lagrt durang
(n. z.) . laii (n. i.) .
'bread to bake
ought
for, on behalf of
a comic sorig the stomach f womb laii-dul (/?.?). cholera /arwpa (adj.).. used of a tree with
branches on all four sides lanatab (n. t.). scissors larai, lardi
(r. «.) ... to fight /aria (n. i.) ... first crop of silk cocoons
( 168 )
laud (v. t.) ... to powder, make into powder. Si la ud = to break up . earth properly as by a third ploughing
Id (v. i.) ... to increase, exceed Id (v. t.) ... to peel off the bark
of a tree , lab (n. i.) ... advantage, benefit,
gain, profit
Iddi (v. t.) ... to load Idgd (v. imp."), to be tired Idli (adj.} ... enough, sufficient Idndd (v. t)... to laugh, giggle; to
ridicule, deride Idndid (adj.) . . lazy Idr (adj.) ... light, easy ldtd(n.i.) ... cave, den, lair Idtab (v. t.)... to cut (as with
scissors)
Idtar (adj.)... low Idtar (n. i.)... the bottom Idtarre (adv.). under Idtoe (n. i.)... bamboo on which
cotton yarn is reeled ldtum(v. t.)... to keep in the mouth Idtum (v. t.).. to fold up led (v. t.) ... to mix with water lebe (adj.) ... soft lee (n. i.) ... the tongue lekd (adj.) ... like, similar lekd (v.t.) ... to count lekd (n. i,) ... an account lekd dgu(v. t.) to render an account len (v. t.) ... to press oil; to lie
or sit on a man lying on the
ground ; to hold down a man
on the ground lengd ti (n. i.) the left hand Lead (v. t.) ... to bend leser (v. £.)... to sharpen leser (adj.) ... sharp
lichkom (v.i.).. used of the first shooting of paddy while still in the ground. As soon as it appears above ground, omon is used
ligir (v. i.) .., to be elastic. Used particularly of the giving and refilling of sodden ground when walked on
lijd (n. i.) ... cloth, clothes.
lijdred od
(n.i.) ... a teqt
lijdsiku (n. i.). aVnite louce, bodv , '
louce
lijum (v.t.)... to chew the cud
likd (adv.) ... almost
likd likd (adv.) almost immediately
afterwards
lili (n. a.) ... a hornet lili dd (n.i.).. honey limbud(v.t.).. to catch by the
throat ; to strangle limitir (n. i.).. the palate lingi (v. i.) ... to flow slowly linijum (n. i.) . a ginning machine liti (v. t.) ... to boil paddy before
husking. Tiki is also used liud (adj.) ... pliable lo (post.} ... with lo (v. i.) ... to burn lod ddru (n. i.) a fig tree locho (n. i.) ... the lip ; also used of
an elephant's trunk and a pig's
snout
loe (n. i.) ... penis, male organ logor (v. t.) ... to growl, grumble loke (v. t.) ... to limp lolo (adj.) ... hot (extreme) longor ote
(n. i.) ... low-lying rice land lor (n. i.) ... a hill stream
( 169 )
(r. t.} ... to \vafcli, Im on the look-out for, lie in wait for «//* (//. i.) ... good luck
Ixinod (n. /.) ... had luck /<>.W (n. /.)... wet mud (a lot) /^<v (r. t.} ... to sprain /" iv. t.) ... to ladle linn (<ulj.) ... wet
<{ (r. £.) .. to leep with cowdung dl (_/>. /'.) .. a spoon I n n gam, lygam
(n. i.) ...^Ntfocoon ; silk
rhidit
(n. a.} ... a silkworm (n. i.) ... flour (n. i.)... the ear lutursdri (v.
hnj).) ... to buzz (ears)
M
machild gdndu
(n. i.) ... seat or stool with
rope seat madkam ddru
(n. z.) ... maliud tree maid (n. z.) . . . refuse remaining
after tnahud flower has been
pressed. mail (ii.i.} ... plant used to make
the shafts of arrows. maiom (n. i.).. blood maiom laii-dul
(n. t.) ... dysentery maite (adv.}... slowly malchi, marchi
(n. t.) ... a chillie mamarang (v.
imp.} ... to be proud mand (v. t.)... to prohibit, prevent mandting
(v.t.} ... to obey, confess
mandaJ (». i'.). a custard apple marang (adj.} big, large marang ddro-
king (n. i.} . middle and fourth
finger marang Mtu
(n. i.) ... a town marchi (n. i.).. a chillie mar sal (r. t.}.. to light a lamp tmaskal(adj.}.. bright maskal (n. i.}.. a lamp maskal (v. t.}.. to shine, to light a
lamp
UK/ (adv.} ... last year md (r. t.) ... to cut (a tree) Mdburu (n. a.} a village deity like
Desauli, q. v. rrdd (n. i.} ... bamboo mdeang (n. i.} the waist mdqe (n. i.}... obscene language.
v \ / O O
Hence the Mdge Parab, a time of licence both in speech and action.
mdji (n. I.}... a bug
nidndd (n. i.}.. a cold in the head
mtindd (n. i.}.. footprint of man or animal
mdndi (n. i.).. cooked rice
mdni (n. i.}... mustard
md)ig(adv.}... before
mdyrid (n.i.}.. a water-channel
mdp (v. t.) „.. to forgive, pardon
mdrau (v.t.}.. to breach sm embank- ment or the ail between two fields
nidrd (n. i.}... a peacock .
/mm (n. i.}... small-pox, chicken- pox
mdrwdr(n.a.} a scorpion
mdtd (v. i.}... to ripen
meang (adv.}.. day after tomorrow
med (n. i.} ... the eye
( 170 )
med (n. i.) ... iron medadakan
(adj.) ... blind med-dd (n. i.). tears med-kandom
(n. i.) ... the eyebrow med-mud (n. i.) the face med r akab
(v. t.) ... to look up med-rdjd ,
(n. i.) ... the pupil of the eye mej (n. i.) ... a table men (v. t.) ... to say, speak mend (v.
irreg*) ... to be mendo(conj.).. but mente (conj.).. because mer (adj.) ... bitter, as e.g. quinine merd (n. i.)... refuse remaining after mahud flower has been pressed
merel (n. i.)... myrabolams merom (n. a.)., a goat metai (n. i.)... sweetmeats miad, mi, mid
(num.) ... one miad ho (i.p.) a certain man miad taiom
miad (adv.). one after the other,
in turn mid, midge
(adj.) ... same, equal, level mid (v. t.$ ... to mix, to have sexual
intercourse ; to join together mid dipli
(adv,) ... once upon a time mido (v. />.)... to become one; to
meet, join
mido (n. a.)... a certain man mido mido
(adv.) ... one by one, in turn midre (adv)... together, unanimously
mindi (n. a.)., a sheep mindi-kuld
(n. a.) ... a wolf mir-mir (adv.). just before daylight or just before dark, i. e. twilight misd (adv.) ... once misd (v. t.) ... to mix misd misd (adv.) sometimes, seldom misdokd (adv.) not even once, never mm (n. a.) ... a sister (younger) misierd (n. a.) a sister (younger) miu (n. a.) ... calf mo (v. i.) ... to«*r,.ell moi (v. i.) ... to put out new blos- soms after the cold weather ; to bud. moid, moi
(num.) ... five mokardmd
(n. i.) ... a case, law-suit monduku
(v. imp.) ... to be depressed monrd (n.i.)... a dead body moroe (adj.) acid mosld (n.i.)... spices mual (n. i.) ... ridge on the top of a
house
mud (n. i.) ... the nose , mud-undu
(n. i.) ... the nostril mudai (n. a.) a complainant,
plaintiff
mugd (n.i.)... coral mugi (n. i.) ... a kind of ddl muin (n.a.)... a black ant mukd (n. i.)... measure of length equal to the distance between the elbow and the tip of the finger, i. e. about \ yard ; a settlement mukd (v. t.)... to measure, survey mukui (n.i.)... the knee mukuing (v. t,) to bother
( 171 )
///////' (adj.} ... straight
mill it (/<. i.) ... new moon
i (/;. /.). a ring if/ii (nil/.), rich dd (/<. «.). headman of a village
tnititffi (it. I.). . a clue iniintin (v. /.). used in connection with the completioD of a long journey or circuit, e. g. round a jungle. r>ed also to indicate a depth of water sufficient to cover any particular person's head mundrad (n. ij&uzgth from the • el how to the closed hand
(ti. /.)... beginning. •mnmt,-cni = an original clearer of the soil
(«(/<•.). in the beginning mural (n. L). . receptacle made of
wood or mud to keep paddy in niu mi (H. /.)... a radish mnrki (n.i.)... u small earring worn
by men mur ddrn
("• i.) ... a palds tree musing betar
(adv.) ... once upon a time muskil (aft/.) difficult mittd (n. i.)... the nose niuid-undu
(n. i.) ... the nostril nniti (n. i.) ... a bundle of paddy
(small) nnit id (<«!/.')... every. Sirmd mutid =
every year nintitl («./.) ... a ridge-pole
N.
nail (n. i.) ... a creeper
null (». /.) ... wooden portion of plough, /. c. without plough- share and yoke
n. t.) a farrow naksd (n. i.) .. a picture, map nd (adv.) ... now ndai(adv.) ... after a little while
(longer than llhd li/.-ii) nde (adj.) ... near ndev (adv.)... eame &snd«i, </. ?•. ndge (n. i.) ... a kind of creeper ndkd (n. i.) ... kind of earth used in , place of soap to clean the head ndki (n. i.) ... a comb ndld (n. i.) ... hire, wages, salary ndldi (n.a.)... daily labourer, coolie ndldtani (n. a.) same as ndldi, q. v. ndlis (r. t.) ... to bring a case, to sue ndm (v. t.) ... to find, discover ; to get, obtain, receive ; to look for ndmd (adj.)... new ndrd (n. i) ... the stalks of paddy left in a field, after the crop has been cut, for cattle to graze on ned, ne(pron.) this nedlagite
(conj.) ... therefore, because nedmente
(conj.) ... therefore, because ne bdgekedte
(>.]>-) ... besides, in addition to nel (v. t.) ... to see, look nelat kdr
(v.t.) ... to try a purchase nelgod (v. t.) to catch a glimpse of nelo (v. p.) ... to appear, » be visible nelurum (v. t.) to recognise identify nepel-upurum
(n. i.) ... a mirror, looking- glass
ni (r. t.) ... to open mar (v. rej.).. to purify. Used of the purification undergone by both parents seven days after a child's birth
( 172 )
nidd (n. i.) ... night
niddo (v.p.)... to be benighted, over- taken by night
nidir (n. a.)... a white ant
nildm (n. «.)... a sale
nim ddru(n.i.) a mm tree
nir (v. i.) ... to run away, abscond
nir (v. t.) ... to run
nitir (v. t.) ,.. to scatter
noge ... an enclitic attached
to adjectives with the meaning of " fairly ", <« pretty ", etc. E. g. Jiambalnoge - fairly heavy, sibilnoge - pretty sweet
nogod (adj.)... sweet
nor-nor (v. t.) to grumble, growl
norom (adj)... soft
notum(n. i.)... a name
nu (v. t.) ... to drink
nubd (adj.} ... dark
nuksdn (v. t.) to destroy
numu (n. i.)... a name
nunuai (v. t.) to suckle
o.
o (adv.} ... too, also (used as a suffix only)
od (n. i.) ... a house, room
odren (adj.)... tame
odris (n. a.)... an heir
obor (v. i.) ... to creep, crouch, fall flat on the stomach. Mid obor jiling = a man's whole length with
arms extended (•
oborte giti(v.i.). to sleep on the stomach ochd, ocho
(inter.} ... take care. Conveys
a caution
' odad (adj.) ... wet
( od (v. t.) ... to break
oe (n. a.} ... a bird
oe (v. t.) ... to tear
to swim
a miser
to boil eggs
steam
to outcaste
to put on oil, to oil
who
what
what
where, in what direc-
e, in what place
e
where, to what place
oidr (v. t.) ... owl (n. a.) ... oiong (v. t.)... oiong (n. i.)... ojdti (v. t.) ... ojo(v.t.) ... okoe (pron.)... okon (adj.) ... okond (pron.) . okonpdre (adv.)
tion okonre (adv.)..
(rest) okonte (adv.)..
(motion) ol (v. i.) ... to rise
issue, ooze out
ol (v. t.) ... to takeout, bring out ol (v. t.) ... to write, record ombd (v. i.)... to go on the hands
and knees omon (v. i.)... to come up out of the
ground, shoot, germinate, sprout ondokdr (n. i.).. a person ( usually a
Hindu ) supposed to waylay
children and sacrifice them in
order to get a good harvest ondo (conj.)... and, again ondong (v. t.). to take out
ong (v. t.) ...
onol (n. i.) ..
of a dhoti
onol (v. t.) ..
onol (adj.) ..
onolb a # si
(n.i.) ..
ova (v. i.) ..
to blow with the mouth the coloured border
to paint, draw striped
a slipknot
used to express the bad feeling shown, say, by refusing to speak or visit after a trivial quarrel. Is essentially evanescent
( 1*3 )
( /(. /'. ).. :i bad omen t.) ... to pull after, drag, tjsed of the custom of taking wives forcibly from hdts, etc. (n. i.) ... same as araut q. v. v. t.) ... to bathe orony (r. t.}... to blow (e. <j. a horn
or flute)
otdr (adj.)... broad <^(j (r. t.) ... to press ote (n. ^) ... cultivated land, a
field, »a plot
ote-ruku (n. i.) itti'earthquake ot&l (n. i.) ... a water-channel otony (r. /.)... to follow. Otong topolko hujulend — they came in Indian file.
otdng (v. £.)... to carry away ( used of the wind only)
P.
pabitd (n. i.) a papaid ( kind of fruit )
padd (v. t.)... to kick
pagrd (n. i.).. gold earring worn by women
pair (v. t.) ... to overflow, flow over
paiti (v. t.*)... to work
pajau (v. <.)... to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use
paldti clddu
(n. a.) ... a kind of worm simi- lar to the silkworm, but smaller. Used in the euro of epilepsy. Paldti is the name of the tree on which it feeds
pampal (n. a.) a butterfly, moth
panchd (n. i.) rent
panti ' (n. i.)... about 10 maunds
parau (v. t.)... to read
par id (adj.)... waste, fallow
l»trjd (a. a.)., a cultivator, raiyat jmskd \ r. /.)... to scratch. Used of
fowls, dogs, horses, cattle, etc.,
throwing up enrth with their feet. pate (n. i.) ... one bit of a * a g a r
(small cart) wheel pati (n. i.) ... two seers or four
pounds. «
patni (n. a.)... female moth that
• emerges from silkworm cocoons.
patrd (n. t.;... plate or pot made of
stone patd (v. t.) ... fo entwine, e.g. the
branches of two trees or a snake pd (post.) ... indicates direction p ddu sim ,
sdndi (n. a.), the losing cock in a
fight pdevd (v. i.)... to clear up, e. g. the
weather after rain pdgd (n. i.)... rope, string (thick,
strong) pdlan (n. i.)... a saddle; the soft
covering put on pack animals pdlu lid sd
(n. t.) ... mica pdvl (n. i.) ... a ploughshare pdndoi (n. i.).. a pumpkin (white) pdndu ling
(n. a.) ... a cobra pan d u-b o
(adj.} ... grey-haired pdpari (adj.).. old (inanimate
objects only) '
pdrd (v. t.) ... to plant in a nursery or specially prepared portion of a field ; to plant closely pdrd (n. i.) ... quicksilver ,
pdripdri ,
(adv.} ... in turn, by turns pdrkom (n. t.) a bed pdte (v. t.) ... to fold round
( 174 )
pate numu
(n. i.) ... a nickname
pean (ad).} ... strong, stout, hard- working
pedji (n. i.)... an onion Penain (n. a.) a weaver
peo (v. p.} ... to be strong
pf.re (v. t.) ... to twist the tail
pere (v. t.) ... to fill
pereo (v. p.}.. to be full of, to be covered with
pero (n. i.) ... an egg ; the testicles
peto (n. i.) ... same as pero. Also " lay an egg ".
pi (n. i.) ... a plain, maiddn
pichd (v. t.)... to follow, pursue
pikd (n. i.) ... cigarette made of tobacco covered with leaves
pild (n. i.) ... the spleen
pilpai(n.i.)... a boundary pillar
pindd (n. i.) .. a dhoti
pindigi (n. i.). a verandah
pi ote (n.i.)... second class land known as bad
pit (n. i.) ... bile
pitol (n. i.) . . . brass
podsi (n. i.)... mist
pochd (v.t.)... to escape
pochod (n. i.).. force, violence
poild (n. i.)... about one seer
poisd (n. i.)... a pice
pold (n. i.) ... a ring
pord (v. £.)••• to skin
pord (n. i.) ... intestines
por so ddru
(n.i.) • ... a jack-fruit tree
pu (n. i.) ... a cup made of leaves
pfidki (n. a.)., a sandfly
fCtkad (n. i.).. a fog
pukuri (n. i.) . a tank
pul (n. i.) ... a bridge, culvert
puli-arki (n. i.) strong country liquor
pundi(adj.)... white purd (adj. Sf
adv.) ... many, much , pur ni ma
(n. i.) ... full moon
pursat (n. i.) leisure
pursi (n. i.)... a pimple
pusi (n. a.) ... a cat
pustd (n.a.)... a kind of deer, small
with white spots
putam (n. ?'.) a door ,
putddd (n. i.) a spring '
puti (v. /'.) ... to Ha/V^ a swollen stomach
R.
rabang (adj.) cold
rakab (v. i.)... to climb a hill, ascend, increase
rakabted (n. «'.) a ladder
rambd (n. i.) urid
ranakab (n. i.) a steep slope upwards
randpid (n. i.) an eyelid
rapd (v, t.) ... to roast
rasid (n. i.) ... a receipt
ratang (n. i.) hoar frost
ran (v. t.) ... to take off a dhoti or sari
rau (u. t.) ... to break
rd (v. t.) ... to untie
rda (v. t.) ... to cry, bleat, neigh, low, crow, roar, etc. Used gener- ally of all sounds made by animals
rdchd (n.i.)... a courtyard
rdji (v. t.) ... to compromise, agree
rdj-rog (n. i.) consumption
rdli (n. i.) ... a root from which very useful medicine is made
rdmi (n. a.)... a maind
rdmtid (n. i.). sir g uj d (kind of oilseed)
)
: ( V, iin/>.) to ivjoirr. make
merry, In- joyful rdnd'^-t ni
(n. </.) ... a widow rdpi't (r. t.)... to wink, blink
(r. t.) to break i<> (r. p.) to burst rdf! (it. i.) ... soup, juice re (v. t.) ... to rob, snatch away red (adj.) ... cool rebed (r. /.)... to stick in a hole or
passage a«d be unable to get out ;•«/<> (conj.) ...irf* retf (n. i.) ... roots, medicine rel (n.i.) ... the railway /•<//'</<? (v.imp.) to be hungry renge(adj.) ... poor we (r. *.) ... to cut up (with a
knife or the teeth) ; to tear
with the teeth resed (adj.) ... narrow. Resed Iwrd-
a lane or path rid (v. t.) ... to grind with a pestle
and mortar or in a mill. J)dtd
ririd-to grind the teeth rikd (v. t.) ... to do rintil (n. i.)... a cloud ; the sky i-iinil-sdri .
(n. a.) ... thunder riri (n. i.) ... a loan n'c (v. t.) ... to owe rit? em (v. t.) to lend (for a long
period on interest) riv idi (v. t.)... to borrow ring (v. t.) ... to forget ringd (n. i.)... want, scarcity, famine ro (adj.) ... dry rod (n. i.) ... a spirit, ghost rod (v. t.) ... to plant, transplant rogo (n. i.) ... a disease rokd (adj.) ... fresh roko (n. a.) ... a fly
r»i<i ( a. i.) ... ft kind oi t !•<•(; 1 1 «iu ih" fruit of which ink ami medicine are made ; myrabolam-
roni (n. i.) ... sowing tim<-
rotod (n. i.)... coiffure as worn by Uriya men
ru (y. i.) ... to rest *
ru (v. t.) ... to beat a drum %
rud (v. i.) ... to return
rudurd (y. i.) to return
rub (v. t.) ... to poison (used only of killing fishes by poisoning the water) ; to take out by the roots, to uproot
rubd (y. t.) ... used of the action of animals climbing, or trying to climb, up a vertical object, e. g. a cat climbing up a tree
ruing (y. imp.), to have "pins and needles," i. e. the peculiar feeling caused by keeping a limb in one position too long ; to have cramp
ruji (n. i.) ... the female organ, the vulva
rukd (n. i.) ... a chisel
ruku (v. i.\ . . . to tremble, shake, shiver
rukuichi (y. t.) to shake
rul (v. t.) ... to take off the fire
rulbing (n. a.), a kind of snake that drinks milk. The Hos believe that it can stop the rain by blowing ; hence rulbiny ongtadde is the expression used for a rainbow •«
I'umul (v. t.) ,. to roar (tigers only)
rung (v. t.) ... to husk
rupd (n. i.) ... silver
rupu (n. a.)... a parrot
rusurusu (v. imp.) ... to have ague
( 176 )
rutu (n. i.) ... a flute
rutui (v. i.) ... to come out of the
egg ; to hatch ruung (v. t.)... to prod, thrust
S.
saben (adj.) ... all, whole
sabuj (n. i.) ... proof
sadai (adj.) ... common, usual
sac/en (v. i.) ... to put out new leaves
after the cold weather sagi (n. i.) ... a wheel ; a sagar or
small rough cart saiad-korong
(adj.) ... kind saijang (n. i.). a rib saitibd (v. t.) to keep, look after,
take care of saiu (n. i.) ... thatch saiu dal (v. t.) to thatch sajd (v. t.) ... to punish sakam (11. i.) a leaf ; paper sakod (n. i.) ... conch salandi {n. i.) a roof salangi (adj.) high, tall samang (n. i.) the forehead samd (i\t.) ... to chop with a
hatchet samba rau
(v. t.) ... to support samdi (n. a.) the father of one's
son-in-law sanang ,
(v. imp.} . , sananglekdte (adv.) i .
wishes
sandang (v. i.). to fall on the back, '' fall flat
sandangte giti
«•
(y. i.) ... to sleep on the back sangar (v. t.) to hunt
to wish, desire, intend according to one's
sanyil (v. t.)... to look up
sanging (adj.) far, distant
sankd (n. i.)... a kind of bracelet
worn by women only sapdrum dd
(n. a.) ... dew sar (n.i.) ... an arrow. Mid sar =
the distance an arrow can be shot sarai (v. i.) ... to collect paddy in
one place after cutting saram (n. a.), a kind of deer sarap (n. i.)... a road <
sard (v. t.) ... to gi^e the oath, swear sard (n. a.) ... a big monkey with
a black face and a long tail sardi (n. i.)... harvest time sare (v. t.) ... to leave behind, leave
remaining.
sareo (v.p.)... to remain, be left sarjom ddr u
(n. i.) ... the sdl tree from
which wood for houses is obtained sarsar (n. i.).. finger-nail, toe-nail,
claw. Mid sarsar - a finger's
breadth
sasang (n. i.).. turmeric sasanglekd
(adj.) ... yellow saun (n.i.)... the' sound made by
water when boiling sdb (v. t.) ... to catch, seize, take
hold of, apprehend, arrest sdbon (n. i.)... soap sdboro (n. i.). a crowbar sddom (n. a.)., a horse sded (v. t.) ... to breathe. Mid sded-
distance that can be covered in
one breath sdejang (n. i.) a rib sdgi (n. i.) ... a waterfall sdki (n. a.) ... a namesake. Is
looked on as a relation
( 177 )
sdkom (;/. i.) a bracelet s d k o in l> i n g
(n. ft.) ... a wateranaUp said (r. t.) ... to choose sal ute (n. i.) lowest lying rice land
known as berd
sdliikutl (n. i.) the lotus plant sdmamiityre
(adv.) ... before, in the
presence of sdmd (cujj.)... empty; useless;
gratis,> free of charge famdge (adv.). vmllout rhyme or
*reason
sd mate (adv.).. without rhynre or » reason
sdmom (n. i.).. gold
sdn (n. i.) ... wood
sdngd (n. i.)... potato, sweet potato,
yam ; any edible root sdngi (adv.)... very many sdr (n. i.) ... manure sdn (v. t.) ... to believe, trust sdri (v. p.) ... to sound, ring sdrige (adv.) .. really, truly, in
fact sdriolekd
(adj.) *... reliable sdriurd (v. i.). to echo sdsd (adj.) ... cold sating (v. t.) to bear, suffer (pain);
to stand abuse ; to have patience
with
se (v. t.) ... to beat in (rain) sedv (v. i.) ... to be capable of
judging well or thinking properly s e art akan i
(n. a.) ... an adult sebe (v. t.) ... to get accustomed to,
accustom, practise sekd (v. t.) ... to prepare, make
ready
seval (n. t.)... wooden or other receptacle in which paddy is placed for liu>king ; often merely a hole made in hard soil or stone
sen, seno (v. i.). to go, walk senbd (v. i.)... to roam seneor (n. i.).. a rafter sengel(n.i.)... fire lengelmdrmdr
(n. a.) ... a centipede sengelsing
(n. i.) ... nettle sengel ting
(v. t.) ... to light a fire senhord (v. i.). to journey senoean sirmd
(n. i.) ... last year seped (n. a.)... a young man ser (v. i.) ... to melt sereng (n. i.).. a rock or big stone
lying flat seta (n. a.) ... a dog
morning
to reach, arrive
to draw in the
setd (n. i.) seter (o. i.) sib (v. t.)
breath sibil (adj.) sid (n. i.) sid (v. t.)
string ) sidd (adj.)
sweet
x
cactus
to break ( rope or
first
siddre (adv.).. formerly, at first
siddsddd (adj.) simple, frank, open
siiu (n. i.) ... the smell emitted by raw fish or raw meat. $db st'ic- the ceremony of purification seven days after a child's birth
siki (n. i.) ... a four anna piece*
sikiv (n.a.)... mosquito
sikri (n. i.) ... a chain ; handcuffs
siku (n. a.) ... a louse
( 178 )
sikuar - b a i r (»i. z.) ... a siklid-bhangd used
for carrying loads on the
shoulders sili(n.i.) ... the white matter
often found in the corners of
the eyes on rising
silping (n. i.) a door made of wood sim (n. a.) ... a fowl ismpdrd (n. z.) the place where cockr
fighting takes place simrd (n. i.) . . . cockcrow simri (n. i.) ... a bean sim tol (v. t.) to cockfight with
artificial spurs
a boundary
a chain ; handcuffs
the backbone, spine to ornament, adorn,
the sun
simd (n.i.) .. smki (n. z.) . . sindurijang
(n. i.)
singdr (v.t.).. decorate singi (n. a.) .. sin gili asur
(n. z. ) ... the west singi maskalre
(adv.} ... in broad daylight singiol (n. z.) the east singi satub
(/i. z'.) ... the whole day sinipud (n. z.) bellows si pin g idi
(v. t.) ... to carry with both ha n c|s
sipud (v. /.)... to blow with the bellows (may be used of playing the harmonium or organ)
sir (n. z.) ... a vein
sirmd (n. z.)... a year
*sisir,(ti. a.) ... dew
^sitani (n. a.). . a cultivator « situad (n. a.)., wax
sitio, (n. a.)... a child
i
to plough, cultivat a cultivator
to smell
c
to fit, fix
to stab (with a sword
siu, si (v. t.).,
siui (n. a.) .
soan (v. £.) .
sob (v. £.)
sobo (v. £.) ., or knife)
soda (v. £.) .., used of the action of cocks in fighting. The reciprocal form sopodd is common
so'd (v. i.) ... to rot
soed ote (n. z'.) low-lying land between bgrd and bad (
sokd (n. a.) ... a «nK'hch-doctor (there are none in the Kolhan, but tliey are imported when wanted ; are supposed to be more profound than a deond)
sokod (n. z.)... a valley
solong (v. t.}.. to pass through, or put into, an aperture so that removal is possible, e. g. the arm in the sleeve of a coat, a stick between two ends of a rope so as to form a sort of slung seat
somdn ( adj. ) level
somsor (n. a.) a grasshopper
son (v. t.~) ... to hiss
son (n. z.) ... flax
sondoro (n. z.) matter, pus
song (v. t.} ... to measure rice in a paild or wooden measure
sonoro ( n. z. ) the bar across a door to keep it shut
sor (v. t.) ... to sniff
sord (n. z.) ... saltpetre
soso (n. z.) ... a kind of tree from the fruit of which lubricating oil is made
sosoi (n. z.) ... the sap of a tree
su (v. t.) ... to sigh
sudete (adv.).. slowly, softly
.<,//.).. lie-low, sitd (n. i.} ... a \vcll
//, /'.) ... a iireiHe- ^for
clothe- )
aui (c. t.) ... to sign sujd (n. i.~) ... a largo needle (for
.-«• \\inu; mats, etc.) stikri (H. a.)... a pig stiku (v. imp.) to be happy, pleased,
contented, willing suku (q, t.)... to like, 1 o v e ; be
pleated N\"jih ; agree sitku (n. /.)... ii>gjurd (small) sttAul (n. i.)... smoke ; tobacco sukul sib (v. t.) to smoke 'sukute (adc.). voluntarily aid (n. i.) ... dysentery sumad (adc.).. only, alone auma/ty (adc.) only, alone sun (v. i.) ... to dance sunum (n. i.). oil siniutu (n. a.), next younger brother
or sister, i. e. the one born after
the «ne referred to svpid (n. i.)... coiffure as worn by
women sujju (n. i.)... upper part of the
arm sur (v. i.) ... to take shelter from
the rain ; to drown surpang (n. a.), a wasp susun (v. i.) ... to dance sutam (n. i.)... yarn, thread, fibre sutdte (j i t i
(c. i.) ... to sleep on the side suti (v. i.) ... to recover con- sciousness after fainting from
lack of food or loss of blood, etc.,
or after a drunken stupor rutu (v. t.) ... to follow as a sort of
bodyguard sutui (n. i.)... coat, upper garment
T.
(r. t.) to enquire (//. /.)... a place
tain (v. i.) ... to stay, wait ; to livo taiom (post ).. after, behind t a i o m r e , i a i o m t e
(adr.) ... subsequently iniitfiuod (n.i.) a tent itamrds (n. i.). a guava taran (n.i.)... the shoulder tasad (n. i.)... grass t asadlekd
(adj.) ... green taui (v. t.) ... t o d r a w u p, e. </.
water from a well, to pull up ;
to milk
taukuld (n. a.) a jackal, fox tdbd (v. t.) ... to wrestle tdben (n i..)... pounded rice, flat
rice, churd
tden (n. a.) ... a crocodile tder (n. i.) ... cucumber tdgoe (v. t) ... to chew tdki (v. t.) ... to hit against an
object with the head or the
upper part of the body tdld (adj.) ... half, middle tdldre (adv.).. in the midst of tdli (n. i.) ... a plate tdm (v. t.) ... to strike, beat tdmbd (n. i.).. copper tdndd (c.t.)... to spread> the legs
apart ,
tdngd (v. t.)... to sort tdnyd (adj.) ... separate, different tdngi (v. t.) ... to wait for (short
time)
tdni (n. a.) ... a wild dog tdping (v. t.) .. to smack, slap, smite
the breast (with the flat of the
hand)
( 180 )
tdping chaprd
(v. t,) ... to clap the hands tdrdko (pron.) some of them t drdmdr d
(adj.) ... some tdrdsi ngi
(n. i.) ... afternoon fdri (n. i.) ... a plate tdrob ddru
(n. i.) ... a pidr tree tdsi (v. t.) ... to spread grain out tdtd (n. a.) ... a grandfather tebd (v. I) ... to reach, arrive tcgd(v.t.) • •• to tread; to strike
with the paw (tigers) teld (v. t.) •«. to catch in the hand
(something which is falling) t embe (adj.} . . . shallow tend ho n
(n. a.) ... brother-in-law tend kui
(n. a.) ... sister-in-law ten (v. t.) ... used of putting a weight on anything to prevent it being carried away by the wind tendd (v. t.)... to pour off slowly
while covered tender (v. t.) to lean on teng (v. t.} ... to weave t en g d hon
(n. a.) ... brother-in-law engd k\ti
(n. a.)' ... sister-in-law ter (v. t.) ... to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use ; to forge ter (v. t.) ... to throw ( a stone ) ter (n. a.) ... a thunderbolt <tetan g
(v. imp.) ... to be thirsty tetd dd (n. i.) clear water
tete (n. i.) ... moonlight. Tete nidd
* ~
a moonlight night ; chdndu tetetand-ihe moon is shinirv*
o
ti (n. i.) ... the hand, arm tiki (n. a.) ... a tick tiki (v. t.) ... to boil
(rice or vegetables) tikin (n. i.)... noon, midday tilming (n. i.). til, sesamum ( ting (y. t.) ... to burn (firewood) tingu (v. i.)... to stand Tintri (n. a.)., a worjcor 'In brass ;
the Thatera cfsW tiril (n. i.) ... a kind of tree, the
fruit of which is largely eaten tirub (v. t.) ... look down, bow, stoop tising (n. i.) . . . today ti-talkd (n. i.) palm of the hand tiu(v.t.) ... to snap up with the
fingers
toau(n. a.) ,.. a cuckoo tod (n. i.) ... milk ; the breast of a
woman, a teat todpere (u. t.). to fill with milk.
Used of the earliest appearance
of soft grain in the ears of the
paddy stalks
tobrd (n. i.)... alluvial deposit, silt tol (v. t.) ... to tie, bind, wrap;
usea also of the conversion of
silkworms into cocoons tolgoe (v. t.)... to hang
(death penalty) tondang (n. ?'.). brushwood, low
jungle, scrub tondom (n. i.) a knot topang (v. t.). to cut or chop wood
into pieces
tor (n. a.) ... a big lizard, iguana torai (n.i.)... a sword torang (adv.).. perhaps torkdlom(n. i.) year after next
tortd, t e r t d
(r. t.) ... to movo away tn (r. t.) ... to sting /// (/<. (/.) ... a squirrel (mini (n. /.)... a forked piece of
wood used in making fences tud (c. L) ... to take off clothes;
to take out of the ground fiiiiHf (r. (.)... to shoot. Mid tiling- distance that can be shot with a
bow and arrow tniu (n. ai) .„ a jackal, fox t u k a par d ^i* >
{n. a.) ... a locust tukd (n. /.) ... the nest of a bird 4uku (». ?'.) ... the wooden bar with
which the husking of paddy is
done
iuld (n. i.) ... scales for weighing t if I i (adj.) ... round (like the moon)
e. g. a cart wheel tuli chandu
(n. i.) ... full moon tumbalkct (n.a.) the person s who
collect paddy after it is reaped
and carry it to the threshing
floor
tumbd (n.i.y... a gourd (big) tumbid (v. t.).. to stumble tumbrub (adj.'). short tundd (v. t.)... to prod tundu(n.i.)... the end tundubdndid
(n. i.} ... leprosy tunu (n. i.) ... the sting (e. g. of a
tupu (P. «.) ... to dip in water tHjntri (n. i.) a hat tur (r. i.) ... to rise tvrtvngr (tump.)to feel the sun's glare turub (v. <.)... to prop, support (in a physical sense)
turuid, turui
(num.) ... six tilting (v. t.)... to put on clothes,
dress tutkun (adj.). cold (used of hail,
hoar-frost, etc)
T.
fa (n. i.) ... doubt. Jan td banod-
t there is no doubt
idkd (n. i.) ... money ; a rupee
tdkd-ldb (n.i.) avarice
tdkui (v. t.)... to spin
tdro(n.i.) ... an armlet
tel (v. t.) ... to snap the ringers
tik (adj.) ... right, proper
tikd (n. i.) . vaccination
tikd (n. i.) ... a form of mortgage in which land is cultivated for a fixed number of years, during which both principal and interest are liquidated by usufruct
tikurd(v.t.~)... to rectify
tip (n. z.) ... a thumb impression
tipan (v. £.)... to set silkworms' eggs
tird (n. a.) ... the small moth that emerges from silkworm cocoons
tiring (n. i.)... a bell hung round the neck of cattle etc. while grazing
to (v. t.) ... to hit the mark with an arrow or bullet ; to strike against
toe (v. t.) ... to crush between the nails (as with lice)
toiol (n. i.) ... a flag
toke (v. t.) ... to hit against any object with the foot or the lower part of the body . *
tonto (na.)... a black ant
topd (n. i.)... a small basket
topd (y. t.) ... to bury
( 182 )
topajang (n.i.) a funeral topo (v. rec) .. to adjoin tore (v. t.) ... to shoot (with bow
and arrow or a gun) totd (adj) ., totd (v. t.) .
sdri
tote (v. t.) .. 'toto (v. t) ., tunki (n. i.).,
naked
to take off a dhoti or
same as tore, q. v.
tp knock
a medium-sized bas-
ket such as is used in sowing
u.
u (v. i.) ... to fall down uai (v i .) ... to be well-known Z7az'a/(;an-well-known, notorious. Used of persons only ub (n. i.) ... hair ud (v. t.) ... to swallow ud (n. i.) ... a mushroom udrd (n. i.)... shafts of a sagar or
small cart
udub (v. t.) ... to show, reveal, ex- plain, inform
udur (v. t.) ui (v. t.) uiu (v. t.)
blanket uiu (n. i.) ukd (n. i.) uku (v. t.)
secrete
uld (v. t.)
' i,
ulidd (v.t.)
*• c '
ulidd (n. i.)
to push, shove
to jump, spring, skip
to cover with a
an abscess, boil
an elbow
to hide, conceal,
to vomit
to drivel, dribble saliva
uli ddru (n. i.) mangoe tree ultd (v. t.) ... to upset umbul (n. i.).. shade, shadow ; ghost, spirit
i (v. t.} ... to be well -known (facts, offences, etc.) (v. t.) ... to twist (into rope)
(n. i.)
hide
iinf (n. a.) undi (n. a.)
t
bark of a tree, skin,
(by
age
a camel
a brother (younger) undiboed (n.a.) brothers or cousins undiboko (n.a) brothers or cousins undu(n.i.)... a hole, cave, lair,
black ants' nest ungud ungud (adj.) ... doubled up
or disease)
unum (v. i.)... to dive , upan (n. i.) .. vpi (n. a.) .. upunid, upun
(num.) ur (v. t.) urgum (adj) . .
tepid
uri (n. a.) . . urn (n. a.) .. urub (v. t.) . .
a cockroach «•
four
to excavate
hot (slight), warm,
cattle
a beetle
to put into the fire
(already alight) urui (v. t.) ... to tie tightly; uruu (v.t.) ... to remember, be
careful uruulekdte
(adv.) ... according to one's
wishes, adcoiding as one likes usam (n. i.}... small temporary
shelter made in the open to watch
crops from
usu (adj.) ... lean, thin usur (v. imp.) to smart, burn, e. g.
salt in a cut utar ... is added to other
words to convey an intensive
meaning. Emutaraiding -I have
given it to him absolutely ;
Rdnclriutarrenko - the people of
Ranchi itself utrdo (n. i.) ... to shed the skin
\
( 183 )
n, /'.) ... cooked <l,il ; curry ututitd (n. i.) snmo as ntutod, q. v.
"/'*('•./'.) ... to rise, get up, wake nu (r. t.} ... to starve, die of
itt<ti,-hi (r. t.) to wake up, raise starvation
n tni nu (n. /'.) Athun's apple, gullet, nnrlii(n. i.) ... linseed throat
INDEX. A.
PAUA.
I. Difference between copula and m£iui ... ... 97
I ii-ril as postposition of «fcnitiv<« c;i ... ... 17 (\)*
I ii-.-.l as ropula or verbalising a<H-nt ... ... 44,45
.17 us.-d ;is past ti'ii-'-siitKx with indirect object ... ... ti2
Added postpositions ... ... ... «•• A 7
Adjectives, *9ftmparison of — ... ... ••• 25
Formation of some — ... ... ... 23
i
Invariability of — ... ... ... 21
Transferability of — ... .... ... 22
Adverbs of manner ... ... ... ... 128
place ... ... ... ... 127
quantity ... ... ... ... 127
time ... ... ... ... 327
Agglutinative language, Meaning of — ... ... 2
Akad used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood,
active voice, of transitive verbs ... ... 45, 58
Akan used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood,
'active voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... 45, 66
used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood, passive
voice ... ... ... ... 45, 92
Alo used to express negation with imperative and subjunctive
moods ... ... .. ... 81
used to express prohibitions ... ... ... 79
An used in formation of adjectives ... ... ... 23
Animate objects, Distinction between — and inanimate objects 12
in connection with gender ... ... 11» 12
Animate participial nouns, Formation and use of — ...' 87, 8b
Approximations, Expression of — ... ... ...* 117
Article, No — in Ho ... ... ... ... 20
Atkdr, Impersonal use of — ... ... ... 106
B.
J5a?«o, Conjugation and use of — ... ... ... 100
Bare tense-form, Meaning of — ... ... ... 45
( 186 ,
C. ''
PARA.
Cardinal numbers, Use of full and shortened forms of — ... 112
Cases, Formation of — ... ... ... ... 16
Caste names, Ho equivalents of common — ... ... 136
Characteristics of Munda or Kolarian languages ... ... 3
Checked vowels ... ... ... ... 10
Chi used in asking questions ...
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Chronology among the Hos ....
Coins in Ho... ... ... ... .... 124
Comparison of adjectives... ... ... ^ • *• 25
Compass, Points of the — ... ...*•* ... 125
Compound added postpositions ... ... ... '17
demonstrative pronouns ... ... ... 23
verbs, Formation of — ... ... ...108,109
verbs, Two kinds of — ... ... ••• 107
Conditional clause, Position of — ... ... ••• 74
mood, Conjugation of — ... ... ••• 74
Conjugation of bano
conditional mood ... ... ••« 74
ed ... ... ... ... 103
future tense, indicative mood ... ... 53
hobdo
imperfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 51
impersonal verbs
intransitive verbs ... ... «•• 66
kd ... ... ... '..- 103
men ... ... ... ... 101
mend ... ... ... ... 98
metd ... ... ... ... 101
passive voice ... ... ... 92
past tense, indicative mood ... ... 60
perfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 57
pluperfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 64
present tense, indicative mood ... ... 48
reciprocal verbs ... ... ... 96
reflexive verbs ... ... ... 94
subjunctive mood ... ... ... 73
verbs generally ... ... ... 43
Conjunctions, List of — ... ... ... ... 129
\
PARA.
participles, Formation and use of — ... ... !>1
Consonants, Quantities of — ... ... 8, 9
Copula, Use of — as verbalising agent... ... ... 44,45
D.
n f/, Use of — with transitive verbs ... ... ... 70
Use of future tense of — ... ... ... 70*
D;iy, Divisions of the — among the Hos ... ... 123
a of the week ... ?.. ... ... 122
Pi'denjion of nouns ... ... ... ... 18,19
* ^vypersonal pronouns ... ... ... 30
Demonstrative pronouns, Compound — ... ... 33
Declension of — ... ... 32
Formation of — ... ... 32
' Direct object, Insertion of — in conditional mood ... ... 74
future tense, indicative mood ... 54
imperfect tense, indicative mood... 51
past tense, indicative mood ... 61
perfect tense, indicative mood ... 58
pluperfect tense, indicative mood. 64
present tense, indicative mood ... 49
subjunctive mood ... ... 73
Direct abject-signs, Use of — ... ... ... 47
Distributive numerals, Formation of — ... ... 115
Divisions of the day ... ... ... ... 123
the year ... ... ... ... 120
Dold used In expressing invitations ... ... ... 80
Dual, Inclusive and Exclusive — forms of personal pronouns ... 27
Dual number, formation of — ... ... ... 13
Use of — as a sign of respect ... ... 15
Dual suffix, Use of — with inanimate nouns ... ... 14
Ean. used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active
voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... ... '45,46
used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, passive
voice ... ... ... ... ... 45, 92 t
Ete used as ablative case-ending ... ... ... 17 (vi) .
used in comparison of adjectives ... ... 25 *-
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
used in relation to time ... ... ... 17 (vi)
( 188 ) f
PABA.
Exclusive dual, Use of — in personal pronouns ... 27
Exclusive plural, Use of — in personal pronouns ... 27
F.
Fractions, Expression of — ... ... ... H6
(Full forms of cardinal numerals, Use of — ... ... 112
Full forms of personal pronouns ... ... ...26,28,29
personal pronouns uced as direct object-signs of
certain* transitive verbs ... ... 69,70,105
Future tense, Conjugation of ... ... ..,, 53
Idiomatic usage of — ... ... * , ... 55
Insertion of direct and indirect objects in — ... '54
Use of — of dai ... ... ... 70
G.
Gender, Manner of indicating — ... ... ... 11
Genitive case-ending ... ... ... ... 17(i)
H.
Hobdo, Use and conjugation of — ... ... ... 102
Honang, Use of — with redo in conditional sentences ...' 75
Use of — with reo in certain conditional sentences ... 76
Hordte used as instrumental case-ending ... ... 17 (iv)
Hos, Origin and history of the — ... ... ... 1
I.
Ichi used as a causative and permissive suffix ... ... 68
used in forming transitive from intransitive verbs ... 68
Imperative mood, Formation of — ... ... ... 78
Imperfect auxiliary, Use of — ... ... ... 71
Imperfect tense, Conjugation of — ... ... ... 51
Insertion of direct and indirect objects in — ... 51
Impersonal Verbs ... ... ... ... 104
Inanimate participial nouns, Formation and use of — ... 89, 90
Inanimate objects in .connection with gender ... ... 11, 12
Inanimate object-sign, Insertion of — in certain tenses ... 49
Non-insertion of — in certain tenses ... 57
Inclusive dual, Use of — in personal pronouns ... ... 27
PARA.
'usivo plural. Use of — in personal pronouns ... ... 27
fjnitr pronouns. Formation of — ...
[ndioative mood, Conjugation of future tense ... ... 53
Conjugation o! imperfect tense .... ... 51
Conjugation of intransitive verbs ... 66
Conjugation of past tense ... ... (50
< 'on {libation of perfect tense ... ... 57
Conjugation of pluperfect tense ... ... 64
Conjugation of present tense ... ... 48
% Tense-suffixes of — ... ... ... 45
Indirecf »bject-signs, Use of— ... ... ... 47
Indirect object, insertion of — in future tense, indicative mood ... 54
imperfect „ „ „ ... 51
past „ „ „ ... 62
perfect „ „ „ ... 58
pluperfect „ „ „ ... 64
present „ „ „ ••• 50
subjunctive mood ... 73
Instrumental case-ending ... ... ... 17(iv)
Interjections, List of — ... ... ... ... 130
Interrogations, How expressed ... ... ... 82
Interrogative pronouns ... ... ... ... 34
Intransitive verbs, Conjugation of — ... ... ... 66
Distinction between transitive and — ... 67
Formation of transitive verbs from — ... 68
Invitations, How expressed ... ••• ••• 80
Irregular verbs ... ... ... 97 et seqq.
l\ \\<(\& as sign of the subjunctive mood ... ... 73
Aa, Conjugation of — ... ... ... ••• 103
Used to express negation A"-,/ U«M! as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active
voice, of transitive verbs ... ... ••• 45,60
AV// used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active
voice, of intransitive verbs ... ••• ••• 45, t>b
il as transitive tense-suffix kill ; relationships among the Hos King used as dual suffix ... A"'-> u*ed as plural suffix ...
/f
( 190 ) i
PARA. Kol, Derivation of the word — ... ... ... 1
Kolarian languages, Characteristics of — ... .., , 3
Lagdtwgd used to express duty or obligation ... ... 102
Led used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative mood,
active voice, of transitive verbs ... ... 45, 64
Lekd used in forming compound demonstrative pronouns ... 33
used with demonstrative adjectives ... ... 33
Len used as past tense-suffix with certain verbs ... ... ( 66
used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative^^od',
active voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... 45, 66
used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative mood,
passive voice ... ... ... ... 45, 92
Levirate custom among the Hos ... ... ... 133
Lo denoting association or combination ... ... 17 (v)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Locative case-ending of motion ... ... ... 17 (iv)
case-ending of rest ... 17 (ii), (iii), (vii), (x)
genitive case-ending ,.e ... 17 (xi), (xii)
M
Measures, How expressed in Ho ... ... ... 124
Men, Difference between — and metd ... ... ... 101
Use and conjugation of — ... ... ... 101
Mend, Conjugation of — ... ... ... ,,.. 93
Difference between — and copula a ... ... 97
Use of — ... ... ... ... 97
Use of — to express possession ... ... ... 99
Mente, Use of — ... ... ... ... 101
Metd, Difference between — and Men ... ... ... 101
Methods, of computing time in Ho ... ... ... 120
Miad used as an indefinite article ... ..'. ... 20
Months, of the year ... ... ... ... 119
Munda languages, Characteristics of — ... ... 3
N
N used in formation of adjectives and nouns ... .., 23
Negation, How expressed ... ... ... 81
Neuter pronouns ... ... ... ... 31
PARA.
Nouns, Declension of — ... ... ... ... 18, 19
Formation of — From vwli- ... ... ... :.'."•
Instrumental and objective — ... ... ... 89, 90
Participial (animate) — or nouns of agency ... 87, 88 Number, Singular, dual and plural —
Numerals, Cardinal — ... ... ... ... 112
Distributive — ... ... ... H-r>
Fractional — ... ... ... ... 116*
Full and shorted forms of Cardinal — ... 112
Ordinal— ... ... ... ... H3
•» Proportional — ... ... ... 114
'•«
o
%
0 used as tense-suffix of future tense, indicative mood, passive
, * voice ... ... ... ... ... 45, 92
Object-sign, Insertion of inanimate — in certain tenses ... 49
Non-insertion of inanimate — in certain tenses ... 57
Use of— ... ... ... ... 47
Ordinal numerals ... ... ... ... 113
Otan used as tense-suffix of present tense, indicative mood,
passive voice ... ... ... ••• 45, 92
Otan taiken used as tense-suffix of imperfect tense, indicative
m,ood, passive voice ... ..." ... 45, 92
Pd used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 (iii)
Pdete used AS ablative case-ending ... ... 17 (ix)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Pdre used as locative of rest <.. ... ... 17 (vii)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Particles, List of miscellaneous — ... ... ... 131
Participial adjectives, How formed and used ... -v 85
Use of — to express relative clauses .... 86
Participial forms, Use and function of — ... ... 84
Participial nouns, How formed and used ... ... t 87, 90
Partitive genitive case-ending ... ... ... 17 (i)
Passive voice, Use and conjugation of — ... ... 92
Past tense, Conjugation of — indicative mood ... ... ,60
Pdte used as locative of motion ... ... 17 (viii)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Perfect tense, Conjugation of — indicative mood ... ... 57
R
( 192 )
PARA.
Personal Pronouns, Declension of — ... ... ... 30
Full forms of — ... ... ... 28
Inclusive and exclusive dual and plural of — 27
Shortened forms of — ... ... 28
Two forms of — ... ... ... 2eJ
Use of full and shortened forms of — ... 29
Pluperfect tense, Conjugation of — indicative mood ... 64
Proper function of — ... ... 64
Plural, Inclusive and exclusive — fonns of personal pronouns ... , '21
Plural number, Formation of — ... ... ... 13
Plural suffix, Use of — with inanimate nouns ... .. 14
Points of the compass ... ... ... ... 125
Possession, How expressed ... ... ... 99
Possessive case-ending ... ... ... ... 17 (i)
Possessive pronouns, Formation of — ... ... ... 36"-38
Three forms of — ... ... ... 39
Postpositions, Formation and use of separate — ... ... 126
Meaning and use of added — ... ... 17
Present tense, Conjugation of — indicative mood ... ... 48
Prohibitions, How expressed ... ... ... 79
Pronominal object-signs, Use of — ... ... ... 47
Pronominal subject-signs, Use of — ... ... ... 46
Use of — with imperfect tense of indi- cative mood ... ... 51
Pronouns, Demonstrative — ... ... ... 32, 33
Indefinite — ... ... ... ... 35
Interrogative — ... ... .... 34
Neuter— ... ... ... ... 31
Personal— ... ... ... ... 26-30
Possessive — ... ... ... ... 36-40
Reflexive — ... ... ... ... 42
„ Relative — ... ... ... .- 41
Proportionate Numerals, Formation of — ... 114
a
Quantities of vowels and consonants ... ... 4-9
Questions, Use of chi in asking —
R
Re used as postposition of locative case ... ... 17 (i)
used in forming conjunctive participles
\
( L»3
i used as equivalent to " regarding," etc.
u«rd :i^ locative genitive case-ending
in forming conjunctive participle to indicate value, age, measure, etc. verbs. Conjugation of — Formation of —
> indicating realizable or probable condition
used as sign of the conditional mood JUeflexl'vo pronouns .^
Ketlexiu,' verbs, Conjugation of — ...
* » T, Formation of — ...
^^
Hclationship, How fo ascertain —
Terms of— ... ...
Relative clauses, How expressed .--
Relative pronouns ... ...
I't-ii u.-ed as equivalent to" the wife of" used as locative genitive case-ending used to indicate value, age, measure, etc. Use of — in certain conditional clauses
8
used in comparison of adjectives Separate'postpositions, Formation and use of — Sept relationship among the Hos ... Shortened forms of cardinal numerals of personal pronouns Simple adde'd postpositions ...
Singular number, Forms of — ...
Subject-signs, Use of pronominal — ... Subjunctive mood, Formation and use of —
I'AKA.
17(xiii) 17 (xii)
17(xiih
7.5 74
94
132 86
^1, 86
17 (xi)
17 (xi)
17 (xi)
76
... 25
... 126
135
... 112
26, 28, 29
... 17
73
/a used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 /iii)
Tiid used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood, active
voice, of transitive verbs ... ... ... 7;;
used as an ablative case-ending ... ... ... 17 /xi)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
Taikt'tt used as imperfect auxiliary ... ... ; i
'I nil used as tense-suffix of present tense, indicative mood, active
voice, of all verbs ... ... ...45,48,66
PARA. Tan taiken used as tense-suffix of imperfect tense, indicative
mood, active voice, of all verbs ... ...45,51,66
Tare used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 (x)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
used to indicate animate indirect object ... ... 17 (x)
Tdte used as locative of motion ... ... ... 17 (x)
used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91
used to indicate animate indirect object ... ... 17 (x)
Te used as instrumental case-endin-o- . 17 (iv)
o \ J
used as locative of motion ... ... ... 17 (iv)
used to signify price ... ... ..17 (iv)
used with dual and plural suffixes of nouns denoti.ig family
relations ... ... ... ... 43
Ted, Idiomatic use of — with lionang ... ... ... 76
used to form inanimate participial nouns ... ... ° 89
used with adjectives of quality to form inanimate nouns ... 90
Tense-form, Meaning of bare — ... ... ... J5
Tense-suffixes of indicative mood ... ... ... 45
Tenses, Formation of — ... ... ... ... 43,44
Terms of relationship among the Hos ... .. 132
Use of possessive suffixes with — ... 38,40
Time, How computed ... ... ... ...118,123
Torang, Use of — where probability or doubt is indicated ... 73
Transitive verbs, Distinction between — and intransitive verbs ... 67
Formation of — from intransitive verbs ... 68
Tribal names, Ho equivalents of common — » ... ... 136
Verbs, Compound — ... ... ... ...107-110
Impersonal — ... ... ... ...104-106
Irregular — ... ... ... ... 97-103
Reciprocal — ... ... ... ... 95,96
Reflexive — ... ... ... ... 93,94
Vowels, Quantities of — ... ... ... ... 5_7
W
Weights, How expressed ... ... ... 124
^ .f
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SUPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Burrows, Lionel 4-54.7 Ho grammar
\